JP2022149174A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of performing appropriate display after recovery from power failure even when power failure occurs in the middle of a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine, in a game in which a push order navigation image is displayed, when a predetermined error occurs after a first stop operation is operated in a correct mode and then the predetermined error is cancelled, a push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not displayed again.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 58

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

A reel-type game machine (slot machine) starts a game based on the operation of a start lever after a predetermined number of game medals have been inserted, and has a plurality of rows of symbols arranged on the outer circumference. As a result of rotating the spinning drum (reel) and stopping the spinning drum based on the operation of the stop button for stopping the rotation, a predetermined pattern combination (for example, "7 patterns complete" etc. is displayed on the active line. When a bonus combination is lined up, it is common to switch to a special game (a game state in which the lottery probability of a small combination is higher than in normal times), which has a higher profit margin for the player than in a normal game. Here, in the reel-type game machine, in addition to such basic games, various effects are performed to improve the taste as a whole.

JP 2015-181620 A JP-A-2004-215803 JP 2014-171710 A JP 2006-263138 A

This type of game machine is desired to improve its performance.

a plurality of reels;
a plurality of stop switches;
a display device;
and an internal lottery means capable of executing an internal lottery,
As a result of the internal lottery, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode in a game in which a predetermined result is determined, a predetermined symbol combination can be stop-displayed,
As a result of the internal lottery, in the game in which the predetermined result is determined, an operation order image suggesting the predetermined operation mode can be displayed on the display device,
As operation order images, a first operation order image corresponding to the first stop operation, a second operation order image corresponding to the second stop operation, and a third stop order image corresponding to the third stop operation can be displayed,
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined as a result of the internal lottery and the operation order image is displayed on the display device, a predetermined error occurs after the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined operation mode is operated as the first stop operation. occurs, and the predetermined error is canceled thereafter, the game machine is configured not to display the first operation sequence image again on the display device.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the performance of the gaming machine.

It is a figure which shows the housing|casing exterior perspective view of slot machine PS1. It is a figure which shows the back surface of front panel PS2. It is a figure which shows the inner surface of cabinet PS3. It is a figure which shows a functional block. 4 is a flowchart showing program start processing; 4 is a flowchart showing power-off processing; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 7 is a flowchart showing power-off recovery processing; It is a flowchart which shows game progress main. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing; FIG. This is an example of a push button effect. It is an example of the display mode of the display device when the push button effect is executed. This is an example of a step-up notice in the normal effect state. This is an example of a dialog announcement in the normal production state. This is an example of a dialogue announcement during continuous production. This is an example of the effect switch image in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open. It is an example of the switch image for production|presentation in a demonstration screen. It is an example of the switch image for production|presentation in a demonstration screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a reel arrangement related to specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; It is a figure which shows symbol combination 1/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 2/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 3/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination 4/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows condition device 1/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows the condition device 2/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. It is a figure which shows the condition device 3/4 regarding specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention. It is a figure which shows the condition device 4/4 regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing non-RT internal lottery placement numbers ⅓ for specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing non-RT internal lottery placement numbers 2/3 regarding specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing non-RT internal lottery placement numbers 3/3 for specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an RT variation opportunity related to specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing RT internal lottery placement numbers ⅓ for specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing RT internal lottery placement numbers 2/3 for specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the RT internal lottery placement numbers 3/3 for specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention; It is a figure which shows the advantageous area transition regarding the specification 1 of the gaming machine based on this invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where a betting operation is performed by the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed; It is a figure explaining the case where the adjustment|settlement operation by the adjustment|settlement switch is performed after the completion|finish of a payout|payout process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where game medals are not inserted after settlement processing is completed; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where game medals are inserted after settlement processing is completed; It is a figure explaining the case where payout was performed normally. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs); It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen when payout|payout is normally performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a program showing interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission; It is a figure which shows the time chart of an 8-bit counter and timer interrupt processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing execution timings of timer interrupt processing; It is a figure which shows an example of stage change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a 1st continuous production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd continuous production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a telop is displayed in a continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the flow until a NEXT image is displayed in a continuous effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a form of a push order navigation image; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a push order navigation image is displayed on the liquid crystal; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a predetermined error occurs during display of a push order navigation image;

<Description of terms>
"Medals (number of medals)", "game media (number of game media)", and "game value" are synonymous. "Bet", "BET", and "insertion" regarding game media are synonymous, and all are acts of betting game media. When representing a hexadecimal value, it is described as "0x00" or "00h", and if there is no particular description before or after the number, it is represented in decimal. A "reel" may be referred to as a "rotating drum", and both have the same meaning. The "storage means" may be referred to as "RWM", "RAM", or "storage area", all of which are synonymous. "Giving" used in "giving game media" or "giving points" may be referred to as "payout" and both have the same meaning. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" for each function, but in either case, the same switch is indicated. Note that the "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may be provided as different switches. When a small win with a large payout or a small win with a small payout is stopped depending on the operation mode, the small win with a large payout is called a high bell (same as high bell, high small win), and the small win with a small payout is cheap. It is sometimes called an eye (also synonymous with a cheap bell and a cheap small role). At this time, when the combination of symbols without payout is stopped, it may be called a dropout (same meaning as dropout).

An embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as the present embodiment) will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

<Description of slot machine PS1>
Constituent elements of the slot machine PS1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG.

The slot machine PS1 is roughly divided into the front panel PS2 side and the cabinet PS3 side, where necessary parts and substrates are attached respectively. The front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the side of the cabinet PS3 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device. The locking device side can be opened. That is, the front panel PS2 functions as a door for the cabinet PS3.

<Front panel PS2>
The front panel PS2 (also referred to as the front door PS2, the front door PS2, or the front door PS2) is made up of a plate member with a design. A number display lamp 25, a credit number display 26, a winning number display 27, an operation panel 11, a lower panel 5, an upper or both side production lamp, etc. are provided, and a medal selector 34 (hereinafter simply referred to as "selector") is provided on the back side. ), display device 32, sub-control board 1000, various boards, etc., setting display LED (hereinafter referred to as setting value display LED, setting display device, setting value display device, setting display device, setting value display device There is) is provided.

<Display window 4>
The display window 4 is an area provided on the front panel PS2, and the symbols drawn on the reel can be visually recognized when the front panel PS2 is closed. The patterns printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reel tapes fixed to the reel rims of the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are configured to be visible through the display window 4 from the front side (player side). It is When the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols out of the 21 symbols (20, 16, etc. may be freely designed according to the specifications) are visible. That is, from the display window 4, 3 [symbols]×3 [reels]=9 patterns in total can be visually recognized. Here, among the stop positions where the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c each stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is the upper stage, the center stop position is the middle stage, and the lowest stop position is the lower stage. and

<Valid line>
The active line is a symbol combination line that is subject to winning determination processing (to be described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are stopped. The effective line in this embodiment is visible through the display window 4, and is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) passing through the middle of each reel. When it is determined that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line corresponds to any combination by the prize determination process, the process corresponding to the stopped symbol combination is performed. As an example, when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to a small winning combination such as a bell has stopped, game medal (hereinafter may be referred to as medal, game medium, or game value) payout process or credit addition process is performed. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped, automatic bet processing is executed.

Depending on the slot machine PS1, the effective lines may be set to five lines, namely, an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, an upward right line, and a downward right line. (upper stage, lower stage of right reel 8c), approximately valley type (upper stage of left reel 8a, lower stage of middle reel 8b, upper stage of right reel 8c), approximately L-shaped (upper stage of left reel 8a, lower stage of middle reel 8b, lower stage of right reel 8c) It can be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1, such as setting 6 lines or more, or setting the effective line so that it changes depending on the number of bets. A straight line other than the valid line may be called an invalid line.

<Operation instruction lamp 24>
The operation instruction lamp 24 is provided around the display window 4, and instructs the player to operate the stop switch 13 (described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are rotating. It indicates the order. That is, when the left operation instruction lamp 24a is lit (the middle operation instruction lamp 24b and the right operation instruction lamp 24c are extinguished), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated, and the middle operation instruction lamp 24b is lit. When (the left operation instruction lamp 24a and the right operation instruction lamp 24c are turned off), it indicates that the middle stop switch 13b should be operated, and the right operation instruction lamp 24c is lit (the left operation instruction lamp 24a and the middle operation instruction lamp are turned off). 24b is extinguished), it indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

<Bet number display lamp 25>
The bet number display lamp 25 (bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25) is provided on the operation panel 11, and the number of bets by the player's operation is displayed. It has a function to display. It is also composed of a 1-bed lamp 25a (not shown), a 2-bed lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3-bed lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is betted, the 1-bet lamp 25a lights up, when two medals are betted in total, the 1-bet lamp 25a and 2-bet lamp 25b are lit up, and when three medals are betted in total, the 1-bet lamp 25a is lit. , the 2 bed lamp 25b and the 3 bed lamp 25c are lit. Also, although not shown, after the symbol combination relating to the replay is displayed, when the automatic betting process is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the bet number used in the game in which the replay was won is lit. At the same time, the replay lamp is turned on. The lighting timing of the bet number display lamp 25 and the lighting timing of the replay lamp may be the same, or one of them may be lit first.

<Credit number display 26>
The credit number display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). It is composed of a segment display 26b (not shown) that mainly displays the lower digits of the credit amount, which is composed of segments and dot points (DP). The number of credits means the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and up to 50 can be stored. Also, when a normal game cannot be played, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

<Acquisition number indicator 27>
The acquired number display 27 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). It is composed of a segment display 27b (not shown) which mainly displays the lower digits of the number of acquired sheets composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). The number of won medals means the number of medals paid out to the player according to the game result in the slot machine PS1 (including the number of medals stored in the credit number display 26). Also, when a normal game cannot be played, such as when an error is detected, the error may be displayed.

The credit number display 26 and the acquired number display 27 display respective information by means of segment indicators 26a, 26b, 27a and 27b. It is also conceivable to display different information. For example, information indicating that the user is staying in an advantageous section (to be described later) or information indicating that a predetermined external signal is being output can be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. mentioned. In addition, it may have the capability of notifying the pressing order by using the upper digit display section and the lower digit display section of the acquired number display 27 . When the winning number display 27 is used to notify the pressing order, the winning number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

<Operation panel 11>
The operation panel 11 is provided substantially in the center of the front panel PS2. The operation panel 11 is provided in a stepped manner with a substantially horizontal horizontal portion and a vertical portion extending substantially vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal portion. The horizontal part includes a medal slot 17, a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, a checkout switch, and an effect. A switch is provided for

<Start switch 12>
A start switch (also called a start lever) 12 is provided on the vertical portion of the operation panel 11 . It consists of a lever-shaped operation part, and the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and it is determined that the start switch has been operated by turning off the start switch sensor when operated. The operation of the start switch 12 becomes effective when the number of bets reaches a specified number, and when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process, a process related to the instruction function, a reel rotation process, or the like is executed. Further, in this embodiment, since the input signal is low active, when the start switch sensor is ON during non-operation, the start switch input signal is OFF, and when the start switch sensor is ON and OFF during operation. When this occurs, the start switch input signal is turned ON. The configuration is not limited to this, and the start switch input signal may be turned on when the start switch sensor is turned on.

Hereinafter, simply referring to "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated" means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and that the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON. represents what happened.

<Stop switch 13>
A stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11 . In this embodiment, the left stop switch 13a corresponds to the left reel 8a, the middle stop switch 13b corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the right stop switch 13c corresponds to the right reel 8c. Also, when the stop switch 13 is operable, the color of the lamp provided in the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamp around it is changed to suggest that the stop switch 13 is effective. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, it lights up in blue, and when it cannot be operated, it lights up in red. Further, for example, the light is turned on when the stop switch 13 can be operated, and the light is turned off when the operation is impossible.

<Medal slot 17>
A medal slot 17 is provided on the operation panel 11 . It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal insertion slot, and restricts the insertion of medals of a standard size or larger. A plurality of types of medal insertion slots 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of a plurality of types of medals. are the same.

Regarding the input of game media, the game media are not limited to the medals described above. is input to the game machine, and based on the input game medium information, the number of bets may be set, or addition may be made at the time of winning.

<Bet switch (MAX bed switch 18, 1 bed switch 19)>
A bed switch is provided on the operation panel 11 . When the bet switch is operated when there are stored medals in the credit, the bet processing is executed and the bet number setting processing equivalent to the act of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 17 is performed. However, even if the bet switch is operated when medals are not stored in the credit, the bet processing is invalidated (the bet switch operation is not accepted). In addition, the MAX bet switch 18 is composed of a pressing portion operated by the player, a detecting portion for detecting the operation of the pressing portion, and a light emitting portion (also referred to as a MAX bet lamp) for lighting the pressing portion. The switch 19 is composed of a pressing portion operated by the player and a detection portion detecting the operation of the pressing portion (the 1-bet switch 19 does not have a light-emitting portion).

When the MAX bet switch is operated, the MAX bet lamp informs the player that the betting process can be executed. Various modes such as periodic blinking are conceivable. Conversely, when the bet processing cannot be executed even if the MAX bet switch is operated, it is conceivable to light the MAX bet lamp in a specific color or not to light the MAX bet lamp.

In addition, a MAX bet switch 18 with which the maximum number (three in this embodiment) set for each slot machine PS1 can be bet, and a 1-bet switch 19 with which one can be bet are provided. When the bet switch 18 is operated, the MAX bet process is executed, and when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated, the 1-bet process is executed. The MAX bet process can be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently placed is 3 or more, and the number of bets currently placed is less than 3. and the sum of the number of bets currently betted is less than 3 (in other words, the situation where the number of bets is less than 3 even if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated), and in the situation where 3 bets have already been made It is not possible. The 1-bet process can be executed when the number of credits is 1 or more and the number of bets currently bet is less than 3, and cannot be executed when 3 bets have already been made.

Also, every time the 1-bet switch 19 is operated, 1-bet processing is executed, and if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated 3 times from the state where no bet is made, it becomes a 3-bet, and the 1-bet switch 19 is operated 3 times. This corresponds to one operation of the MAX bet switch 18 .

Also, the 1-bet switch 19 is disabled when 3-bets have been made, but if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated once in the situation where 3-bets have been made, the 1-bet state is entered and credits are awarded. You may be comprised so that two sheets may be returned.

Also, although the embodiment has been described in which the MAX bet process executed by operating the MAX bet switch 18 is not executed when the number of bets is less than 3, the process of betting the maximum number that can be bet at present is also conceivable. In other words, if no bet is made and the number of credits is 2, and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, 2 bets may be made.

The maximum number of bets that can be betted may differ depending on the game state. good too.

<Sub switch 20>
The sub-switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11, and includes a pressing portion made of a translucent member for direct operation by the player, and a detecting portion for detecting that the pressing portion has been operated. and a sub-switch lamp for lighting the depressed portion of the sub-switch. This sub-switch 20 is a switch for mainly displaying a menu screen on a display device 32, which will be described later. As input means managed by the sub-control board 1000, in addition to the sub-switches 20, sub-cross key switches 21 (upper switch, lower switch, left switch, right switch) and performance switches (operated by instructions during the game) switch) is provided. Also, the sub-switch 20 can function as a trigger for activating an interlocking system with a mobile terminal (hereinafter also referred to as a mobile interlocking system), which will be described later. Although the sub-switches 20 are used for the menu display function and the effect switches are used for operation during the game, they may be used as common switches.

The menu screen displays winning combination items, reel arrangement items, volume adjustment items, light amount adjustment items, and mobile interlocking system-related items. The cursor that selects is controlled to move up and down. When the subswitch 20 is operated while the cursor is on any of the items, the details of the item are displayed. For example, if the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on the volume adjustment item, the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the volume can be adjusted with the left switch or right switch of the sub cross key switch 21. there is

Further, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 after the game is finished and no bets have been placed. At this time, the effect state can be normal effect, continuous effect, AT effect, or demo screen (a screen that is displayed 60 seconds after the end of the game, and displays the manufacturer name and effect introduction as a moving image). Even in this situation, the menu screen is displayed by operating the subswitch 20. - 特許庁However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and the menu screen may not be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous production or AT production.

<Direction switch>
The effect switch is provided on the operation panel 11, and includes a pressing portion made of a light-transmitting member for direct operation by the player, and a detecting portion for detecting that the pressing portion has been operated. and an effect switch lamp for lighting the pressing part of the effect switch. When the switch for performance is operated in a situation where the operation of the switch for performance is effective, the performance based on the operation is executed. For example, the display device (hereinafter also simply referred to as "liquid crystal") 32 displays "success" (hereinafter referred to as "success effect") indicating that a privilege is given in the final game of the continuous effect when the continuous effect is being executed. ) or a "failure" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a failure effect), which means that the benefit is not given, is displayed by operating the effect switch. A mode of displaying "success" or "failure" is conceivable.

In addition, in a situation where the operation of the switch for effect is effective, the effect switch lamp lights up so that the player can be informed that the operation of the switch for effect is effective. As a lighting mode of the performance switch, it is conceivable that the performance switch is turned off when the performance switch operation is invalid, and is lit when the performance switch operation is valid. In addition to the lighting mode in which the operation of the effect switch is effective, a mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated at a constant cycle may be used.

In addition, in a situation where the operation of the effect switch is effective, the fact that the operation of the effect switch is effective is notified by performing a display imitating the effect switch on the liquid crystal. When a display imitating a switch for effect is displayed on the liquid crystal, it is displayed based on a command received from the main control means 100 . For example, it is conceivable that a display imitating a switch for effect is performed based on the start switch reception command, or a display imitating a switch for effect is performed based on the all reel stop command.

<Payment switch>
A settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11 . By being operated after the game is over, the number of bet game media or the number of game media stored in credits is paid out to the player (settlement process). note that. In this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where a bet has been made and game media are stored in the credits, the betted game media are first paid out and then stored in the credits. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of paying out the game media stored in the credits may be executed only when the number of betted game media is zero. In other words, when the settlement switch is operated in a state where a bet is placed, only the game media that are bet are paid out, and when the settlement switch is operated again after that, the game media stored in the credits are paid out. may

<Bottom panel 5>
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel PS2. A design sheet is sandwiched between two sheets of transparent resin, and the design sheet is printed with a characteristic color of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout port 45>
A medal payout port 45 is provided below the lower panel 5 . This is an exit for ejecting medals paid out from a hopper 44 (also referred to as a hopper) to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (receiving tray 28). It also serves as a return opening for releasing medals removed from the medal selector 34, which will be described later, to the outside of the slot machine PS1.

<Saucer 28>
A receiving tray 28 is provided below the lower panel 5 . It has a substantially recessed structure so as to receive and store medals discharged from the medal payout port 45, and protrudes toward the player side so that the stored medals can be checked by the player.

In addition, the receiving tray 28 has other functions such as a cigarette ashtray 29 and a resin sheet to which a union license seal, a patent stamp seal, and a model seal are attached, and seal storage having an opening for displaying to the player side. A section 30 is also provided.

<Speaker S>
The speakers S are provided above and below the front panel PS2. It is connected to the sub-control board 1000 by a harness (not shown), and the speaker S outputs an error sound and a warning sound informing that an error has occurred, in addition to sound effects in accordance with the production. In the following description, the speaker provided above the front panel PS2 may be referred to as an upper speaker, and the speaker provided below the front panel PS2 may be referred to as a lower speaker.

<Display device 32>
The display device 32 is provided above the front panel PS2. It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices such as liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and in addition to various effects images, a navigation image that instructs the order of pressing the stop switch 13 and the position of the eyes during the game (when only the order of pressing is displayed, the navigation image of the pressing order ( Also called push order image, operation order image, or operation order image), if only the push position is displayed, push navigation image (also called push order image, operation position image), or if push order and push position are displayed Also, an operation mode navigation image (also referred to as an operation mode image) may be called as a generic concept of the pressing order and pressing position.), an error image when an error occurs, and the like are displayed. Also, depending on the model, there is a slot machine PS1 in which the display device 32 is not mounted.

<Other production devices such as dot displays and movable accessories>
Other production devices such as dot displays and movable accessories are provided at arbitrary positions on the front panel PS2 such as the periphery of the display window 4 and the upper and lower panels. Other production devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and in addition to various production images and production operations, navigation images and operations for instructing the pressing order and position of the stop switch 13 during the game, and when an error occurs. display error images and perform actions. Other effect devices are arbitrarily mounted according to the model of the slot machine PS1. Various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can also be used as production devices. In particular, in a game machine having a liquid crystal as an additional effect device, the display device 32 may be referred to as a main display device, and the liquid crystal as another effect device may be referred to as a sub display device. In this case, the display area of the main display device is larger than that of the sub display device.

<Medal Selector 34>
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the back side of the front panel PS2 and is provided in the downflow passage below the medal slot 17 . The medal selector 34 has a medal count function of counting the number of medals inserted by the player with a sensor provided on the flow passage, a medal rejection function of guiding the inserted non-standard medals to the receiving tray 28, and a front panel PS2 front surface. An eject function that ejects medals stuck in the medal selector 34 by operating the eject switch provided in the , and an electrically driven blocking member (also called a blocker) that blocks medals that are inserted other than when accepting medals. It has a blocker function that removes it from the downflow passage. Also, if the medals inserted at the time of medal reception are legitimate medals, the medal selector 34 discharges the medals to the hopper 44 located downstream.

Various sensors in the medal selector are composed of a path sensor, an insertion sensor 1, an insertion sensor 2, and a shoot sensor. The path sensor is a sensor that first detects medals inserted from the medal slot, and is provided to count the number of inserted medals and ejected medals. The throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 are positioned downstream of the passage sensor and the blocker, and are used to determine the passage time of the medals passing through the throw-in sensor 1 and the throw-in sensor 2 to determine normal passage or abnormal passage. is provided. Note that the input sensor 2 is located downstream of the input sensor 1 . The shoot sensor is located downstream of the throw-in sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of thrown-in medals and ejected medals. Since the passage sensor and the shoot sensor have overlapping functions, only one of them may be provided.

When the blocker in the medal selector is ON, it permits passage of game medals, and when it is OFF, it prohibits passage of game medals. Permitting the passage of game medals means that the game medals inserted from the medal slot are led to the hopper 44, and disallowing passage of the game medals means that the game medals inserted from the medal slot are not allowed to pass through the hopper. It is not to be led to 44.

Components of the slot machine PS1 on the side of the cabinet PS3 will be described below.

<Cabinet PS3>
The cabinet PS3 is a rectangular box with an opening on one side, and contains reel unit 6, hopper 44, auxiliary tank 46, setting key switch 37, reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter simply "reset switch"). or a "setting switch"), a power supply device 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, and the like.

<Main control board 100>
The main control board 100 is housed in the internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are put together, and the main control board case body and the main control board case cover cannot be easily opened and closed by caulking. (sealed). The main control board 100 is fixed to the main control board case bracket in cabinet PS3.

<Reel unit 6>
The reel unit 6 mainly includes a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a middle reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet PS3 and fixed by a locking member (screw or rivet).

The reels (left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, right reel 8c) consist of a reel base, a reel tape with a plurality of patterns attached to the outer circumference of the reel base, and a stepping shaft supported by the reel base. It consists of a motor and a motor fixing base that fixes the stepping motor and is neglected as a reel unit. A pattern arrangement different for each reel is drawn on the reel tape.

When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the reels are accelerated, and after reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 revolutions/minute), the constant speed rotation state is maintained by moving the stepping motor one step for each interrupt. (constant speed rotation), according to the operation of the stop switch 13 by the player, the corresponding reel is moved to the stop position determined for each stop operation reception position at constant speed rotation, and the reel is moved to the stop position. After that, the brake is applied (the four-phase excitation signal is output) to stop the rotation of the reel and the excitation output is terminated.

In addition, an index is provided on the spoke portion provided on the reel base of each reel, and the index sensor provided on the motor fixing base of each reel detects the index, which is a reference during rotation for each lap. The position of the pattern (also called the initial pattern) is determined. The number of steps of the stepping motor, which is the drive source of the reel in this embodiment, is 336 steps, and one cycle is performed by timer interrupt processing 336 times during constant-speed rotation. During constant-speed rotation, the rotation failure detection counter is incremented each time the timer interrupt process is executed twice. In other words, if the reel does not make one rotation even after 360 times of timer interrupt processing, it is determined that the rotation is defective. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when the index is detected, so that the rotation failure detection counter becomes 0 before it reaches 180 if the constant speed rotation process is normal.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the index is detected during constant speed processing, and it is not determined whether or not the index is detected during acceleration processing. It may be determined whether or not the index is detected during the acceleration process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to bring the player into a state in which it is possible to accept the stoppage more quickly.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided on the motor fixed base of each reel, and it is lit to emphasize the stopped pattern after the reel stops, or to improve the visibility of the pattern while the reel is rotating. I'm letting you

<Hopper 44>
The hopper 44 is a device that mainly stores medals thrown in by the player. The hopper 44 is placed in engagement with a rail provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3, and can slide back and forth along the rail. The hopper 44 includes a storage tank portion that receives and stores medals guided from the medal selector 34 into the game machine, a hopper motor that is driven by input of a drive signal from the hopper driving means, and a hopper motor that is pivotally supported. A rotating disk for aligning the medals in the part, a medal dispensing part provided with a discharge mechanism for discharging the medals one by one to the tray 28 by rotating the rotating disk, and a medal discharge port for discharging the medals by the medal dispensing part. , and a payout sensor for detecting medals ejected from the medal ejection port.

<Auxiliary tank 46>
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be able to store medals, and the medals stored in excess of the allowable amount of the storage tank portion of the hopper 44 pass through the downwardly inclined rail portion provided in the storage tank portion. is stored in the auxiliary tank 46. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box-like structure, and when installed in the cabinet PS3, two full detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are connected to the auxiliary tank through through holes provided on at least one side surface. 46 is exposed, and when a certain amount or more of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot are stored, two full detection electrodes are energized through the medals, and the hopper 44 and the auxiliary tank 46 are full. We judge that it is. The number of fullness detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of fullness detection electrodes may be changed, such as providing three. Further, the method of fullness detection is not limited to the method of using the fullness detection electrode, and may be configured to enable fullness detection by detecting medals with a sensor provided at a predetermined position.

<Setting key switch 37>
The setting key switch 37 is provided in a setting key switch unit provided inside the slot machine PS1 and provided with an opening/closing door on the front surface thereof. After opening the front panel PS2, the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit is opened to allow access. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it clockwise by 90 degrees. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in a state in which tokens can be accepted, the current set value can be confirmed. Executes setting change processing (described later).

<Power supply device 39>
The power supply device 39 is provided on the lower left side of the cabinet PS3 when viewed from the front. The power supply device 39 has a rectangular box structure, is provided with a power switch 40 on the outside, and is provided with a power supply board for generating a voltage inside. The power supply device 39 is individually connected to the rotary device board and the sub-control board 1000 via a harness (not shown). Power is supplied to the control board 100 .

When the power switch 40 is turned on, the power supply device 39 takes in power from the outside of the slot machine PS1 and then generates predetermined voltages for the main control board 100 and the sub control board 1000 respectively. It is configured to take in voltage, and is configured not to take in power from the outside of the slot machine PS1 when the power switch 40 is turned off.

<External output terminal plate 47>
The external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally mounted inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1, and outputs a signal related to the game result output from the main control board 100 in a predetermined format. , and transmitted to the outside of the slot machine PS1. Contents of game results include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (the number of big bonuses, the number of regular bonuses), the door open signal, and the like. Other conditions for transmitting a signal to the outside are when the main control board 100 is controlled by the AT state, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, when the value of the game-related counter reaches a predetermined value, etc. It can be set based on the information determined in advance.

<Functional block diagram>
A functional block diagram of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Main control board 100>
The slot machine PS1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 100 (also referred to as main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100) that governs general game flow, a sub control board 1000 (sub control means 1000). , sub control board 1000, sub control means 1000), door relay board (also called central display board), rotary device board, reset/setting switch 38, setting key switch, etc. , which enables data communication. However, the main control board 100 and the sub control board 1000 are not capable of two-way communication, and one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 1000 enables data communication.

A main control chip is mounted on the main control board 100 . In the main control chip, a main control CPU, a main control ROM, a main control RAM, etc. can communicate with each other via a bus. In addition, the main control chip has a main control built-in register, and the main control built-in register and the main control CPU can communicate with each other via a bus. Furthermore, the main control chip includes general-purpose registers (for example, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that can be used by the main control CPU for calculation, etc., and call instructions ( For example, a PC register for storing a program (return address) after a return instruction (for example, RET instruction) after execution of a program by CALL instruction), an interrupt register (for example, IFF1 register, IFF2 register).

Under the control of the main control chip, the winning lottery (also called internal lottery), reel drive control (also called reel control), payout control, etc. are appropriately communicated to various boards. In addition, for the sub-control board 1000, as a result of the internal lottery, the selected role (AT role, AT target role, pushing role, pushing role, and operation procedure role including both pushing and pushing roles) ), and when the main control means 100 side notifies the information (push order, operation timing) regarding the display of the choice hand, the choice hand information (choice hand group information, selection By transmitting the information regarding the display of the combination), it becomes possible for the sub-control means to notify the information regarding the display of the selected combination. It should be noted that all the processes related to AT, such as shifting to AT, extending the number of AT games, and notifying the pressing order, may be referred to as processes related to (related to) the instruction function. It should be noted that the push order role is a conditional device in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and the game medals given to the player are different depending on the order of the reels to be stopped (push order), and the push order role is the operation of the stop button. This is a condition device in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and the game medals given to the player are different depending on the timing of acceptance.

The storage capacity of the main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 is "16 KB or less", and the use area (also referred to as the first program area) of "7.5 KB or less" and other areas outside the use area ( Also called a second program area). In the usable area, there is only a control area of "4.5 KB or less" (also referred to as a first control area) in which the program executed by the main control board 100 is stored, and information other than the program (for example, internal lottery table information). is stored or will be stored in a data area of "3.0 KB or less" (also referred to as a first data area). Outside the use area, there are a control area (also referred to as a second control area) and a data area (also referred to as a second data area) like the use area. A program relating to the progress of the game is stored in the usage area, and a program relating to anti-fraud measures and a program used for gaming machine testing are stored outside the usage area.

The storage capacity of the main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 is "1024B or less", and the use area (also referred to as the first work area) of "512B or less" and the other outside the use area (second (also referred to as a work area). The first work area is a rewritable storage area according to the progress of the game, and the second work area is a rewritable storage area during the execution of anti-fraud measures and game machine test programs.

The storage areas of the main control RAM built into the main control chip include storage areas for switch state flags indicating the ON/OFF state of the stop changeover switch and the ON/OFF state of the automatic settlement switch, which are set 1 to 6. A storage area for set value information indicating any value of RT status information storage area indicating which RT status among a plurality of RT statuses, a specific condition device indicating the winning status of a specific condition device such as a bonus , other game information storage areas where information necessary to progress the game is stored, unused unused storage areas, stack area storage areas where data saved from registers are stored, There is a temporary stack area storage area that is set when the power is turned on.

The main control RAM is initialized at the time of setting change processing by the setting change means, at the time of power failure recovery processing, and at the start of each game. The range is different.

During the setting change process, if power-off recovery cannot be performed normally, or if recovery is not possible, data 0 is set (initialized) in the RAM area excluding the switch status flag storage area. In other words, only the switch state flag is taken over the state before the setting change. For example, the RT state and the condition device flag are cleared and not taken over.

Also, during setting change processing, either when the power failure recovery can be performed normally or when the state is not recoverable, that is, when the setting change processing is performed normally, the storage area of the switch state flag , set value information storage area, RT status information storage area, and the storage area of the specific condition device are stored. In other words, the RT state, the set value data, and the condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the set values after the setting change while maintaining the game state before the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and new setting values are set in subsequent setting change processing.

In addition, during power-off recovery processing, at the start of each game, data is stored in the stack area storage area excluding the unused storage area of the RAM area and the maximum use area at the time of power-off recovery when the RAM is initialized. Set to 0.

The main control built-in register built in the main control chip is for setting the operation of each peripheral circuit (eg, timer circuit, etc.) built in the main control chip and controlling its function.

For example, by writing (also referred to as setting or storing) data to a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in register by a program stored in the main control ROM, one of the programs stored in the main control ROM, the maskable Settings (timer circuit settings) relating to interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) can be performed.

<Sub-control board 1000>
A sub-control chip is mounted on the sub-control board 1000 . In the sub-control chip, the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 is capable of two-way communication with the performance control board, and transmits data designating the performance to be output to the speaker S, the LED lamp, the sub-switch 20, the performance switch, and the like. Information to the display device 32 is transmitted to the image control board. Further, the sub-control board 1000 is directly supplied with power from the power supply board.

<Rotor device substrate>
The reel device board is a relay board that performs data communication between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also called external collective terminal board 47), etc. and the main control board 100. . A reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the reel device board when the protruding piece (also called an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether or not the front door PS2 is opened. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether or not medals are properly passed when they are paid out from the hopper 44 . The external collective terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to a hall computer outside the game machine. Further, power is supplied directly from the power supply board to the rotary drum device board.

<Door relay board>
The information input to the door relay board includes various sensor information in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, passage sensor, chute sensor), bed switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and information to be output. They include blocker information, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board includes a selector, bed switch, stop switch, checkout switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, 3 bed lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, It is electrically connected to the advantageous section ramp.

<Production control board>
The production control board (also referred to as production control means) includes a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, a production switch, a movable accessory, a speaker S, a back lamp, an LED lamp provided on the front panel PS2, and a display device 32. is electrically connected to an image control board that controls the display contents of the .

The effect control means is configured to be capable of two-way communication with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the output of effects to the effect device based on the effect command received from the sub-control means 1000. - 特許庁

The effect control means selects the contents of the effect based on the lottery result of the combination by the internal lottery means. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of effect contents are provided in advance, and the effect control means performs a lottery using a software random number after the internal lottery means performs a lottery for a winning combination at the start of the game. Select content.

In addition, a plurality of types of effects are provided according to not only the result of the combination lottery but also the result of the freeze lottery, the game state (RT state, freeze state), and the like. More specifically, a plurality of types of presentation contents are provided corresponding to bonus wins, small win wins, replay wins, non-win wins, and the like.

As the game progresses, the content of the production is at what timing (when the start switch 12 is operated, when each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) and what kind of production is output (how the lamp is lit, It determines whether to flash or turn off, what kind of sound to output from the speaker S, what kind of image to display on the display device 32, etc.).

Also, it is possible to generate an effect output by the effect control means according to an operation by the player. For example, the start switch 12, the stop switch 13, the medal insertion slot 17, the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), the settlement switch, etc., for which operation signals are input to the main control board 100, are operated according to the operation signals. It is conceivable that an effect is generated by the effect control means of the sub-control board 1000 based on the sub-control command transmitted from the control board 100, and the sub-switch 20 and the sub-cross key for inputting the operation signal to the sub-control board 1000. It is also conceivable to directly generate an effect from the sub-control board 1000 according to the sub-input switch operating means such as the switch 21 and the effect switch. Also, although the sub-control board 1000 and the performance control board are separate boards, they may be configured as one board. In that case, the sub-control board 1000 has the functions and processes of the production control board, and the sub-control board 1000 includes the sub-switch 20, the sub-cross key switch 21, the production switch, the movable accessory, the speaker S, the back lamp, and the front panel. An LED lamp provided in the PS 2 and an image control board for controlling display contents of the display device 32 may be electrically connected.

<Image control board>
The image control board (also referred to as image control means) is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, and the like for specifically displaying the effect content on the display device 32 .

<Power board>
In the slot machine PS1 of the present embodiment, power is supplied from the power board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40 . The power supplied to the reel device board supplies power to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. Then, the supplied electric power is supplied to each component to establish an electrical connection. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 supplies power to the performance control board and power to the image control board. The supplied electric power is supplied to each component and electrically connected.

The control of the main control board 100 that controls the game of the gaming machine will be described.

<Error type>
Errors are roughly classified into recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.

<Recoverable error>
Errors that can be recovered include selector-related errors (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), hopper 44-related errors (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door open error, harness disconnection error, etc. When a restorable error is set, after removing the factors of various restorable errors, if the operation of the reset switch is accepted, the game can be returned to the game without turning on the power again. During the restorable error, the display device 32, payout amount indicator, and various lamps display information about the error in order to notify the player of what error has occurred.

When a recoverable error is detected during a game, progress of the game may be stopped at the time of detection, or may be stopped after completion of the game in which the recoverable error is detected. By stopping the progress of the game during the restorable error, even if the restorable error occurs due to fraud, damage to the game parlor manager can be suppressed. As a condition for recovering from a recoverable error state, it may be configured so that recovery is automatically performed by removing the cause of the error, and an error that can be recovered without turning on the power again is called a recoverable error. ing.

<Unrecoverable error>
In the slot machine PS1 of the present embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the progress of the game is restricted by clearing the output from the output port, etc., and the credit number indicator 26 displays according to the type of error. It notifies that it is in a non-recoverable state, such as

In addition, when a recoverable error is set, the recoverable error is cleared when the operation of the reset switch (not shown) is accepted. An unrecoverable error cannot be cleared simply by turning on the power again. In this case, the unrecoverable error is canceled by performing the setting change process. When the power is turned on again in the event of an unrecoverable error, after a part of the power failure recovery process is executed, the unrecoverable error display is repeatedly executed so that the subsequent game processes are not executed.

As non-recoverable errors, if the number of bets at the lottery is out of the specified number, if the value is not within the normal range in the setting value error check, it is determined that the power supply shutdown processing was not performed normally when the power supply was restored. In some cases, when it is determined that there is a random number abnormality such as an abnormality in the frequency of the crystal oscillator, the symbol combination corresponding to the combination that has not been won on the active line is stopped in the winning determination process.

Further, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the progress of the game is stopped regardless of whether it is during the game or during the game standby (from the end of the game to the start of the next game).

<Game method, game flow>
In order to play a game in the slot machine PS1, first, medals are inserted from the medal slot 17, or pre-stored medals are betted (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Set the number of medals to bet (also referred to as the prescribed number). In this embodiment, three sheets are set as the prescribed number. By setting the number of medals to be bet, the activated line is set to be effective and the game becomes possible.

When medals are inserted from a new medal insertion slot in a situation where the number of medals to bet is set to the upper limit, the number of game medals stored in the credit increases. The maximum number of cards stored in the credit is 50. If medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of bets (3) and the upper limit of the accumulated amount (50) are inserted from the medal slot (54th medal), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (when medals are inserted into the gaming machine) in a state to prevent it) and returned to the receiving tray. That is, when the number of bets is the upper limit and the number of accumulated credits is the upper limit, the blocker is turned off (the path to the hopper 44 in the selector is not formed).

A situation in which the number of bets is added when medals are inserted is when the number of bets is less than 3 (less than the maximum number of bets in the game state when the medals are inserted). In addition, as a situation in which credits can be stored when medals are inserted, the number of bets is 3 (the maximum number of bets in the game state when medals are inserted) and the credit is less than 50 (credit is less than the maximum number that can be stored). That is, when the sum of the number of bets and the number of stored credits is less than 53, medals are inserted into the gaming machine when inserted from the medal slot. As a condition for inserting medals into the gaming machine, it is also possible that the player is waiting for a game (a period from the end of the game to the start of the next game). For example, a symbol combination related to replay is displayed, and the token insertion requirement is satisfied even during game standby after the automatic betting process is executed. In this case, since three coins are automatically betted, if the number of accumulated credits is less than 50, the token insertion requirement is satisfied.

Next, when the operation of the start switch 12 is received, the internal lottery process is executed, and after determining the result of the internal lottery process (also referred to as the result of the internal lottery process, the condition device number), the minimum game time (wait time (period), or 4.1 second timer) has passed, and if the wait time has passed, the rotation of each reel is started, and if the wait time has not passed, the wait time has passed. Wait without spinning each reel until

Next, when the operation (stop operation) of any stop switch of the stop switch 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, according to the timing of accepting the combination lottery result and the stop operation The reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 that has been operated is stopped. When all the reels are stopped (also called full stop), it is determined whether or not each stop symbol determined at the time of accepting the stoppage of each reel is normal. Search, and pay out medals (including addition to credits), set replay (automatic bet processing), set bonus status, end bonus status, set RT status, Processing such as termination of the RT state is performed, and one game is terminated.

<Freeze processing>
The freeze process (also referred to as a freeze effect) that delays the progress of the game by suspending the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time includes, for example, accepting game media, which are functions related to the progress of the game, and controlling the number of pre-credited game media bet. For example, the function related to acceptance of operation of the bet switch for setting, acceptance of operation of the start switch 12 for starting the game, or acceptance of stop operation of the reels may be temporarily stopped. Note that the freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board 100 .

As the freeze effect, all the functions related to the progress of the game may be temporarily stopped, or only some of the functions may be temporarily stopped.

Modes for pausing the progress of the game include control processing based on the operation of the player (processing for forming a path through which medals are guided to the hopper 44 by blocker control, processing for setting the number of bets based on the operation of the bet switch, For example, reel rotation processing or internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch 12, and reel stop processing based on the operation of the stop switch 13) are not performed.

When an input signal based on the player's operation is issued during the period in which the progress of the game is paused by the freeze effect, control processing based on the input signal is not performed, the input signal is not accepted, or the input signal is not received. By performing processing such as delaying the transmission until a predetermined period elapses, the game end timing in one game is delayed as compared with the case where the freeze effect is not performed.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels are not rotated for a predetermined period and the reels are rotated after a predetermined period. When is operated, internal lottery and reel rotation are not performed for a predetermined period of time, and internal lottery and reel rotation are performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or when start switch 12 is operated, internal lottery is not performed for a predetermined period of time. However, the reels are not rotated and the reels are rotated after a predetermined period of time has passed, or the predetermined period is set after the start switch 12 is operated and the internal lottery is performed, and the reels are rotated or stopped during the predetermined period. , or after the start switch 12 is operated to perform internal lottery and reel rotation, a predetermined period is set and stop acceptance of the stop switch 13 is disabled for the predetermined period.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, as a result of the freeze effect performed based on the reception of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the operation of the stop switch 13, a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reel. In the freeze effect performed based on, the control processing of the freeze effect is different.

As the control processing of the freeze effect performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13, for example, when the left stop switch 13a is operated during all reel rotations and freezes, the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a is stopped. Afterwards, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c is invalidated. As a result, the player cannot stop the rotating middle and right reels for a predetermined period of time. , the timing until the end of the game in one game can be delayed.

As a result of accepting the operation of the stop switch 13, the operation of the stop switch 13 other than the stop switch 13 to be stopped last is accepted as the control processing of the freeze performance performed based on the stop display of the specific symbol on the reel. When a specific pattern is stopped and displayed on each reel as a result, the stop acceptance of the stop switch 13 to be stopped last is invalidated, or the operation of the stop switch 13 to be stopped last is accepted. Based on the fact that a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on each reel, the bet number setting process based on the operation of the bet switch to start the next game, the process of detecting the insertion of game media by the passing sensor, or replay is enabled. For example, control processing or the like based on the automatic betting processing that is performed when the player stops on the line is not performed.

During the predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operation is temporarily stopped, but the game machine operation irrespective of the progress of the game can be executed. For example, even if the stop control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the rotation mode of the reel can be arbitrarily set such as rotating in a normal rotation mode, rotating at a lower speed than usual, or rotating at a higher speed. can do.

As the rotation mode of the reels during a predetermined period, the reels are rotated in a direction opposite to the normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), the reels are rotated a predetermined number of symbols and a specific combination of symbols is stopped, and a predetermined number of reels are rotated. For example, stopping a reel and rotating another reel, changing the rotation speed of a reel, or changing the operation of a reel due to a player's operation.

The predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to predetermined conditions. Here, the predetermined condition is the detection of a signal based on the operation reception status of various switches by the player (the operation status of the start switch 12, the bet switch, the stop switch 13, or the settlement switch, etc.), and the result of the freeze lottery. is mentioned. In addition, changing includes shortening or lengthening a predetermined period of time during which a freeze effect is performed in which the progress of the game is temporarily stopped, or switching the rotation mode of the reels.

Control processing for shortening the suspension period includes forcibly ending the suspension period or rewriting the suspension period to a period shorter than the suspension period. As control processing for lengthening the suspension period, another period is added after the suspension period, or the suspension period is rewritten to a longer period. Further, the pause period based on the freeze effect does not have to be set with an upper limit time, and may continue until a certain result is obtained based on the result of operation acceptance.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set including the wait period. If the wait period is included, the wait period and the freeze effect period are compared, and if the freeze effect ends during the wait period, the freeze effect is executed during the wait period, and the freeze effect ends during the wait period. If not, the freeze effect period may be set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period may be resumed after the freeze effect ends. In addition, if there is only a freeze performance period longer than the wait period in advance, the processing of comparing the wait period and the freeze performance period is omitted, and the freeze performance is started after the start switch 12 is operated (after internal lottery processing). It is also possible to

As a freeze effect, it is also possible to perform a freeze effect (also referred to as a pseudo-game) as if a normal game were progressing during the acceleration process. In the pseudo-game, the start switch 12 is operated, a pseudo-game period is set during the reel acceleration process after the internal lottery is performed, and reel rotation control is performed like a normal game during the pseudo-game period (pseudo-game The reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the start switch based on the start of the game), and the reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13 . Also, it may be configured to rotate the reels again by operating the start switch 12 during the pseudo-game period. However, the internal lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 12, the winning determination process or the payout control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In the pseudo-game, when the reels are stopped by operating the stop switch 13 or when the reels are automatically stopped as a reel performance, the stopped reels are swung up and down (so-called swing fluctuation). As a result, when the player operates the stop switch 13, it can be determined whether the game is a normal game or a pseudo game.

<Symbol combinations that do not require technical intervention>
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention is a symbol combination that can stop and display the winning combination of symbols on the active line regardless of the timing at which the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are spinning. means For example, when bell symbols are arranged at intervals of 3 symbols on all reels, the bell-bell-bell always stops (attraction rate is 100%), so it can be said that the symbol combination does not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, a winning combination with a pull-in rate of 100% may be referred to as PB=1, and a winning combination with a pull-in rate of all reels of 100% may be referred to as PB=1.

On the contrary, PB≠1 means that the symbol combination of the winning combination does not stop depending on the stop timing of the stop switch 13 while the reels are rotating. For example, if there is a place where there is no symbol related to the winning combination (eg, separated by 5 symbols) within the pull-in range, PB≠1, and the winning combination is sometimes called a PB≠1 combination.

<Small win priority control, bonus priority control>
Minor win priority control means that when a minor win and a bonus are won in duplicate, or when both the symbols relating to the minor win and the symbols relating to the bonus can be drawn in when winning a minor win within the bonus, the symbols relating to the minor win are drawn. .

The bonus priority control is to attract the bonus symbol when both the symbol related to the minor symbol and the symbol related to the bonus can be drawn in when the minor symbol and the bonus are won in duplicate or when the minor symbol in the bonus is won.

In addition, replay has the highest priority and cannot be missed, so when replay and small winnings, or replay and bonus condition device flags are turned on at the same time, patterns related to replay are always drawn.

<Normal section>
A normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When the pressing order is won in the normal section, a process of transmitting to the sub-control means 1000 masked information (effect group number) indicating which pressing order was won is executed. In addition, when winning the pushing order in the normal section, notification of the pushing order (both the correct pushing order and the incorrect pushing order) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, both the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 1000 do not notify the pushing order even if the pushing order is won. I don't know.

<advantageous section>
The advantageous section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and the advantageous section is provided in order to suppress excessive medal acquisition by the AT. If you win the advantageous section transition lottery executed in the normal section, you can shift to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, a lottery to transfer to AT can be held, but in order to suppress the above-mentioned excessive medal acquisition, it is designed so that the advantageous section ends based on certain conditions and shifts to the normal section. ing.
In particular,
1) When 1,500 games have been played from the next game after shifting to one advantageous section 2) When more than 2,400 medals have been obtained from the next game after shifting to one advantageous section 3) When any condition is satisfied is mentioned. By these means, excessive acquisition of medals can be suppressed. Incidentally, the arbitrary condition of 3) includes, for example, when one AT is finished, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, and the like.

<advantageous section ramp>
An advantageous section lamp is provided as information indicating on the main side that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section. As a result, when the player confirms whether or not he/she is staying in the advantageous section, he/she can easily judge by lighting/non-lighting of the advantageous section lamp. Specifically, when the DP on the credit display 26 is lit, it indicates that the player is staying in the advantageous section, and when the DP on the credit display 26 is off, the player is not staying in the advantageous section. It is shown that. The lighting timing of the advantageous zone lamp is after all reels have stopped, after accepting the bet switch operation, when the first medal inserted for maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted for maintenance is detected, and when the third medal inserted for maintenance is detected. Examples include when the second medal is detected, after receiving the start switch, or after winning a winning combination by internal lottery. In addition, as a condition to always light up, if you are staying in an advantageous section, and if you notify the operation procedure information of the choice hand and the ball output rate (maximum ball output rate) of the information game exceeds 1 ( increase).

In addition, it is configured to light up the advantageous zone lamp even when announcing the RT transition pushing order to an RT with a high replay probability although the ball payout rate does not exceed 1 because the pushing order small combination is not installed in the specifications. ing. This is to inform the player that the state is advantageous to the player by means of the advantageous section lamp, and is intended to prevent the player from suffering damage due to ignorance of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Note that if the condition for always lighting the advantageous section lamp as described above is not satisfied, there is no problem even if the timing for lighting the advantageous section lamp after the transition to the new advantageous section is arbitrary.

In addition, when the advantageous section lamp is lit once, it will continue to be lit until the advantageous section ends, and before accepting the operation of the start switch for the next game after the advantageous section ends (after all reels stop, After accepting the bet switch operation, when the first medal inserted for maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted for maintenance is detected, or when the third medal inserted for maintenance is detected), the advantageous section lamp will not light up. to

With this configuration, even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, it may be an advantageous section, and even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player can feel the expectation that the processing related to the instruction function will be executed. can be given to As a result, conventionally, if it is a normal section, it has become a game that only waits to shift to an advantageous section, but if it is a gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible that an AT transition lottery etc. is performed even in a normal section. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the game.

Further, when the advantageous section type is 1, it is not necessarily an advantageous section. This is a normal section (advantageous section type is 0), and in a game where the advantageous section type is 1 after winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section type is 1 but before the transition to the advantageous section. This is because the game state is in the normal section. When executing processing to transmit whether the test signal is an advantageous section or a normal section, if the advantageous section type is referenced, the signal for the advantageous section will be sent even though it is a normal section. send a different signal.

In order to prevent this situation, the test signal is configured to refer to the value of the advantageous interval clear counter when transmitting either the advantageous interval or the normal interval. When the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0, processing is executed to output a test signal indicating that it is a normal section. ), a process for outputting a test signal indicating the advantageous section is executed. With such a configuration, the process for outputting the test signal can be performed by simply determining whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 or not, and the state can be accurately specified. , and the program execution speed can be improved. As described above, even when the advantageous interval is terminated under an arbitrary end condition, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is set to 1. Therefore, in the processing for outputting the test signal, even in the game where the advantageous interval ends, the advantageous interval can be output correctly.
<AT>
AT is an abbreviation for assist time, and is also called a notification period, and is a period for facilitating the winning of a winning combination by a winning combination lottery (hereinafter referred to as notification). In general, means for notifying in the AT include stop switch operation timing, stop switch operation order, stop switch operation timing and stop switch operation order, and are also referred to as an operation procedure or operation mode.
<CZ>
CZ is an abbreviation for Chance Zone, and is a period in which the winning probability of AT is set higher than normal, or the probability of winning points, which affects the winning probability of AT, is set higher than normal. . The transition lottery to CZ is performed in the advantageous section and not in the normal section. However, it is possible that the normal section is CZ.

<Grouping of selected roles>
The main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 the performance group number indicating that the choice hand is won when the choice hand is won during non-AT, and the performance group number and operation procedure information when the choice hand is won during AT. to the sub-control means 1000. In other words, since the operational procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during non-AT, the sub-control means 1000 cannot notify the operational procedure. As a result, on the side of the sub-control means 1000, it is unclear which operation procedure is used to display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during non-AT, and a symbol combination advantageous to the player is displayed during AT. Since the operation procedure information that can be performed is transmitted, the operation procedure can be notified by the liquid crystal display device or the operation instruction lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. As a result, the player can easily recognize the operation procedure, and can suppress illegal acquisition of the operation procedure information during non-AT.

<Processing related to instruction function>
The processing related to the instruction function is not only AT related lottery such as AT transition lottery, AT additional lottery, AT end condition update (addition / subtraction of AT game number, addition / subtraction of AT execution notification number of times), but also AT state management It is a concept that includes processing related to Processing related to this instruction function can be executed with a predetermined number of bets for each gaming state, and when a plurality of bets is set as a prescribed number in a certain gaming state, only one bet number is set. configured to process. For example, when a 2-coin bet and a 3-coin bet are possible in the middle state of the bonus, the processing related to the command function can be executed only in the game with the 3-coin bet, and the processing related to the command function can be executed in the game with the 2-coin bet. is infeasible. That is, in a game with two bets, the AT lottery is not executed even if the AT lottery target role is won, or the AT game number is not updated according to the progress of the game. In addition, if SB or CB, which ends in one game, is dedicated to 2-bet games, and the game after SB or CB ends is 2-bet or 3-bet, replay is won with SB or CB. If the number of automatic bets is 2, the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed in the game after the SB or CB is finished (it is possible to execute the processing related to the instruction function when betting 3). ), the number of bets to be automatically inserted when a replay is won in SB or CB is set to three. By doing so, it is possible to execute the processing related to the instruction function even in the game after the replay is won in SB or CB, so that the game that is disadvantageous to the player can be eliminated. It should be noted that, as described above, the processing relating to the advantageous section is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

<Instruction monitor>
During the AT, when announcing the information on the operation procedure for the winning hand, the operation procedure information may be announced using the win number indicator. Specifically, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor in the case of pushing order A (left, middle, right correct), and "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor in the case of pushing order B (left, right, middle, correct). In the case of push order C (middle left right correct), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order D (middle right left correct), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and push order E (right left In the case of a middle correct answer), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of a pushing order F (right middle left correct answer), "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With such a configuration, the player can know the correct pressing order by checking the instruction monitor. In addition, since the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it is possible to accurately notify the pressing order even if the sub-control board is illegally modified.

Also, when the indication monitor is used also as the acquired number display, the above-described numbers (1 to 6) may be displayed in the lower digits, and "=" may be displayed as the identifier in the upper digits. In this case, the identifier can be used to determine whether the winning number indicator displays the winning number or the pressing order, so that the player's recognition is not hindered.

Also, when the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a 3-digit 7-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, in the case of push order A (left, middle, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order B (left, right, middle, correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the push order is displayed. In the case of C (middle left right correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the case of , "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of pushing order F (right, middle, left correct), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to intuitively grasp the pressing order of the instruction monitor, and the player can easily grasp the correspondence relationship between the pressing order and the display of the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the pushing order on the instruction monitor is any period from when the pushing order is won by an internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch to when the stop switch becomes operable. is preferably the timing of With such a configuration, the pressing order can be notified before the player operates the stop switch, so it is possible to prevent the stop operation from being performed in an incorrect pressing order.

<Status display monitor (role ratio monitor)>
The role ratio monitor is the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instructed role ratio (selectable according to the specifications of the game machine), the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games, and the role ratio among the latest 6000 games. It is a display device that switches and displays the ratio, the cumulative continuous role ratio, the cumulative role ratio, and the cumulative role object state ratio every 4800 ms. number can be displayed. The upper two digits of the four digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs are called an identification segment, and the lower two digits are called a ratio segment.

"Role" in the role ratio refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), the second type special role (so-called CB), and the ordinary role (so-called SB). ” is a ratio calculated by payout during operation of accessory/total payout×100. In addition, the payout in the operation of the type 1 special role product continuous operation device (so-called BB) and the type 2 special role product continuous operation device (so-called MB) is also included in the "payout during operation of the role product", but during the BB Payouts in general games and general games during MB are not included in the “payout during operation of the accessory”.

The "continuous role" in the continuous role ratio refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), and the "continuous role ratio" is the payout during operation of the first type special role / total payout It is a ratio calculated by ×100. Note that the payout in the operation of the type 1 special accessory continuous operation device (so-called BB) is also included in the "payout during the operation of the accessory", but the payout in the general game during the BB is the "payout during the operation of the accessory". not included in

The "instruction-inclusive role" in the instruction-inclusive role ratio includes the payout in the game (so-called AT) in which the instruction function is activated in the above-mentioned "accessory", and the "instruction-inclusive role ratio" , (payout during operation of instruction function or payout during operation of accessory)/total payout×100. Here, (payout while the instruction function is activated or payout while the accessory is in operation) does not refer to the payout in the game in which the instruction function is in operation and the accessory is activated, but the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated. It refers to the sum of the payouts of the game in which the number and the accessory are activated. If the game in which the instruction function was activated was the game in which the accessory was activated, instead of adding the two payouts, the payout during product operation). If the player makes a mistake in operating the stop switch in a game in which the AT is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained. In this case, the payout is calculated based on the actual payout.

Among the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the identification segment is the cumulative advantageous section ratio, the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio in the latest 6000 games, and the role ratio in the latest 6000 games. It is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed among the ratio, the cumulative continuous accessory ratio, the cumulative accessory ratio, and the cumulative accessory state ratio, and is indicated by "7U." and "7P. ”, “6Y.”, “7Y.”, “6A.”, “7A.”, “5H.”. For example, if "7U." It shows that it is a character ratio.

Of the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment is information for visually recognizing the calculation results of various ratios, and is displayed in two-digit numbers using two 7-segment LEDs. For example, when the calculation result is 70, "70" is displayed in the ratio segment. Note that the calculated results are rounded down to the nearest decimal point and displayed. Also, when the calculation result is 100, "99" is displayed. Also, when the total number of games is less than 400, the ratio segment is displayed as "00".

The identification segment is displayed in a flashing manner when the cumulative number of games is less than the reference number of games. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, 175,000 games in the case of the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 175,000 games in the case of the cumulative instructed accessory ratio, and the latest 6000 games. 6,000 games in the case of the continuous role ratio, 6,000 games in the case of the latest 6,000 games, and 17,500 games in the case of the cumulative continuous role ratio, In the case of the cumulative role item ratio, the number is 17,500 games, and in the case of the cumulative role item, etc. state ratio, the number is 175,000 games.

The ratio seg is displayed in a blinking manner when the displayed numerical value is equal to or greater than the threshold. The threshold is determined according to various ratios, and is 70 in the case of the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 70 in the case of the cumulative instructed role ratio, and 70 in the case of the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games. 60 in the case of the latest 6000 game character ratios, 70 in the case of cumulative continuous character ratios, 70 in the case of cumulative total character ratios, etc. 50 for state ratios. If the total number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold value but "00" is displayed in the ratio segment, the ratio segment is displayed in a lighting mode.

In order to confirm whether the role ratio monitor can operate normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification seg and the ratio seg for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the timer interrupt processing is started. As a test pattern, all segments (including DP) of four 7-segment LEDs constituting the role ratio monitor are displayed in a blinking manner. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking manner. The test pattern may be displayed at any timing during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM (RAM) abnormal error, in addition to the timing after power-on.

When the cumulative number of games in the identified segment is less than the reference number of games, when the displayed numerical value is greater than or equal to the threshold value in the ratio segment, and when the test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment, the segment is displayed in a blinking manner. However, more specifically, the blinking mode is displayed by switching between lighting and extinguishing at every 300 ms such as lighting 300 ms→extinguishing 300 ms→lit 300 ms→extinguishing 300 ms→ . . . Also, when the various ratio information is switched, lighting is started, thereby preventing the display period of various ratio information from becoming longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and blinking.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games, the role ratio among the latest 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous The character object ratio, the cumulative character object ratio, and the cumulative condition ratio of the character object, etc. are configured to switch the display contents every 4,800 ms, and this 4,800 ms is set to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking. By doing so, it is possible to configure so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit at the switching timing of the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor even when displaying in a blinking mode. becomes.

By configuring in this way, even at the timing when various ratio information is switched, lighting is started, so that it is possible to continuously display a display that does not give a sense of discomfort due to the fact that the blinking period does not deviate.

In addition, since the test pattern display period after the power is turned on is also set to 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED is turned off when the test pattern is displayed for 4800 ms. It is possible to display information about the instructed accessory ratio from lighting.

Next, a control method for blinking display on the role ratio monitor will be described.

In order to blink the display mode of the role ratio monitor, it has a storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and lighting. A storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is a 2-byte storage area, and performs processing for adding 1 for each timer interrupt processing. A storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and then circulates between 0 and 299 each time timer interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the next value after 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is set to "0" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to " 1”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 1 (the carry flag is set to 1 because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "0-299").

Example 2) If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off is "298" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off will be set to " 299”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 1 (the carry flag is set to 1 because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "298-299").

Example 3) When the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is "299" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to " 0”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 0 (the carry flag is set to 0 because no carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "299-299").

As described above, if the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is any value from 0 to 298, the carry flag is set to 1, and the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to 1. If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for management is 299, carry flag=0. In other words, the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag becomes 0, the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is updated. The flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stored to 0) when the power is turned on. When 0 is stored in the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, _FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, the display mode of the role ratio monitor changes between the lighting mode and the extinguishing mode every 300 ms. can be repeatedly displayed (blinking display).

When the display of the role ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode, if the total number of games in the identification segment is less than the reference number of games, if the display numerical value is greater than or equal to the threshold value in the ratio segment, the test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment. Since it is one of the cases of displaying, in cases other than these cases, it is displayed in the lighting mode without referring to the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, regardless of whether or not the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referred to, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is updated for each timer interrupt process. ) is also updated as needed, and even when the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is switched from a non-referencing state to a referencing state, the timing of turning on and off and the switching timing of various ratio displays are displayed without deviation. becomes possible.

<Program start processing flow>
The program start processing executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings regarding the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it performs RAM check processing for setting the interrupt mode, setting the functions of the main CPU, and creating power failure recovery data. In the RAM check process, it is determined whether or not the checksum of all RAMs is normal. If the condition is satisfied, the power failure recovery data is determined to be normal, and if the condition is not satisfied, the power failure recovery data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the states of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal are checked to determine whether or not the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

When the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data is normal or whether the recovery is possible. If the power failure recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, the first initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process is set, and the setting change process in FIG. 10 is performed. If the power failure recovery data is normal or not in a recoverable state, the second initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process is set, and the setting change process in FIG. 10 is performed. Then, after the setting change process, the process shifts to the main game progress shown in FIG.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not turned on, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power-off recovery data is abnormal or unrecoverable, an unrecoverable error is notified and the process shifts to unrecoverable error processing for stopping the progress of the game of the slot machine PS1. On the other hand, if the power-off recovery data is not abnormal or unrecoverable, the power-off recovery process of FIG. 8 is performed. Then, after the power-off recovery process, the main game progress shown in FIG. 9 is entered. It should be noted that, after the power-off recovery process, the game returns to the saved state when the power-off is detected, so the process is not always executed from the beginning of the main game progress.

In the non-recoverable error processing, interrupts are prohibited, and the output of the output port (output of sub-control command, output of excitation signal to stepping motor, etc.) is cleared. Then, the display (notification) of the error is repeated on the obtained number display 27 .

<Power off processing>
Power-off processing executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the present embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned off or an event such as a power failure occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted (also referred to as a power interruption), the operating voltage for operating the slot machine PS1 drops. When the operating voltage falls below the threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects the power cutoff, generates a power cutoff detection signal, and the power cutoff detection signal is input to the input port of the main control chip. Then, in the judgment processing for judging whether or not the power interruption detection signal of the timer interrupt processing is inputted, the power interruption processing is executed when it is judged that the power interruption detection signal is inputted. When determining whether or not the power-off detection signal is input in the timer interrupt process, the determination may be made by one timer interrupt process, or by two or more timer interrupt processes. good too. In other words, when judging whether or not the power supply has been turned off by multiple times of timer interrupt processing, even if it is judged that the power supply interruption detection signal has been input at the first time, the power supply interruption detection signal has not been input at the second time. If determined, the power-off process is not executed. This is to prevent power-off processing from being executed when noise or an instantaneous interruption (a state in which the voltage falls below the threshold for a moment but immediately rises above the threshold) occurs.

In the power-off process, the output port is cleared, interrupts that are periodically executed are prohibited, and the interrupt disable/enable state at power-off is saved. Next, the used registers are saved and the stack pointer is saved. When the data is saved, the power-off processing completed flag indicating that the power-off processing has been performed is turned on and saved, and the checksum data of all the RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then, writing to the RAM is prohibited, and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the stored stack pointer, the presence or absence of a power-off processing completion flag, and whether or not the checksums of all RAM areas are normal are determined during power-off recovery processing.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, timer interrupt processing is configured to occur periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When the timer interrupt processing starts, the necessary data stored in the register is compared, and when the power-off detection signal is received, the power-off processing is executed, and the inputs of various sensors and operation switches are determined. , and measure various timers (freeze period measurement timer, wait period measurement timer, etc.), and as reel drive control, each reel is accelerating, rotating at constant speed, decelerating, decelerating, stopping Control and update of the drive state are performed according to any drive state. Next, port output processing is performed to create and output data (such as an excitation signal for the stepping motor and a drive signal for the hopper 44) to be output for each output port, and it is checked whether or not various abnormalities have occurred. Various kinds of abnormalities include whether or not the current set value is a normal value, and whether or not the operation pattern of the input/discharge sensor is normal. Next, an external signal is output to set (on/off control) an external signal such as a bonus signal, an ART signal, a security signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal to be output to an external system such as a hall computer (S304).

Next, if there is a sub-control command set in the control command transmission process, it outputs the sub-control command to the sub-control board 1000, controls the lighting of various LEDs, and sub-controls such as stop switch operation sound and medal insertion sound. The notification data to be transmitted to the board is output, the signal related to the performance test is output, the register is restored, and the interrupt permission flag is turned on, thereby completing the timer interrupt processing.

The types of sub-control commands include a start command when the start switch is operated, a winning information command indicating the result of an internal lottery, a reel rotation start command when the reel starts accelerating, and a rotating reel. There are various commands such as a left reel stop command, a middle reel stop command, a right reel stop command, and an all reel stop command by operating each stop switch for stopping.

Also, the timer measurement process may be performed in the timer interrupt process.
In the timer measurement, control processing is performed to update the information on the timer (time) stored in the RWM (RAM). For example, the process of updating the value stored in the RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area A) that monitors (manages) the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) per game (for example, the process of subtracting 1) )I do. In addition to the RWM storage area for monitoring the minimum playing time, the RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area B) for monitoring (managing) the insertion of game medals by the insertion button, and the output time of the external signal are monitored. It may have an RWM storage area related to a plurality of timers, such as an RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as a timer area C) to be (managed).
In this case, in the timer measurement, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area A, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area B, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area C, etc. A process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area) that stores information about the timer is executed. Further, when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0" and timer measurement is performed, the value stored in the certain timer area becomes "0". .

As the control process for updating the information about the timer stored in the RWM, the process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area has been exemplified. It can be processed.

Here, monitoring (management) of insertion of game medals by the insertion button will be described.
Monitoring (management) of insertion of game medals by the insertion button is a timer that counts after the bet processing is executed based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19, and the value of the timer becomes "0". It is a timer for not executing the process of determining whether or not the next 1-bet switch 19 has been operated until the next 1-bet switch 19 is operated.

For example, under a predetermined situation where the number of credits is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and a bet can be made by operating the 1-bet switch 19), the 1-bet switch 19 "20" is stored in the timer area B after the bet processing is executed based on the operation of . After that, the value stored in the timer area B is decremented by "1" by timer measurement in timer interrupt processing. Then, when the timer interrupt process is executed 20 times, the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0". If the value stored in the timer area B is not "0" (if the value stored in the timer area B is any of "1" to "20"), the game progress main process It is not determined whether or not the bed switch 19 has been operated. That is, even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in the timer area B is not "0", no bet processing is executed. After that, after the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0", the bet processing can be executed when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the bet processing from being executed a plurality of times due to an erroneous operation even though the 1-bet switch 19 is operated once. Further, when a malicious player repeatedly hits the 1-bet switch 19, the bet processing based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 is executed a plurality of times, and commands based on the execution of the bet processing are continuously issued to the sub-control means 1000. You can prevent it from being sent to

<Power failure recovery process>
Power-off recovery processing executed by the main control board 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, when the power is turned on by turning on the power switch 40, the main control board 100 executes a power-off restoration process for restoring various data to the state before the power-off.

In the power-off recovery process, the stack pointer is recovered, and the output data related to the sub-control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 1000 is recovered. After that, it is determined whether or not the set value data is within the normal range. As a result of the judgment, if it is abnormal (the value is out of the defined range), it shifts to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if normal (within a defined range of values), an unused RAM area is initialized, a periodically executed interrupt is activated, and the input port is read. After that, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, the used registers are restored, and the interrupt prohibition/permission state at the time of power-off is restored, and the power-off recovery processing is completed. It should be noted that when the power failure return processing is completed, the state before the power failure occurs is restored, and if it does not return (at the time of setting change), the game progress main control processing is performed from the beginning.

In this embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a predetermined timing during the power-off recovery process, but the interrupt may be activated after the power-off recovery process in the program start process.

<Description of main game progression>
A game progress main control process executed by the main control board 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The main control board 100 refers to the value of the freeze effect number stored before the previous game, and executes the freeze effect when the stored freeze effect number corresponds to the number to execute the freeze effect, and saves the freeze effect. If the freeze effect number provided does not correspond to the number to execute the freeze effect, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the freeze effect. It may be configured so that the freeze effect number is not saved when the freeze effect is not executed. may be configured.

Next, when game medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (game medal insertion process). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of bets enabling the game to be executed has been placed, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it is determined whether or not the start switch 12 has been operated, and it is determined that no bet has been placed. In this case, it waits for the reception of operation of the bet switch if it is in the state of inserting game medals or in the state of being stored in credits (in the case of being in the state of being stored in credits). If the number of bets that makes the game executable has been placed and the start switch 12 has been operated (it is determined that the start switch signal is ON), internal lottery processing is performed and the start switch 12 has not been operated ( If it is not determined that the start switch signal is ON, the reception of the operation of the start switch 12 is waited.

In the internal lottery process, the internal lottery random numbers are generated and acquired, and a predetermined arithmetic process is executed to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After determining the winning combination, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and stop control is executed even if the stop switch operation is accepted immediately after allowing the stop switch operation acceptance after reel rotation. be as prepared as possible.

The types of winning combinations provided in the slot machine PS1 are roughly classified into bonus, minor combination, and replay.

A bonus means a feature that is activated in a predetermined case. Generally, it is activated when the symbol combination of "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the display window 4. FIG. Depending on the operation of the bonus-related accessory, the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each specified number is changed, or the conditional device activation probability of the symbol combination related to winning for each specified number is changed. The bonus is divided into RB, BB, CB, MB and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also called a first-class special bonus. RB is generally set as an end condition of obtaining 8 small wins or 12 game results, and during RB, RB middle win set higher than normal win lottery table winning probability of small win. A role lottery is performed using a lottery table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device for the first class special bonus. BB is set as a termination condition of paying out more than 285 game medals related to winning a small role, and during BB, a BB medium role lottery table in which the probability of winning a small role (to be described later) is set higher than that of a normal role lottery table. Perform a role lottery using In addition, it is not necessary to provide the BB middle winning lottery table during the BB. For example, the BB middle winning lottery table may be called a BB middle winning lottery table that continuously operates the RB middle winning lottery table, which will be described later, until the BB end condition is satisfied.

CB is an abbreviation for challenge bonus, and is also called a second type special accessory. The CB can be set in such a state that at least all minor winning combinations have been won regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery. Further, during CB, stop control different from normal stop control is performed for a predetermined reel. For example, it is conceivable to control the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds.

Since the CB is in a state where at least all of the small wins have been won as described above, the symbol combination that can be displayed according to the operation procedure may not be displayed (also referred to as a dropout). For example, during CB, by controlling the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds, if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific pattern can be placed on the effective line at any operation timing. Although it could be displayed, if it stops within 75 milliseconds, there may be a case where a specific pattern cannot be displayed at a specific operation timing.

MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device related to the second type special bonus. The MB is set as ending conditions such as payout of more than 153 medals associated with winning a small winning combination, winning of RB, or winning of SB, which will be described later.

SB is an abbreviation for a single bonus, and is also called an ordinary accessory. The SB is set as an end condition that the result of one game is obtained. During SB, a combination lottery is performed using an SB medium combination lottery table in which the probability of winning a small combination is set higher than that of a normal combination lottery table.

In the present embodiment, the BB uses the BB medium combination lottery table to perform the combination lottery, but the invention is not limited to this. A game may be played using a BB general role lottery table in which the winning probability of RB is increased together with the RB and a RB medium role lottery table in which the probability of winning a minor role is set higher than that of the normal role lottery table. Even in this case, the BB still sets a payout exceeding 285 medals for winning a small winning combination as an end condition. In addition, what controls these bonuses is generically referred to as special game control means.

A small combination is a winning combination in which a combination of symbols based on the winning minor combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and medals are paid out based on the combination of symbols stopped and displayed when it is determined that a prize has been won by the winning determination process (described later). be.

In replay (also called replay role), the symbol combination based on the winning replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when it is determined as winning by the winning determination process, replay (automatically without inserting new medals) This is a combination that gives a game that allows the next game to be played by betting. Since the replay is never missed in the winning game, the next game after winning the replay is always a replay.

In the lottery result of the combination lottery, when none of the bonus combination, the minor combination, and the replay combination is won, the winning process described later is not performed because the winning combination is lost. When the player loses, the combination of symbols that does not relate to any combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Of the roles that are drawn by lottery, if the combination of symbols for BB, RB, and MB is not stop-displayed on the active line in the winning game, the winning flag can be carried over to the next game or later. It can be done (special role carryover means). While the winning flag is carried over, the role lottery may be performed using the role lottery table before the winning flag is carried over, or the carry-over medium role lottery table (also referred to as the internal lottery table or the internal medium lottery table) according to the winning flag. ) may be used to draw a winning combination. When the combination of symbols based on the winning BB, RB or MB is stop-displayed on the active line while using the carryover middle role lottery table, it is determined that the shift condition of the role lottery table is satisfied, and the carryover middle role is determined. The lottery table is shifted to the combination lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

Winning probabilities for a plurality of types of winning combinations are determined in the winning combination lottery table, and a plurality of types of winning combination lottery tables are provided according to the game state. For example, it corresponds to a BB middle winning lottery table used during BB, an MB middle winning lottery table used during MB, and the like.

In the combination lottery table, there are lotteries for single winning combinations in which one type of symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, and multiple winning combinations in which multiple symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed on one or more activated lines. Set according to the result.

A plurality of symbol combinations set as overlapping winning hands may be set so that one winning hand can be stopped and displayed according to the operation mode of all the symbol combinations, or some of the symbol combinations cannot be stopped and displayed. can be set to Of the multiple winning combinations, the combination corresponding to a part of symbol combinations that cannot be stopped may be referred to as a control combination.

As for the role of the control service, even if the same symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line as a result of multiple lottery wins, the display will be stopped according to the type of control service set as a duplicate winning combination. It plays the role of being able to control the effective line to be different.

Winning flag control means turns on a flag corresponding to the winning combination when any combination is won in the lottery result of the combination lottery. Then, when all the stop switches 13 are operated by the player to end the winning process for the winning combination, the flag corresponding to the winning combination is turned off.

As for BB, RB and MB mentioned above, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but when all the stop switches 13 are operated, the winning BB, RB or MB symbol combination is the valid line. If it is not stop-displayed above, the flag is carried over to the next game onwards, the above-mentioned carry-over middle role lottery table is set, and the symbol combination of BB, RB or MB that wins is stop-displayed and won. The flag corresponding to BB, RB or MB is turned off by completing the prize winning process for the role.

In addition, an RT combination lottery table is provided in the combination lottery table. RT is an abbreviation for replay time, which is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay is different in a role lottery than in a normal role lottery table.

As a specific usage example of RT, the winning probability of replay may be increased by replacing the losing area of the normal combination lottery table with replay, or the replay area of the normal combination lottery table may be replaced with losing and replayed. You may make it reduce the winning probability of.
Further, although the area of the normal combination lottery table and the replay are the same, the type of replay to be won within the area of the replay may be made different.
The slot machine PS1 is provided with a plurality of RT combination lottery tables, each of which is configured to shift to another RT state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

The transition conditions for the RT combination lottery table are as follows. Transition condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed, transition condition 2 is when a bonus is won, and transition condition 3 is when BB, RB, BB, RB, etc. Or when MB is finished, transition condition 4 is when a specified number of games have been played after a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed, and transition condition 5 is when BB, RB, or This is when the specified number of games have been played after the MB is finished. The transition conditions for these RT combination lottery tables can be appropriately set according to game characteristics.

The number is the winning number of each lottery result determined in the internal lottery table by the internal lottery means. Also, the sum of the respective numbers is 65536. For example, the winning probability of the lottery result of the number 4 is 1/16384.

In addition, when any one of transition conditions 1 to 5 of the above-described RT combination lottery table is satisfied, the set number relating to replay can be changed. For example, the replay probability of RT1 is 1/7.3, and when the game shifts from RT1 to RT2, the replay probability of RT2 may be changed to 1/1.5. As a result, by shifting to a state where the replay probability is high, it is possible to suppress the decrease in medals and add interest to the game.

Next, it is checked whether the minimum playing time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has passed. If it is determined that the minimum playing time has passed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum playing time timer is 0), the minimum playing time is newly set, and if it is determined that the minimum playing time has not passed ( If it is not determined that the value of the minimum game time timer is 0), it is checked whether or not the minimum game time has passed after decrementing the value of the minimum game time timer. This minimum game time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, and other processes are executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum game time and the process of newly setting the minimum game time. configured not to. As a result, since the minimum game time is not extended by other processes, the game time of the player can be made available as soon as possible. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed without making the player wait.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another process may be executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum playing time and the process of newly setting the minimum playing time. Other processing in this case may be processing for clearing the RWM address, processing for storing other data in the RWM, or other instructions with a short processing time. Since the processing time for these processes is extremely short, the user cannot experience the extension of the minimum playing time. After newly setting the minimum playing time, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed.

In the reel rotation start preparation process, the data relating to the spinning reel stop saved in the previous game is initialized, the stop table used in the current game is set, the rotation start output of all reels is requested, and the reel rotation start is started. Set the sub-control command (reel rotation start command) shown.

The stop table is provided corresponding to the symbol control number determined by the result of the combination lottery by the internal lottery means, and predetermines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13 .

After the reel rotation start preparation process is completed, a process related to a freeze effect (for example, a reel effect before reel rotation) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reels are slightly moved or reversely rotated, mainly to indicate the degree of expectation of the winning combination.

When the freeze effect is not executed, or after the freeze effect is executed and the execution of the freeze effect is completed, the reel rotation process (also referred to as reel rotation process, reel rotation start process, or reel rotation start process) is performed. Run. There are four reel rotation states: an acceleration state, a constant speed rotation state, a stop preparation state, and a stop state. When the reel is to be rotated, the acceleration state is set. In the acceleration state, the stepping motor is gradually rotated by timer interrupt processing.

Acceleration processing executed in the acceleration state is processing executed from a state in which reel rotation is stopped to a constant speed rotation processing. In the constant speed rotation process, the stepping motor is moved one step each time the timer interrupt is processed. become more sexual. Therefore, an acceleration process is required to gradually rotate the reels. In the acceleration process in this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved by one step after 50 timer interrupts are processed, then the stepping motor is moved by one step after 30 timer interrupts are processed, and then 10 timer interrupts are processed. After processing, move the stepping motor one step, then move the stepping motor one step after processing five timer interrupts, move the stepping motor one step after processing two timer interrupts, and then move the stepping motor one step. After interrupt processing, the stepping motor is moved by one step. After that, it is connected to a constant-speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved by one step for each timer interrupt process.

When the constant-speed rotation process is being executed, the value of the above-described rotation failure detection counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process to detect rotation failure. Since the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, it is incremented for each timer interrupt processing. It is decremented, and it may be determined that the rotation failure is detected at the timing when it becomes 0.

In addition, in the constant speed rotation state, the stop reception of the stop switch is permitted, and the operation of the stop switch is waited. When the stop acceptance of the stop switch is permitted, the lamp of the stop switch is lit in blue to inform the player that the stop switch is valid (when the stop acceptance of the stop switch is not permitted, the red light is lit). The lighting control of the stop switch lamp may be performed by the main control means 100 or by the sub-control means 1000 . Further, as lighting control of the lamps of the stop switches, when executing push order navigation, the lamps of the stop switches may be flashed so that the player can easily recognize the stop switch to be stopped. .

Also, a command indicating that the reel has started rotating is transmitted to the sub-control means 1000, and when the sub-control means 1000 receives the command, a reel rotation time measurement timer for measuring the rotation time of the reel is set and counted. Start. Then, when the value of the reel rotation time measurement timer reaches a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 minutes) (when a predetermined time (3 minutes) has passed without the stop switch being operated since the start of reel rotation), " Please stop the reels" (reel stop warning image) is displayed to urge the player to stop the reels. The reel rotation time measurement timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the stop switch operation is accepted), and if there is a reel that is still spinning, it counts again. In this way, the reel rotation time measurement timer continues to be updated until all the reels are stopped.

In addition, if the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation image, by displaying it in front of the push order navigation image, the display area of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation image overlapped. Even in this case, the visibility of the reel stop warning image is ensured, and the player can be clearly urged to operate the stop switch. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image becomes difficult to see and there is a risk that it may not be possible to know which reel to stop. The stop warning image may be made smaller or moved) so that the push order navigation image can be recognized.

After enabling reception of operation of the stop switch in the game progress main processing, determination processing of reception of operation of the stop switch (reel stop reception check processing) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. When it is determined that one of the stop switches has been operated, stop control (also referred to as slip control) of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is executed. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch shifts from the constant speed rotation state to the stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel is rotated to the target stop position while rotating at a constant speed. Then, when it reaches the target stop position, it shifts to a stop state, and all the four-phase excitations are turned ON to apply the brakes. Slip control is performed within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch 13 is operated. In this embodiment, when accepting the operation of the stop switch 13, it is possible to pull in symbols up to four symbols ahead.

Here, the target stop position is determined by whether or not the pattern number currently passing and the pattern number saved as the stop position match. All 4-phase excitation is turned ON as a position. Also, the pattern number currently passing means that the initial pattern number is set at the moment the index sensor detects the index (when the index signal rises), and the initial pattern number is moved by one pattern by timer interrupt processing. It is judged by setting the pattern number next to the pattern number.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it is checked whether all the reels are stopped. When all reels are stopped, winning judgment processing is executed and then winning processing is executed, and when all reels are not stopped, stop operation reception waiting processing of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is executed. . Then, after all the reels have stopped, the contents displayed on the status display monitor are updated, and the process proceeds to advantageous section clear counter management processing. Then, a game end check process for updating the RT status, etc. is performed, and a series of main flow of the game progress is finished. Note that the software random number update process may be performed during the period from when the reel starts to rotate until the stop operation is received.

Winning judgment processing is processing for judging whether or not the combination of symbols forming a winning combination has been stopped on the activated line. In order to determine whether or not the stop symbol determined when the operation of the stop switch is abnormal, the symbol combination actually stopped on the active line is not used for determination. After it is determined by the prize determination process that the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination has been stopped and displayed on the activated line, the winning process is performed, and it is not determined by the winning determination process that the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination has stopped on the activated line. If it does, perform processing based on the loss.

The winning process is a process of giving a privilege to the player based on the combination of symbols to be stopped on the activated line. Winning processing when a symbol combination based on a minor combination is stopped includes payout of medals based on the stopped symbol combination, processing of shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination, and symbol combination based on replay. As the winning process when the is stopped, it is the process of giving the right to replay and the process of shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination, and the winning process when stopping the symbol combination based on the bonus is a process of shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. In addition, in the case of a loss, the winning process is not performed.

However, without being limited to this, when the result of the winning determination process is a loss, the winning process based on the losing process may be performed, and as a result of the winning process, no benefit may be given to the player. Further, as the winning process based on the loss, the game state may be shifted according to the operation mode when the game is lost. For example, when all the stop switches 13 are operated in accordance with a predetermined operation order when losing, a transition to a game state with a different freeze winning probability can be mentioned. In addition, even in the case of an apparent loss due to the omission of a small winning combination, it is possible to carry out a prize winning process such as controlling the transition of the game state such as the transition to the RT state without paying out. Furthermore, as a winning process based on a bonus, payout of medals based on the stop-displayed symbol combination or giving the right to replay may be added.

The process of transitioning the game state includes setting the combination lottery table according to the game state to be shifted, setting the reel control according to the game state to be shifted, and setting the freeze winning probability according to the game state to be shifted. or a combination thereof.

In the winning determination process, when the winning symbol combination is determined, the winning symbol combination information (stopped eye information) stopped and displayed on the active line and the winning lottery result information are transmitted to the sub-control board 1000 . On the other hand, when the sub-control board 1000 receives these pieces of information, it can use the display device 32, the lamp, or the speaker S to output an effect according to the winning symbol combination information and the combination lottery result information.

In the winning determination process, winning is determined on all active lines, and as a result of the determination, when a plurality of symbol combinations based on overlapping winning hands are stopped and displayed on a plurality of activated lines, the stop-displayed multiple symbol combinations are displayed. Winning processing is performed for each.

For example, when a small winning combination with a payout number of 2 and a small combination with a payout number of 10 are stopped and displayed on a plurality of active lines, the winning processing is performed as a small winning combination with a payout number of 2. 12 coins are paid out by summing the number of coins to be paid out based on 10 and the number of coins to be paid out based on the set minor combination.

An upper limit is set for the number of payouts for one time, and when the upper limit of the number of payouts is exceeded when the combination of symbols based on a plurality of small wins is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the number of payouts of the upper limit is paid out. .

For example, when the upper limit of the number of payouts is set to 15, and the small winning combination with the number of payouts set at 12 and the small combination with the number of payouts set at 10 are stopped on a plurality of active lines. As the winning process, when the total value of the small winning combination of 12 coins and the small winning combination of 10 coins exceeds the upper limit value, the upper limit value of 15 coins is paid out.

In the present embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for small wins, but medals corresponding to the number of bets may be paid out as prize-winning processing based on replay, or prize-winning processing based on bonuses may be set in advance. You may pay out as many medals as you have.

<Advantageous Section Clear Counter Management Processing>
Among the processes executed by the game progress main according to the present embodiment, the advantageous zone clear counter management process relating to the management of advantageous zones will be described with reference to FIG. 11 .

Set the advantageous interval clear counter RWM address.

Subsequently, a 2-byte subtraction process is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, and if the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, a process of determining whether or not the advantageous section type is 0 is executed. Then, if the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is not 0, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter after subtraction is 0 or not. Advantageous section type = 0 means that the section is not an advantageous section and is a normal section, and advantageous section type = 1 means that it is an advantageous section.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter after subtraction is 0. If the value of the advantageous section clear counter after subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to RWM initialization processing. If the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0, the process proceeds to the process of acquiring the value of the MY counter.

Subsequently, in the process of acquiring the value of the MY counter, the current value of the MY counter is acquired.

Subsequently, after executing the processing for acquiring the value of the MY counter, it is determined whether or not the regame operation symbols are stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the regame operation symbols are stopped and displayed, the value of the MY counter is determined. has exceeded the upper limit value (2400), and if it is determined that the replay operation symbol is not stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to the process of acquiring the payout number buffer data. The data of the payout number buffer is data indicating the number of payouts related to winning, and no payout (the number of payouts is 0) when a win or a small winning combination is missed.

Subsequently, in the process of acquiring the data of the payout number buffer, the number of payouts for the game is acquired.

Subsequently, a process of adding the acquired payout number buffer data (OUT number) to the MY counter is executed.

Subsequently, a process of acquiring game medal count data is executed. The data on the number of game medals is data corresponding to the number of inserted medals.

Subsequently, a process of subtracting the IN number (the number of inserted sheets) from the MY counter is executed.

Subsequently, when it is determined that the value of the MY counter is less than 0 as a result of subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter, an initial value is set in the MY counter and stored in the MY counter. If it is determined that the value of the MY counter is not less than 0 as a result of subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter, the value obtained by subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter is stored in the MY counter. Note that the initial value of the MY counter is 0, which means that when the value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, it is corrected to 0. Whether or not the value of the MY counter is less than 0 is determined by whether the carry flag is 0 or not. The carry flag is a flag that becomes 1 when the result of the subtraction process is a negative value, and becomes 0 when the result of the subtraction process is not a negative value.

Subsequently, after saving the value of the MY counter, the process of determining whether or not the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit (2400) is executed. If the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit (2400), the RWM initialization process is executed and the process shifts to the advantageous section type determination process. The section clear counter management process is ended, and if the advantageous section type is not 0, the initial value (1500) is set to the advantageous section clear counter, and the advantageous section clear counter management process is ended. Further, if the value of the MY counter does not exceed the upper limit (2400) in the process of determining whether the value of the MY counter has exceeded the upper limit (2400), the advantageous section clear counter management process ends.

Judging whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, and if the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0 and the advantageous section type is not 0, the processing that is passed at the start of the advantageous section , and this process is not passed except at the start of the advantageous section. The number 1500 stored in the advantageous interval clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in the advantageous interval. This is to prevent addiction, suppress the state in which the number of medals continues to increase throughout the day, and prevent the gambling spirit from being remarkably aroused.

As for the timing of setting the advantageous section type to 1, it is executed in the advantageous section transition lottery process between the reception of the start switch and the start of rotation of the reels. Advantageous section transition lottery processing is a process that is passed when the condition device number to be the target of the lottery is selected. set the advantageous section type to 0 (normal section).

In the RWM initialization process that is executed after the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit, all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function are updated to zero. The parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games and the game state related to AT. Then, by updating the advantageous section type to 0, it becomes a normal section that is not an advantageous section, and when the value of the MY counter is 2400 or less, the advantageous section is maintained and the process ends. In addition, when the replay is won in the advantageous section, the MY counter update process is not executed, but the process of determining whether the MY counter exceeds 2400 is passed. In the case of replay, OUT-IN is always 0 because the same number of bets as the inserted number is automatically betted. However, there is a possibility that the value of the MY counter will be updated at a timing different from the original processing due to noise or fraud, so it is determined whether or not the MY counter has reached the upper limit even during replay.

In addition, the advantageous interval can be terminated at any timing for each gaming machine other than the lapse of 1500 games or exceeding MY2400. For example, when winning a final lottery when a predetermined combination is won, or when an arbitrary number of games (less than 1500 games) are executed. In this way, when the advantageous interval is terminated with an arbitrary termination opportunity, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is set to 1 before the advantageous interval clear counter management processing is executed (it is desirable that the AT-related processing is executed after all reels are stopped). By setting , when the advantageous interval clear counter management process is executed, the advantageous interval clear counter is 1 before subtraction, the advantageous interval clear counter subtraction result is 0, and the advantageous interval clear counter management processing can be terminated. That is, after setting the value of the advantageous interval clear counter to 1, by subtracting 1 from the counter value, the value of the advantageous interval clear counter becomes 0 and the advantageous interval can be terminated. This makes it possible to perform processing within the same module without using a separate advantageous section termination module when an arbitrary termination condition is achieved.

Also, the advantageous interval clear counter subtraction processing in the advantageous interval clear counter management processing is configured to be executed in any gaming state in any number of bets (when a plurality of prescribed numbers are set for the gaming machine). there is

<Setting change processing>
A setting change process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting change mode starts, it determines whether the current set value is within the normal range.If it is within the normal range, the current set value is obtained. Save "1" and get the setting value "1".

After obtaining the set value, save the set value display data. After saving the set value display data, the set value display data is referenced every 5 interrupts and lighting control is performed by dynamic lighting control, which is timer interrupt processing.

After that, it is determined whether or not the start switch 12 has been turned on from off. When it is determined that the start switch 12 has not turned on from off, it is determined whether or not the setting switch has turned on from off.

Here, when it is determined that the setting switch has not turned on from off, it is determined again whether or not the start switch 12 has turned on from off, and when it is determined that the setting switch has turned on from off, Determine whether or not the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than the maximum value, increment the current set value. conduct. After the set value is incremented, the updated set value is displayed, and the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the start switch 12 has been turned on from off.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has been turned from off to on, the setting value is confirmed, and the setting key switch is waited until it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off from on. When it is determined that is changed from on to off, the determined set value is stored in the main control RAM, the setting display LED is turned off, and the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned on (because the medals flow down to the hopper 44 ) to end the setting change mode.

Here, the setting change mode is means for determining one of setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6 on display). After any setting value is determined, the internal lottery table (also referred to as a winning lottery table) corresponding to the determined setting value is continuously set until the setting value is changed by the setting change means. A combination lottery table is provided in which the determination probability of the lottery result by the internal lottery (the winning probability of the combination) differs for each set value.

The setting change means holds the setting key at a rotational position where a setting key switch signal is turned on when the setting key used for setting change is turned on by the manager of the game arcade while the power of the slot machine PS1 is not turned on. When the power of the slot machine PS1 is turned on in this state, the setting key switch signal is turned on with the turning on of the power of the slot machine PS1. In this embodiment, turning on of the setting key switch signal means rising on (turning from off to on). Since the rising on is not detected, it is configured not to shift to the setting change mode, but even if the setting key switch signal on is set to the level on and it was turned on before the power failure occurred. If the setting key is on when the power is turned on again, the setting change mode may be entered.

When the setting change means determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door opening signal is on, and the setting changeable flag is on, the setting change means can change the setting value of the slot machine PS1. start mode.

The setting changeable flag switches between ON and OFF according to the game state. For example, it is conceivable that the setting changeable flag is turned off during the period from when the start switch 12 is operated until the game ends, and the setting changeable flag is turned on during the rest of the period. However, the configuration is not limited to this mode, and the setting changeable flag may be turned off only when a specific bonus game is started or when a specific bonus is in progress. It may be configured so that the setting can be changed in any state.

When the setting change mode is activated, a blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off so that the game cannot be started by inserting medals. There are 6 levels of set value data that can be changed in the setting change mode: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Set a high winning lottery table.

After starting the setting change mode, the setting display LED provided on the rear surface of the front panel PS2 is turned on to indicate that the setting change mode is activated. Then, set value display data for displaying the set value data is set, and the credit number display 26 arranged on the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the credit amount display device 26 arranged on the rear surface of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 are displayed. A setting display LED (not shown) is turned on to display the setting value. When the set value data is "1", the set value display displays "1", when the set value data is "2", the set value display displays "2", and when the set value data is "3". If the set value data is "4", the set value display will display "4", and if the set value data is "5", the set value display will display "5". ” is displayed, and when the set value data is “6”, “6” is displayed as the set value display.

In addition, when the set value data stored in the set value data storage area is stored in six levels from "0" to "5", the set value display when the set value data is "0" is "1". When the set value data is "1", the set value display displays "2", when the set value data is "2", the set value display displays "3", and the set value data is " When the set value data is "3", the set value display displays "4", when the set value data is "4", the set value display displays "5", and when the set value data is "5", the set value display displays "6".

After starting the setting change mode, it continues to determine whether or not the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on. The setting value is determined and the current setting value is displayed on the setting display LED. In other words, when it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned on during the setting change mode, the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting switch signal has been turned on without determining that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on, the setting switch start-up data is cleared and the current set value is the maximum set value. (set value data "6") or more, and if it is determined that the current set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (set value data "6"), the set value data is cleared (set value data to "1"), and if it is determined that the current set value is less than the maximum set value (set values "1" to "5"), the current set value is incremented. As for the processing of the setting change mode when the set value data is set in six stages from 0 to 5, it is determined whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the maximum set value (set value data "5"), When it is determined that the current set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (set value data "5"), the set value data is cleared (the set value data is set to "0") and the current set value becomes the maximum set value. When it is determined to be less than the value (set value "0" to "4"), the current set value may be incremented.

As a setting value display mode of the setting display LED when it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is ON after the setting change mode is activated, the setting display LED indicates that the setting value cannot be changed. 0", or "_X" ("X" is the set value after confirmation) on the setting display LED, etc. may be displayed.

<Control corresponding to power off while various switches are pressed according to the present embodiment>
The front panel PS2 is in a closed state, the game has ended, 3-bet has not been made (including situations where automatic betting has not been made), and the number of credits equal to or greater than the number of 3-bets is stored ( For example, the number of credits is 3 or more when no bet is placed, or the number of credits is 2 or more when 1 bet is placed. ) When the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bed lamps and 3 bed lamps are off).

Note that not only when the front panel PS2 is in the closed state, but also when the front panel PS2 is in the open state, the game is over and 3 bets have not been made (situation where automatic betting has not been made). ), and a credit number greater than or equal to 3 bets is stored (for example, the number of credits is 3 or more when no bet is made, or 2 or more when 1 bet is made). Under the circumstances, when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (depressed), the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit ( The 1-bed lamp, the 2-bed lamp, and the 3-bed lamp are turned off before the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed). In the following, unless otherwise specified, when the power is turned on, the front panel PS2 is in a closed state, but the same behavior may be performed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open. .

In addition, the MAX bet possible state includes a situation in which no bet is placed, a situation in which one bet is placed, and a situation in which two bets are placed. When the lamp is newly lit, it is a state where no bet is placed, that is, when the maximum bet is possible. 2 bed lamps and 3 bed lamps are lit, and in the MAX bed possible state, which is a situation where 2 bed lamps are already lit, the 3 bed lamp is newly lit in the situation where the 1 bed lamp and 2 bed lamp are already lit It has become.

In addition, in the MAX bet possible state, the MAX bet lamp is lit to inform the player that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. When the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the MAX bet lamp is on in the MAX bet possible state (when the sensor for detecting the MAX bet switch 18 turns from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp is extinguished. In other words, even while the MAX bed switch 18 is being pressed (a state in which the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 is kept ON), the MAX bed lamp lights out.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed. When it is done (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed. Further, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed, a new MAX bet process by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be performed. In other words, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is ON), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet processing cannot be performed.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the MAX bet switch 18 when the power is turned on after a power failure (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18, etc.), the bet will be accepted. In addition, even in such a case, it is possible to accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is effective by the lighting mode of the MAX bed lamp. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, releases the MAX bet switch 18 that has been pressed (after the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 turns from ON to OFF), By pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (by turning the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 from OFF to ON), it is possible to place a MAX bet (perform a MAX bet process).

Also, for example, when the return spring or sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 malfunctions before and after the power is turned off, and the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed down and the MAX bed lamp is lit, MAX It is possible to notify the administrator that the bet processing is not possible but that the software is not malfunctioning.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed. When it is done (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed, but the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed). (When the sensor for detecting the 1-bet switch 19 turns from OFF to ON), the 1-bet process can be executed.

As a result, for example, even if the MAX bed switch 18 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as when the hand is placed on the MAX bed switch 18), the MAX bed lamp The lighting mode of indicates that the bet processing is possible, and suggests that the 1-bet switch 19 can be operated. Also, even in such a case, since the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 is valid, the game can be progressed.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bed lamp may or may not be on after the power is turned on. If the MAX bet lamp is lit after the power is turned on, it suggests that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, the 3 bet state becomes the 1 bet state, and credits The difference "2" is returned (if the number of credits is 50 in the 3-bet state, the difference cannot be returned to credits, so even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated, the 1-bet state does not occur and 3 In order to maintain the bed state, the MAX bed lamp does not light up (turns off) after the power is turned on). When the MAX bet lamp is turned off after the power is turned on, it is possible to suggest that the MAX bet process has been executed. In addition, even if the MAX bet lamp is on or off after the power is turned on, a 3 bet sound (1 bet sound for 3 times) is output when the power is turned on to inform that the MAX bet process has been executed. It becomes possible to

Subsequently, when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated (depressed) in the MAX-bet possible state (situation where no bet is placed), 1 is stored as the bet number and the 1-bet lamp lights up. In addition, since the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is still valid, the MAX bed lamp is also lit.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and If the power is turned on while the is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed while the sensor of the 1-bet switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the 1-bet process is completed. It is no longer running. Further, since the 1-bet switch 19 is being pressed, a new 1-bet process by pressing the 1-bet switch 19 cannot be performed.

As a result, even if there is an unintended operation of the 1-bet switch 19 when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where a hand is placed on the 1-bet switch 19), the bet will be accepted. In addition, even in such a case, it is possible to notify that the bet processing is possible by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp, and to suggest that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated. ing. For this reason, the player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 or the 1 bet switch 19 is effective, releases the pressed 1 bet switch 19 (the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 changes from ON to OFF). After becoming), press the 1 bed switch 19 again, or without releasing the pressed 1 bed switch 19 (the sensor of the 1 bed switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed (by turning the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 from OFF to ON), 1 bet processing or MAX bet processing can be performed.

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and When the power is turned on while the is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the 1 bet process is not executed, but the MAX bet switch 18 is newly activated By operating (pressing), the MAX bet process can be executed.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the 1 bed switch 19 when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the 1 bed switch 19), the MAX bed lamp , it is possible to notify that the bet processing is possible and suggest that the MAX bet switch 18 can be operated. Also, even in such a case, since the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, the game can be progressed.

In addition, in the state where the maximum bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the 1-bet switch 19 is being pressed. 1-bet process may be executed when the power-off recovery process is executed). In this case, the MAX bet lamp lights up after the power is turned on, suggesting that the MAX bet switch 18 is operable, and when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the 1 bet state changes to the 3 bet state. Further, by outputting a 1-bet sound when the power is turned on, it is possible to notify that the 1-bet process has been executed.

In addition, in a state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 It may be in a situation where it is not open or already open), when the power is turned on while the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open (power off When the return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed, but under the condition that the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, a new 1 bet switch 19 can be operated (depressed) to execute the 1-bet process. In addition, in a state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 It may be in a situation where it is not open or already open), when the power is turned on while the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open (power off When the return processing is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet processing is not executed, but the MAX bet switch 18 is released and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (depressed) again. Thus, the MAX bet process can be executed. In this case, even if the 1-bet switch 19 or the MAX-bet switch 18 is newly pressed and the 1-bet process or the MAX-bet process is executed, the 1-bet sound and the 3-bet sound are not output. Alternatively, the 1-bet switch 19 or the MAX-bet switch 18 is newly pressed, and the 1-bet process or the MAX-bet process is executed, so that a 3-bet is made and the front panel PS2 is open. Below, when the start switch 12 is operated (depressed), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel rotates, but the start sound may not be output.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the MAX bet switch 18 when the power is turned on after a power failure (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18, etc.), the bet will be accepted. In addition, even in such a case, it is possible to accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is effective by the lighting mode of the MAX bed lamp.

Also, for example, when the return spring or sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 malfunctions before and after the power is turned off, and the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed down and the MAX bed lamp is lit, MAX It is possible to notify the administrator that the bet processing is not possible but that the software is not malfunctioning.

In addition, even if the front panel PS2 is open, by enabling the 1-bet processing by the 1-bet switch 19, the work performed by the administrator when the front panel PS2 is open (for example, setting confirmation and administrator menu , etc.), it is possible to check whether or not the 1-bet process can be performed normally. In games at amusement arcades, it is not normal to play a game with the front panel PS2 open. Become.

In addition, in a state where the MAX bet is possible (situation where no bet is placed), power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 It may be in a situation where it is not open or already open), when the power is turned on while the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open (power off When the return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp is not lit, the MAX bet process is not executed, and even if the 1-bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1-bet process is not executed. When the front panel PS2 is closed (closed is detected) while the MAX bed switch 18 is being operated (pressed down), the MAX bed lamp lights up, and when the 1 bed switch 19 is newly operated (pressed down) A mode in which 1-bet processing is possible may also be possible.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the MAX bet switch 18 when the power is turned on after a power failure (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18, etc.), the bet will be accepted. In addition, by not lighting the MAX bet lamp, the player can be made to recognize that the game cannot proceed. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is closed, even if the operation (pressing) of the MAX bet switch 18 continues, by validating the bet operation with the 1 bet switch 19, the progress of the game is not hindered as much as possible. It becomes possible to

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage drops below the threshold value and the gaming machine cannot operate. When the power is turned on while the bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the MAX bet process and the 1 bet process are not executed. Further, in this case, when the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 is being continuously pressed, and the MAX bet switch 18 is newly operated (depressed), the MAX bet processing can be executed. Similarly, in the state where the MAX bet is possible, the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, When the power is turned on while the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed (when power-off recovery processing is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the MAX bet processing and 1-bet processing are not executed. When the 1-bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed, and the 1-bet switch 19 is newly operated (depressed), the 1-bet process can be executed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on after a power failure, the MAX bed switch 18 and the 1 bed switch 19 are unintentionally operated (a situation where the MAX bed switch 18 and 1 bed switch 19 are placed on etc.), and even in such a case, it is possible to accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bed switch 18 is effective by the lighting mode of the MAX bed lamp. can be done. Also, even in such a case, since the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 is effective, the game can be progressed.

The front panel PS2 is in a closed state, the game has been completed, no bet has been placed (replay is not activated), and normal effects are being displayed (states other than continuous effects and AT effects) or demo When the sub-switch 20 is operated (depressed) (when the sensor that detects the sub-switch 20 changes from OFF to ON) while the screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as a menu screen displayable state), the menu screen is displayed. is executed, and a menu screen is displayed on the display device 32 .

In addition, in the state where the menu screen can be displayed, the sub-switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub-switch 20 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. When the sub-switch 20 sensor is kept ON and the power-off recovery process is executed, the sub-switch lamp lights up and the menu screen is not displayed.

As a result, for example, even if the sub-switch 20 is unintentionally operated (such as when a hand is placed on the sub-switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power failure, the unintended menu screen is displayed. Instead of displaying the sub-switch lamp, the lighting mode of the sub-switch lamp indicates that the menu screen can be displayed, thereby suggesting that the sub-switch 20 can be operated. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the operation of the sub-switch 20 is valid releases the depressed sub-switch 20 (after the sensor of the sub-switch 20 changes from ON to OFF), and then the sub-switch is activated again. By pressing 20 (by turning the sensor of the sub switch 20 from OFF to ON), display processing of the menu screen can be performed.

In addition, in the state where the menu screen can be displayed, the sub-switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub-switch 20 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. In this case (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the sub-switch lamp may be lit and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the intention to press the subswitch 20 is reflected, and the menu screen can be displayed immediately after the power is turned on. Further, by turning on the subswitch lamp, the decision operation of each item on the menu screen is valid. can be suggested.

In addition, when the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are in a state in which the MAX bet is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and the gaming machine cannot operate. When the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are being pressed (when the power failure recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, the MAX bet process is not executed, and the sub switch 20 is pressed. The switch lamp lights up and the menu screen is not displayed. Further, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed, a new MAX bet process by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be performed. In other words, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is ON), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet processing cannot be performed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on after a power failure, the MAX bed switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are unintentionally operated (a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bed switch 18 and the sub switch 20, etc.) It is possible to prevent unintentional bets and display of the menu screen even if there is a bet, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp lights up to indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is effective. In addition, the lighting mode of the sub-switch lamp informs that the menu screen display process is possible, thereby suggesting that the sub-switch 20 can be operated.

Also, for example, when the return spring or sensor of the MAX bed switch 18 malfunctions before and after the power is turned off, and the MAX bed switch 18 is pressed down and the MAX bed lamp is lit, MAX It is possible to notify the administrator that the bet processing is not possible but that the software is not malfunctioning.

In addition, when the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are in a state in which the MAX bet is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, the power supply is interrupted and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and the gaming machine cannot operate. When the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are being pressed (when the power failure recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, the MAX bet process is not executed, and the sub switch 20 is pressed. The switch lamp may be turned on and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the intention to press the subswitch 20 is reflected, and the menu screen can be displayed immediately after the power is turned on. Further, by turning on the subswitch lamp, the decision operation of each item on the menu screen is valid. can be suggested. In this case, even after the menu screen is displayed, the MAX bet lamp continues to light up to notify that the MAX bet process can be executed.

The front panel PS2 is in a closed state, the game has been completed, no bet has been placed (replay is not activated), and the number of credits is 1 or more (hereinafter referred to as a settlement possible state). Then, when the settlement switch is operated (depressed), the settlement process is executed, and the medals stored in the credit are paid out to the receiving tray 28 .

In addition, in the settlement possible state, when the power supply is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and the game machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed (the sensor that detects the settlement switch turns from OFF to ON), and the settlement is made. When the power is turned on while the switch is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed while the sensor of the settlement switch is ON), the MAX bed lamp lights up and the settlement process is not executed. Further, even if the MAX bet switch 18 is pushed while the settlement switch is being pushed, the MAX bet processing is not executed.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the checkout switch when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as when a hand is placed on the checkout switch), the unintended checkout process can be executed. In addition, since it is possible to notify that there are medals left in the credits by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp, it is possible to prevent the player from leaving the seat with the credits left.

Also, in the settlement possible state, if the power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed, and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (power When the disconnection return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the settlement process is not executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX bet process is executed. good.

As a result, for example, even if there is an unintended operation of the checkout switch when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as when a hand is placed on the checkout switch), the unintended checkout process can be executed. In addition, since the operation of the MAX bet switch is effective, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered as much as possible, thereby not reducing the interest in the game.

Also, in the settlement possible state, if the power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed, and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (power When the disconnection recovery process is executed), the MAX bed lamp may be turned on and the settlement process may be executed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on before the opening of the amusement arcade, if the power is turned on while the checkout switch is being operated (such as when a hand is placed on the checkout switch), the power is turned on. Since the settlement process can be executed immediately after the opening, the work of turning on the power before opening the store and the work of settlement of the medals remaining in the credit can be simplified.

Also, in the settlement possible state, if the power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine cannot operate, the settlement switch is pressed, and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (power When the disconnection recovery process is executed), the lamp of the sub-switch 20 is lit and the operation of the sub-switch 20 is valid regardless of whether the settlement process is executed or not. (The menu screen can be displayed by accepting the operation of the sub-switch 20).

As a result, for example, even if the settlement switch is operated unintentionally when the power is turned on after a power failure, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the subswitch 20, and the game history can be confirmed and the volume can be checked on the menu screen. It is possible to view and change information useful for the game, such as adjustments. Also, by validating all the operations related to the progress of the game at this time, all the games other than the payment can be executed. The settlement process is used only at the end of the game, and adjusting the number of inserted medals without executing the settlement process does not put the player at a disadvantage, thus hindering the progress of the game as much as possible. It is possible to run without

In addition, in the state where the MAX bet is possible and the settlement is possible, power failure occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed, When the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and the MAX bet processing and settlement processing are not executed. there is Also, in this case, when the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the settlement switch is being pressed down, and the MAX bet switch 18 is newly operated (depressed), the MAX bet processing can be executed, and the MAX bet switch is activated. When the settlement switch is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is being continuously pressed, and the settlement switch is newly operated (depressed) while the MAX bet switch 18 is being continuously pressed, settlement processing can be executed.

As a result, for example, when the power is turned on after a power failure, there is a situation where the MAX bed switch 18 and the settlement switch are unintentionally operated (a situation where a hand is placed on the MAX bed switch 18 and the settlement switch, etc.). However, it is possible to prevent being betted and to prevent settlement processing. In addition, it is possible to accurately notify that there are medals remaining in the credit and that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is effective, by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp.

When the front panel PS2 is in the closed state, the game has been completed, and 3 bets have been made (including the case where replay is in operation) (hereinafter referred to as the reel rotatable state), the start switch 12 is turned on. When operated (depressed), reel rotation processing is executed, and each reel rotates. It should be noted that the reel rotation process is executed after the minimum game time has passed.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is cut off while the reels are rotatable and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), the start lamp lights up, but none of the reels rotate.

As a result, for example, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the start switch 12), the unintended rotation of the reel is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from using the bet game medium unintentionally, and even in such a case, the start lamp indicates that the operation of the start switch 12 is effective. can be accurately notified by the lighting mode.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is cut off while the reels are rotatable and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not light and none of the reels may rotate. In such a case, when the operation of the start switch 12 is finished (when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned off), the start lamp may be turned on.

As a result, for example, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power failure (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the start switch 12), the unintended rotation of the reel is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally using the game medium that has been bet. It is possible for the player to recognize that the reels do not rotate until the operation is finished, and when the operation of the start switch 12 is finished, the start lamp lights up, indicating that the operation of the start switch 12 is valid. can be reported accurately.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power supply is cut off while the reels are rotatable and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the game machine cannot operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed) may be a mode in which all the reels rotate.

As a result, the start switch 12 is operated until the power supply is cut off in the reel rotatable state and the operating voltage momentarily falls below the threshold, and then the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, When the power is automatically turned on while the start switch 12 is being operated (when the power-off recovery process is executed), all the reels rotate after the power is turned on. Even if the start switch 12 is operated at appropriate timing, the game can be progressed (all reels are rotated), and the labor of the player can be reduced and the game tempo can be improved.

In a situation where the front panel PS2 is closed, all the reels are rotating, and the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 is valid (hereinafter referred to as a reel stop possible state), the stop switch 13 is operated. When (pressed down) (when one of the sensors for detecting the left stop switch 13a, the middle stop switch 13b, and the right stop switch 13c turns from OFF to ON), the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stop control processing is executed, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 is stopped. Note that the reel stoppable state is not limited to the state in which all the reels are rotating, and the state in which any one reel is rotating can also be referred to as the reel stoppable state.

In the reel stoppable state, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is in a lighting mode indicating that it is effective. It has a lighting mode that indicates that the constituting LED is invalid.

Here, the unstoppable state of the reel is a state in which the operation of the stop switch 13 is not accepted even though the reel is rotating (during detection of rotation failure or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is operated). or when the reels are not rotating (such as when all the reels are stopped or when the left stop switch 13a is operated while the left reel is stopped).

Further, the lighting mode indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is effective is a mode of lighting in white or a mode of lighting in a color such as red, and the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is ineffective. The lighting mode indicating is a mode in which the light is turned off (extinguished) or a mode in which the lighting is performed in a lighting color (for example, blue) different from the lighting color indicating that it is effective.

In addition, in a state where the reel can be stopped, power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the game machine cannot operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed, and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed. In the case where the left stop switch 13a sensor is kept ON and the power-off recovery process is executed), the stop control process is not executed for the left reel. Further, when the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is being pressed, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is in a lighting mode indicating that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, the left stop switch 13a is the stop switch corresponding to the final stop operation, and after a power failure occurs in the left reel stop possible state, the left stop switch 13a is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on. Even so, since the rotation of the left reel is not stopped by the operation of the left stop switch 13a, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as missing a small winning combination that requires eye pressing. Also, to prevent the operation of the stop switch 13 from being accepted in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order when an internal lottery result (so-called pressing order role) in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player stops depending on the pressing order is won. is also possible.

In addition, in a state where the reel can be stopped, power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, and in a situation where the game machine cannot operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed, and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed. In the case where the power-off recovery process is executed), the stop control process may be executed for the left reel. In this case also, when the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is being pressed, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is in a lighting mode indicating that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, the left stop switch 13a is pressed during the time when the operating voltage momentarily falls below the threshold when the power supply is interrupted during a game, and the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on. When the power is automatically turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the left reel stops after the power is turned on. Even if the stop switch 13 is pressed at a certain timing, the game can be progressed (the corresponding reel is stopped), and the effort of the player can be reduced and the game tempo can be improved. When stopping the reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 pressed after the power is turned on, the reel is stopped even if the reel is accelerating, thereby bringing the player closer to the timing the player originally wanted to stop. becomes possible. However, if there are a plurality of stop switches 13 that are pressed after the power is turned on, none of the reels are stopped.

<Control corresponding to power interruption during slip control according to the present embodiment>
When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is received, the reel is rotated from the reception position of the stop switch 13 to the stop position (so-called slip control). The reel comes to a stop. If the power-off process is executed during the slip control, the slip control cannot be executed and the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position.

In addition, the stop position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the winning determination process is executed based on the determined stop position. When it is determined that a minor winning combination has been won, medals are paid out based on the minor winning combination.

Therefore, in a game in which a small winning combination is won by the internal lottery process, the power cutoff process is executed during the slip control when the operation of the stop switch 13 is received at the timing when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination can be stopped, and the power is turned off. Even if the symbols corresponding to the minor winning combination are not stopped on the effective line after the return, the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning winning combination is determined to be stopped by the winning judgment processing after all the reels are stopped, and the stopped symbol combination is selected. The corresponding medals are paid out.

This is for the following reasons. In other words, it has the effect of preventing the player from being unable to receive the payout of medals even though the player performs the stop operation at the timing of receiving the payout of the medals. There was also the problem of not being able to recognize it. In order to solve this problem, in a game in which a minor winning combination is won by the internal lottery process, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is received at the timing at which the symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination can be stopped, the slip control is performed (from the stop acceptance to the slippage). (until control ends), the reel is rotated after the power is restored, the index is detected, the reel is rotated to the stop position based on the detected index information, and then stopped at the stop position. and then pay out the medals.

With this configuration, even if the power-off process is executed during the slip control, the player can determine which symbol combination has been stopped by rotating it to the stop position where it was scheduled to stop again after the power is restored. Since it is possible to visually recognize it, the interest of the player can be improved.

Also, even if the same pattern exists while the power is turned off during the slip control, and the index is detected in the re-rotation process after the power is restored, and it moves to the planned stop position, it will not be possible. stop position. If it stops at the same symbol before the planned stop position, there is a possibility that the stop display will not stop during the game, so it is necessary to determine whether the stop is prohibited or not. , is moved to a predetermined position in order to reduce the processing load during re-rotation processing.

In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and in re-rotation processing after power recovery, acceleration processing and constant-speed processing are executed in the same manner as normal drum rotation start processing. It should be noted that acceleration processing and constant speed processing that are different from normal processing may be executed without being limited to this. For example, it is conceivable that the acceleration time is shortened, the acceleration time is lengthened, the speed of constant-speed rotation is slowed down, or the speed of constant-speed rotation is increased. By changing the acceleration mode or the constant speed mode in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the rotation is different from the normal one.

Also, if it rotates to the same position as the stop reception position while rotating at a constant speed during re-rotation, it will be considered that the stop operation has been received in the same way as normal rotation processing, and slip control will be performed, and the planned stop position will be performed. When the reel rotates up to , an all-phase excitation signal is output to the stepping motor driving the reel (in the case of a 4-phase stepping motor, a 4-phase excitation signal is output) to stop the rotating reel.

In addition, the power is turned off during the slip control, and during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, "re-rotating" is displayed on the liquid crystal so that the player can recognize that it is being re-rotated. Alternatively, it is possible to output a voice saying "Re-rotating", or display an error on an error indicator. This mode allows the player to recognize that the rotation is unusual.

Further, when the power-off process is executed during the slip control, a flag indicating that the slip control is not completed is stored in a predetermined storage area. If so, execute re-rotation processing. The flag is initialized when the re-rotation processing is stopped as a result of executing the re-rotation processing, so that the re-rotation processing is not executed when the power is normally turned on. In addition, the flag relating to the fact that the slip control is not completed may be an error flag or a game state flag.

In addition, when power-off processing is executed during slip control, re-rotation processing may be automatically executed after power is restored, or re-rotation processing may be performed after an error occurs after power restoration and is canceled by the reset switch. may be executed. Any aspect is applicable to the re-rotation processing of the subsequent embodiments.

Further, during the power-off process during the slip control, and during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the rotation failure detection counter may be updated during acceleration and constant speed, or during constant speed. Then, when the rotation failure detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 180 as described above), the acceleration process is executed again. In this case, the rotation failure may be caused by the reel being held by hand, the motor being out of step due to malfunction, or the deterioration of the member over time.

In this case, the rotation failure detection counter is initialized in the initialization process when the power is turned on, and updating (counting) of the rotation failure detection counter is started along with the execution of the re-rotation process. After the index is first detected after the power is turned on, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is updated to 0 and updating of the rotation failure detection counter is started again, and the reel control means rotates the reel to the stop position and stops it. By clearing the rotation failure detection counter after detecting the index for the first time in this way, the position of the reel stopped by the power-off processing is the position immediately after passing the index, and the stop position is the position immediately before passing the index. can stop up to the stop position without detecting rotation failure. In other words, although the reel rotates about two turns after the power is turned on until the reel stops, it is not determined that the rotation is defective.

Although the timing for initializing the rotation failure detection counter is assumed to be when the power is turned on, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the rotation failure detection counter is initialized when the rotation failure detection counter occurs.

In this way, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and rotation failure is detected during re-rotation processing after power is restored. It is possible to stop at the stop position where it is. In addition, since rotation failure is not detected during normal slip control, re-acceleration processing is not executed if step-out or the like occurs during normal slip control.

Subsequently, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and if an error (restorable error) is detected during re-rotation processing after power is restored, error notification is performed after the re-rotation processing is completed. Errors detected at this time include medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error, hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error, door opening error, harness disconnection error, etc. there is In addition to the error code displayed on the acquired number display 27, the error notification can be performed in a liquid crystal notification mode, a speaker notification mode, an upper or both side production lamp, and a production switch lamp in a predetermined color (for example, , red, blue, and other highly visible colors). Note that the error notification may be performed by only one error notification, or may be performed by combining a plurality of error notifications.

In this way, by giving the error notification after the re-rotation process is finished, it is possible to make it easier for the player or the person concerned with the game hall to recognize whether the notification is during the re-rotation or the notification of the error. If the re-rotation notification is given during the re-rotation, the re-rotation notification is terminated after the re-rotation is completed, and the error notification is switched to. Note that error notification is not performed during re-rotation, and notification regarding re-rotation, which is not error notification, is not performed.

The error mode during the re-rotation process described above is not limited to this, and the error to be detected may be a partial error (for example, the hopper retention error is detected, but the medal retention error is not detected, etc.), and the error notification mode , after an error is detected, the obtained number display 27 notifies the error, and when the re-rotation process is completed and the reel stops, the error is notified by the liquid crystal or the speaker, or after the error detection, the obtained number display 27 and the liquid crystal. Alternatively, the error may be notified by a speaker.

Subsequently, power-off processing is executed during the slip control, and during the re-rotation processing after the power is restored, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is disabled, and even if the stop switch 13 is operated, it is supported. The reels are designed not to stop.

As a situation in which the reel rotates when the power is turned on, power recovery after power loss during normal reel rotation is possible in addition to power recovery after power loss during slip control. When the power is restored after the power is turned off during normal rotation of the reels, the reels can be stopped, and the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is an effective mode. Therefore, when the reel rotates when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel re-rotation processing is being performed or the reel is being rotated normally by confirming the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13.例文帳に追加

In addition, as another situation in which the reel rotates when the power is turned on, it is conceivable that the power is restored after the power is turned off during a freeze in which the reel rotates. As types of freeze in which the reels rotate, there are a pseudo game in which temporary stop control is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and a reel performance in which the rotation of the reels does not stop even if the operation of the stop switch 13 is received.

During the pseudo game, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is a valid mode, and when the power is restored after the power is turned off during the pseudo game, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is a valid mode, so when the power is turned on. When the reels rotate, it is possible to determine whether the reel re-rotation processing is being performed or the reels are rotating normally by checking the lighting state of the lamp of the stop switch 13 .

The lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is disabled during the reel performance, and the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is disabled when the power is restored after the power is turned off during the reel performance, so when the power is turned on. When the reels are rotating, it is not possible to determine whether the reel is being produced or is being re-rotated by the way the lamp of the stop switch 13 is turned on. It's becoming Even if the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch is in an invalid mode during the reel effect, if the operation of another main system switch (switch managed by the main control means 100) is to be validated, the other main system switch Since the lighting mode of the lamp is an effective mode, by checking the lighting mode of the lamps of the other main system switches, it is possible to determine whether reel performance is being performed or re-rotation processing is being performed.

Also, during the pseudo-game or during the power restoration after the power is turned off during the reel effect, it may be a mode that does not rotate the reels, in this case, since the reels do not rotate when the power is restored, it is possible to determine whether the re-rotation process is being performed. can be easily determined by the rotation mode of the reel.

Subsequently, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power restoration, rotation is performed until the index is detected after power restoration, and the index is scheduled again. Move to the stop position and stop. If the power is turned off immediately before the index is detected, and if the index is not detected during acceleration after the power is restored, the index cannot be detected and the index is rotated again until the index detection timing. I can say.

Since the re-spin process can be executed even when the power is restored after the power is cut off during the re-spin process, the stop symbol can be displayed to the player even in an unstable situation where the power is cut off several times. can be displayed.

Here, the power-off process is executed during the slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored. After detecting the index at .

<Pattern 1>
Power-off processing is executed during slip control, and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery. It is conceivable to rotate until the index is detected in the second re-rotation process, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, since the index is not detected in the first re-rotation process and the reference symbol position is not stored, the second re-rotation process determines that the reference symbol position is not stored and repeats Rotation is performed to detect the index, and it is possible to stop at the planned stop position.

<Pattern 2-1>
In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery. including the timing at the moment when the sensor detects the index. The same shall apply hereinafter.), after the power is restored, up to the planned stop position based on the reference pattern position by the index detected before the power was turned off. A mode in which it is rotated and then stopped is conceivable.

In this case, since the index is detected in the first re-rotation process, it can be stopped at the planned stop position based on the stored reference symbol position. It is possible to shorten the time until restart.

In the pattern 2-1 described above, the power supply is turned off during the period from the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process to the rotation to the planned stop position and application of the brake (until the four-phase excitation is output). If the power-off process is executed, even if the timing at which the power-off process was executed was not rotated to the stop reception position, even if it was rotated to the stop reception position, after the power is restored Re-rotation processing or stop control is executed based on the stored reference symbol position without detecting the index again.

In this way, the same re-rotation processing or stop control can be executed after the power is restored for the second time regardless of the stop reception position received immediately before the first power-off processing. can be realized.

<Pattern 2-2>
In addition, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery, if the index is detected during re-rotation processing, power is restored. A mode is conceivable in which the index is detected again later, and then it is rotated to the planned stop position and then stopped.

In this case, considering the possibility that the reel may have moved between the time the power was turned off and the time the power was restored, the reel will continue to rotate until the index is detected again, so it will reach the stop position more accurately. It is possible to rotate.

In the pattern 2-2 described above, after the index during the first re-rotation process is detected, until the brake is applied after rotating to the planned stop position (until the four-phase excitation is output), the power supply is turned off. If the power-off process is executed, even if the timing at which the power-off process was executed was not rotated to the stop reception position, even if it was rotated to the stop reception position, after the power is restored A re-rotation process is executed to detect the index again, and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped.

In this way, the same re-rotation processing or stop control can be executed after the power is restored for the second time regardless of the stop reception position received immediately before the first power-off processing. can be realized.

<Pattern 2-3>
In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and power-off processing is executed again during re-rotation processing after power recovery. If not, after the power is restored, the index is not detected again, and re-rotation processing or stop control is executed based on the stored reference symbol position, and the power is turned off during the slip control, and the power is turned off. During re-rotation processing after recovery, if the index is detected during re-rotation processing and the rotation has reached the stop reception position, the index is detected again after power is restored. A mode is conceivable in which the symbol is moved to the planned stop position by executing the re-rotation process for the purpose and then stopped.

In this way, since the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process can be finely controlled after the reference power supply is restored, it is possible to execute appropriate processes according to the situation in which the power-off process is executed.

<Control of effect mode using the effect switch according to the present embodiment>
An effect using the effect switch (sometimes referred to as a push button effect) will be described with reference to FIG. 12 . In FIG. 12, the operation of the start switch 12, the operation of the left stop switch 13a, the operation of the middle stop switch 13b, the operation of the right stop switch 13c, and then the operation of the production switch are performed, and the production switch is operated. It shows the process in which the performance is executed. In addition, the portion labeled "PUSH" in FIG. 12 represents a switch for effect (however, the "PUSH" indication on the upper side of the lower middle diagram in FIG. 12 is displayed on the liquid crystal).

In the upper left diagram of FIG. 12, the start switch 12 for starting the game is operated (more specifically, reception of the start switch reception command or reception of the reel rotation start command from the main control means 100). The effect "Win the rock-paper-scissors!" is displayed on the LCD. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Subsequently, in the upper middle diagram of FIG. 12, based on the operation of the left stop switch 13a for stopping the left reel (more specifically, reception of the left stop switch reception command from the main control means 100) The effect of "Ja~n!" is displayed on the liquid crystal. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Subsequently, in the upper right diagram of FIG. 12, it is executed based on the operation of the middle stop switch 13b for stopping the middle reel (more specifically, reception of the middle stop switch reception command from the main control means 100) The effect of "Ke~n!" is displayed on the liquid crystal. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Subsequently, in the lower left diagram of FIG. 12, it is executed based on the operation of the right stop switch 13c for stopping the right reel (more specifically, reception of the right stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). The effect of "Pon!" is displayed on the liquid crystal. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Next, in the lower middle diagram of FIG. 12, the effect switch executed based on the fact that all the reels have stopped (more specifically, the reception of the all reel stop command from the main control means 100) is simulated. An image of the switch that has been pressed (hereinafter, may be referred to as an effect switch image, an operation promotion image, or an operation promotion effect) is displayed on the liquid crystal. Also, the effect "Pop!" displayed when the right stop switch 13c, which is the third stop, is operated is dimly displayed (lowered in brightness). Since the operation of the effect switch is valid at this time, the effect switch is lit. When the image is displayed dimly, the luminance may be lowered instead of the brightness, or the image may be superimposed with a semi-transparent gray color. In any case, it is possible to express that the visibility is lowered when the image is displayed dimly.

Subsequently, in the diagram on the lower right of FIG. 12, the image "Victory!" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation response image or an operation response effect) is displayed on the liquid crystal. Since the operation of the effect switch is invalid at this time, the effect switch is turned off.

As shown in the lower middle diagram of FIG. 12, when the effect switch image is displayed on the liquid crystal as an effect to prompt the operation of the effect switch, the effect switch image is larger than the actual effect switch size. make it By displaying in this manner, the effect switches can be effectively displayed on the liquid crystal display that the player is watching, and the player can intuitively be prompted to operate the effect switches.

In addition, in the effect switch image, an image representing the lighting mode of the effect switch (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a lighting mode image) is also performed. When the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp is lit (not blinking), and the lighting mode image is expressed in a blinking mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated at a predetermined cycle. According to such a configuration, the effect switch image is repeatedly brightened and darkened, so that the effect switch image can be made conspicuous, and the operation of the effect switch can be effectively urged.

Also, when the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp is lit in a blinking mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at a specific cycle, and the lighting mode image is expressed in a blinking mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at a predetermined cycle. It may be in the form of In this case, it is possible to make the lighting state image stand out by making the predetermined period of the lighting state image shorter than the specific period of the effect switch lamp. In this case, the operation (pressing) of the effect switch is valid even at the timing when the effect switch lamp is turned off, and the effect switch is operated at this timing. , dimly displayed "Pon!" The production is switched.

In addition, eco mode (when set to eco mode, the brightness of the upper or both side production lamps is reduced or turned off, or the brightness of the lower panel is reduced compared to when it is not set to eco mode). or turn it off, or lower the brightness of the liquid crystal display or turn it off), when the effect switch is turned on when executing the push button effect during the eco mode. and the brightness of the switch for presentation when the switch for presentation is lit when executing the push button presentation when not in the eco mode. This makes it possible to effectively prompt the player to operate (press down) the effect switch.

It should be noted that even when the error notification is performed by lighting or blinking the upper or both sides production lamps or production switch lamps in a predetermined color (highly visible colors such as red and blue), the eco mode and the eco It is preferable to make the brightness of the upper or both side effect lamps and the effect switch lamps the same when not in the mode.

In addition, when displaying an image indicating turning off as a lighting mode image, the brightness of the effect switch image is lowered and displayed, but the brightness is not lowered until it turns black, and the expression is such that it is slightly lit. do. On the other hand, when the production switch lamp is turned off, it is not lit. In this way, by differentiating the expression of the lighting state image from that of the effect switch lamp, it is possible to make the lighting state image stand out. In addition, since the area around the effect switch image is brighter than the area around the effect switch, the brightness of the lighting mode image of the effect switch image is not lowered to black, so that the difference in brightness with the surroundings is reduced. making it smaller. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce fatigue during the game while making the effect switch image stand out.

Also, when the effect switch image is displayed before the previous image as shown in the lower middle diagram of FIG. The brightness of the previous image is made lower than the brightness. With such a configuration, even when the lightness of the effect switch image is the lowest, the lightness of the effect switch image is higher than that of the surrounding images, so that the effect switch image can be made conspicuous.

The lower middle diagram in FIG. 12 will be further described with reference to FIG. The effect switch image changes over time until the effect switch is operated. As a mode of change, an effect representing the initial position of the effect switch and the advance/retreat of the pressed position is expressed using the effect switch image.

The leftmost diagram in FIG. 13 shows that the effect switch image is in the initial position, the second diagram from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the depressed position, and the third diagram from the left. 4 shows that the effect switch image is in the initial position, and the fourth figure from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the depressed position. In this manner, by configuring the effect switch image to repeatedly show the state of the initial position and the state of the depressed position, it is possible to effectively prompt the player to press the effect switch. .

The initial position and the pressed position of the effect switch image change at a constant cycle, and the cycle representing the initial position and the pressed position of the effect switch image is longer than the predetermined cycle representing lighting and extinguishing of the lighting mode image. is configured as By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect switch image stand out, and to prevent the user from being reminded of repeatedly pressing the effect switch. Many of the game machines currently on the market continuously change the performance by repeatedly hitting the performance switch, and if the change mode of the performance switch image is changed too quickly, there is a risk of mistaking it for the repeated hitting performance. , There is a possibility that the interest of the game will be reduced. For this reason, by making the period of change between the initial position and the depressed position longer than the period of the lighting mode, it is possible to intuitively express that the effect switch is not being repeatedly hit while making the user aware that the effect switch is being depressed. becomes.

In addition, in a situation where an effect of repeatedly hitting the effect switch is displayed, by shortening the cycle of changing between the initial position and the depressed position than the cycle of the lighting mode, the player is made to repeatedly hit the effect switch. can be expressed intuitively. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, but the switching cycle of the lighting mode image is set to be shorter than the cycle when the switch image for effect is operated once, although the position of the switch image for effect does not change. It may be an aspect.

Alternatively, the effect switch image may be changed between the initial position and the depressed position in a constant cycle. In this case, since the display area of the liquid crystal can be reduced, it is possible to display characters such as "Press the PUSH button" to the effect that the effect switch should be pressed instead.

When the switch for presentation is operated while the switch image for presentation for operating the switch for presentation is displayed on the liquid crystal, the switch image for presentation is deleted without any effect. In other words, if the effect switch is operated while the effect switch image is displayed, the effect switch image is immediately erased and the effect based on the depression of the effect switch is immediately executed. . In this case, the effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process immediately after accepting the operation of the effect switch. It may be configured to erase the effect switch image.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in what result is obtained by pressing the switch for presentation, and the information as to whether or not the switch for presentation has been pressed can be made conspicuous. It is possible to eliminate it.

Further, even if the front panel PS2 is opened while the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal, the display of the effect switch image is continued and the effect switch is operated. When operated, the effect switch image is erased without any effect, and the effect based on the depression of the effect switch is immediately executed. At this time, as described above, the effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process immediately after accepting the operation of the effect switch, or may be executed after a predetermined period from immediately after accepting the operation of the effect switch. The effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process.

By executing the performance based on the depression of the performance switch regardless of whether the front panel PS2 is open or closed, the progress of the game is not hindered even if the front panel PS2 is unintentionally opened. becomes possible.

When the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal while the front panel PS2 is open, the lighting mode of the effect switch is the same as when the front panel PS2 is closed. , is configured to be different from the lighting mode of the effect switch when the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal. For example, when the front panel PS2 is in the closed state, it lights up, while in the open state it blinks or turns off. It can be different. In addition, in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open, as shown in FIG. 17, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the effect switch image ( In order to improve the visibility of the effect switch image and the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open, the front panel PS2 is opened at a position where these images do not overlap each other. (You may also display an image showing that Furthermore, in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open, a sound indicating that the front panel PS2 is open (for example, "the door is open") may be output. It is also possible not to output the effect sound associated with the display of the switch image or the effect sound associated with the effect based on the depression of the effect switch. Thus, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open. On the other hand, even in the situation where the sound indicating that the front panel PS2 is open is being output, the effect sound associated with the display of the effect switch image or the effect sound based on the depression of the effect switch is output. good too. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open without hindering the progress of the game.

When the front panel PS2 is opened while the effect switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal, the front panel PS2 must be opened instead of the effect switch image. is displayed to invalidate the depression of the effect switch, and then the front panel PS2 is closed, the image showing that the front panel PS2 is open is erased, and the effect switch image is displayed again. . By displaying an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open superimposed on the effect switch image, the effect switch image is made invisible, and when the front panel PS2 is closed after that, the front panel PS2 is open. It is also possible to erase the image indicating that the effect switch image is visible again. In this case as well, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open by changing the lighting mode of the effect switch before and after the front panel PS2 is opened as described above.

Further, in the case of executing an effect (success effect) meaning that a privilege is given to the player when the effect switch is operated, the effect switch image is erased without any effect. In the case of executing an effect (failure effect) meaning that no privilege is given to the player when is operated, the switch image for effect may be erased along with the effect. Incidentally, the effect in the case of a failure effect may be an aspect in which the effect switch image explodes, or an aspect in which the brightness of the effect switch image is maintained in the darkest state (an aspect in which the brightness does not change periodically).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the failure performance is displayed as a result of operating the performance switch, to foster a sense of satisfaction in the player, and to reduce the interest in the next game and thereafter. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Further, when displaying the effect switch image when all reels (all reels) are stopped, when the start switch 12 of the next game is operated, the image displayed when the effect switch is operated is not displayed. Display an image based on the operation of the . Furthermore, when displaying an image based on the operation of the start switch 12, the effect switch image is erased. At this time, the effect switch image is erased without any effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect in response to the player's operation without interfering with the effect executed based on the operation of the start switch 12.例文帳に追加A player who skips the effect switch image by operating the start switch 12 is highly likely to know in advance that the degree of expectation is low, or is not interested in the effect itself using the effect switch, and there is no effect. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by erasing the game without deleting it.

In addition, when the effect switch is operated in a situation where the effect switch image is displayed and the success effect is displayed, the time from acceptance of the effect switch operation until the effect switch image is erased, and the pressing order A time from acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 when the stop switch 13 corresponding to the correct pressing order is operated in a situation where the navigation image is displayed and a success performance is displayed until the pressing order navigation image is erased; , the time until the effect switch image is erased is longer.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the time until the reaction effect that is executed when various switches are operated, and it is possible to give different fun depending on the time difference between the various switches and the execution of the reaction effect. becomes. For example, if the push order fails, the profit is lost directly. With the push order navigation image, if the next information is immediately displayed, the player's interest can be heightened. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect whether the success effect will be displayed or the failure effect will be displayed.

When the effect switch doubles as a switch for displaying a menu screen, the effect switch lamp is lit after a certain period of time (for example, T1) has elapsed after all reels have stopped. The lighting mode of the effect switch lamp at this time is different from the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp when the effect is executed by operating the effect switch after all reels are stopped.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest whether the menu screen is displayed or whether the success or failure effect is displayed when the effect switch is operated, depending on the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp. .

In addition, when displaying the effect switch image as shown in the lower middle diagram of FIG. The lighting mode is not the lighting mode when the menu screen is displayed, but the lighting mode corresponding to the effect switch image. Then, when the performance switch operation is received after T1 has elapsed after all the reels are stopped, the performance switch image is erased, the success or failure performance is executed, and the performance switch lamp is kept turned off. Even when T1 has passed since the operation of the switch for presentation is accepted, the switch lamp for presentation is kept off, and even if the switch for presentation is operated, the menu screen is not displayed. Furthermore, even when T2 for the demonstration screen to be displayed has passed after all reels are stopped, the demonstration screen is not displayed and the sound volume is lowered, and the effect switch lamp remains off. In this case, depending on whether the settlement process is executed by accepting the operation of the settlement switch or the game is executed until after the next game (after the end of the game in which the effect switch image is not displayed), after all reels are stopped The menu screen can be displayed after T1 has elapsed, and the demonstration screen can be displayed after T2 has elapsed after all reels have stopped.

With this configuration, when the effect switch is operated in the game in which the effect switch image is displayed, the player wonders whether the menu screen will be displayed or the success or failure effect will be displayed. It becomes possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game because it is no longer necessary. It should be noted that the menu screen may not be displayed even after the settlement process is executed. In this case, a failure effect is displayed in the game, but a success effect is displayed in the next game. It is possible to maintain the expectation until whether or not is executed.

Further, when the effect switch lamp is lit in a lighting mode capable of displaying the menu screen, the effect switch image is not displayed on the liquid crystal. In other words, whether or not the menu screen is displayed can be confirmed only by the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the state that the menu screen can be displayed, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, by only the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp. Compared to , it is possible to reduce the possibility that the operation of the effect switch will cause a sense of anticipation, and the menu screen is displayed even though the player has operated the effect switch with a sense of expectation. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by putting it away.

In addition, on the demo screen where the player can easily recognize that the game is not progressing, the effect switch image is displayed in a different position and in a smaller size than the effect switch image displayed in the push button effect. good too. In this case, the player is unlikely to be confused with the push button effect, and the menu screen display can be effectively displayed to the player. This means that the timing of displaying the menu screen is most often when starting a game, and since the game is not being played at that timing, there is a high possibility that the demo screen is being displayed. It is based on

As for the display position of the effect switch image, during the push button effect, the effect switch image is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal, and during the demo screen, the edge of the liquid crystal (for example, as shown in FIG. (e.g., in an inconspicuous position). Further, as described above, the effect switch image in the demo screen is displayed in a smaller size than the effect switch image during the push button effect. In other words, it can be said that at least one of the display area and the size is different between the effect switch image in the demo screen and the effect image during the push button effect. Furthermore, it is preferable that the display modes of the effect switch image during the push button effect and the effect switch image in the demo screen are different (for example, the effect switch image during the push effect repeats lighting and extinguishing at a predetermined cycle). display in a blinking mode, and the effect switch image in the demo screen is displayed in a lit mode, etc.). As a result, the player can intuitively distinguish between a situation in which the player wants to press the performance switch as part of the performance and a situation in which the performance switch may be pressed.

As shown in FIG. 19, the effect switch image in the demo screen may be in the form of a telop such as "PUSH to display menu".

The timing at which the push button effect is executed is after all reels are stopped, but it may be after receiving the start switch 12. - 特許庁When the effect switch image is displayed after the start switch 12 is accepted, the effect switch image may be erased by the first stop operation (operation of any of the stop switches 13), or even after all reels are stopped. The display of the effect switch image may be maintained. When the display of the effect switch image is maintained after all reels are stopped, the effective period of the operation of the effect switch is also maintained, and when the effect switch is operated, the success or failure effect is executed. It should be noted that if the effect switch has not been operated due to either the elapse of the time for shifting to the demo screen, the execution of the settlement process, the execution of the betting process, or the start of the next game. Also, the effect switch image is erased.

Further, whether or not the operation response effect is executed by operating the effect switch is determined by setting a predetermined timer value in a counter based on the reception of a predetermined command from the main control means 100, and timer interrupt processing. etc., the counter value is decremented at predetermined intervals, and when the counter value reaches 0, the operation of the effect switch is enabled (the operation response effect is executed by operating the effect switch). ). At this time, the effect switch image is also rendered after a period corresponding to a predetermined timer value elapses after receiving a predetermined command. Due to a delay in communication with the board, etc., the effect switch may become effective before the effect switch image is displayed. Thus, even if the effect switch is operated before the effect switch image is displayed, the response effect can be executed.

<<Notice, etc. applicable to display devices>>
Next, an advance notice applicable to this embodiment will be described. As the effect types (notice types) that can be displayed on the display device 32 of the present embodiment, a first effect type (example: step-up notice) that can display a plurality of display modes in stages and a predetermined timing (example: effect At the start, 1 second after the start of the production, etc.), a second display mode (e.g., red lines) different from the first display mode (e.g., white lines) is displayed, suggesting the possibility of an advantageous situation. It is a point that it is provided with a second effect type (eg, speech announcement) that can be performed. In a first performance state (also referred to as a normal performance state) in which the possibility of a bonus or an AT is low, at least the first performance type and the second performance type can be executed, but the second performance in which the possibility of a bonus or an AT is high. In a state (for example, a continuous effect or an omen effect), the first effect type is not executed, and the second effect type can be executed. It should be noted that each configuration described below can be appropriately combined as long as there are no inhibiting factors.

[First production type]
The first effect type includes an advance notice that is displayed multiple times in stages. For example, a so-called step-up notice is included. As a specific suggestion mode, a predetermined degree of expectation in the order of step 1 (white) < step 2 (blue) < step 3 (yellow) < step 4 (green) < step 5 (red) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a sign rush, AT rush, bonus winning, etc.), and in one game, multiple times such as step 1 (white) → step 2 (blue) → step 3 (yellow) A notice that can be displayed is included. In addition, in a plurality of games, the case where the notice pattern is displayed step by step like step 1 (white)→step 2 (blue)→step 3 (yellow) is also included. That is, since the advance notice of the first effect type is displayed in stages, it takes a relatively long time for the player to recognize the display mode that can be finally displayed.

[Second production type]
In the second effect type, in one game, display is started in a post-change mode (second display mode) different from the normal mode (first display mode) from the start of display of the notice, or in one game, A notice is included that the display mode can be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode only once. It also includes an advance notice (so-called button advance notice) in which a movable accessory is moved by operating a sub-input button or some kind of advance notice image is displayed. That is, so-called dialogue announcement, so-called title announcement, so-called button announcement, display of character names and technique names in battle effects, and the like are included. As a specific suggestion mode, it is possible to suggest a predetermined degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation for winning a minor combination, entering a sign, entering an AT, winning a bonus, etc.) in the order of white<green<red. More specifically, the lines are displayed in green or red at the start of the notice (they are displayed in green or red from the beginning of the game and do not change), and the character names and technique names in the battle production are white. to red characters (white characters change to red characters in the game). In other words, the time required for the player to recognize the display mode that can be finally displayed in the second effect type in which there is no change in color or the like, or only the color of characters is changed, is determined by the advance notice pattern. It is shorter than the changing first effect type.

[First production state]
The first production state is a production state in which the possibility of winning a bonus or AT is low. This is a production state (normal production state) that has not developed into a so-called continuous production or a so-called precursor.

[Second production state]
The second rendering state is a rendering state in which the possibility of winning a bonus or AT is higher than in the first rendering state. It includes so-called continuous effects and omens.

The first presentation state is a state in which a bonus or winning of an AT cannot be expected so much, and is a state in which a shift to a continuous presentation or a sign is mainly expected. In other words, if the advance notice displayed on the display device 32 is careless, the player will become bored and will not continue the game. Therefore, in the first rendering state, multiple stages of display are required in order to shift to continuous rendering or an omen. In other words, even if the first effect type, which takes a long time, is executed as an advance notice, the player does not feel so annoyed.

On the other hand, in the second effect state, the main purpose of the game is to show a continuous effect or an indication on the display device 32 that a bonus or an AT win can be expected more than in the first effect state. It is better to avoid interrupting announcements that take a relatively long time as much as possible. In addition, when the announcement is made in the second effect state in which the bonus or winning of AT is expected, the player strongly desires to be notified of the winning of bonus or AT. In other words, as a notice that can be executed in the second effect state, the first effect type that takes a relatively long time for the player to grasp the content of the notice (expectation, etc.) is not appropriate, and the content of the notice (expectation, etc.) etc.) is more appropriate because the time required for the player to comprehend is relatively short.

(Step-up notice in the first production state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the step-up notice, which is the notice of the first effect type that can be executed in the first effect state, will be described. Although t1 to t7 will be described below along the passage of time, it should be noted that these are t1 to t7 in FIG. 14 and are independent of the same symbols in other drawings.

First, at t1, the start lever 12 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "start lever") is operated. Next, at t2, step-up 1 (character A) starts to be displayed. The player can recognize that the step-up notice has started to be displayed at this timing. However, it cannot be grasped whether or not the chance will be increased after this, that is, whether or not step-up 2 and subsequent steps will be displayed.

Next, at t3, step-up 2 (character B) starts to be displayed. At this timing, the player can grasp that the step-up notice has increased the chance. However, it is still not possible to grasp to which stage the chance will finally rise.

Next, at t4, step-up 3 (character C) starts to be displayed. Even here, it is still not possible to grasp the final stage to which the chance will rise.

Next, at t5, step-up notice ends at step-up 3. Here, the player can grasp the final display mode of the step-up notice.

Thereafter, the first stop button is operated at t6, the second stop button is operated at t7, the third stop button is operated at t8, and the game ends at t9.

As described above, the step-up notice, which is the first effect type in the first effect state, requires a period from t2 to t5 until the final display mode of the step-up notice is grasped. Further, the period of displaying in the display mode with increased chances ends before the operation of the first stop button.

It should be noted that the period from the start of the game by lever-on to the start of the step-up notice (period T1 from t1 to t2 in FIG. 14, about 1 second) is the period required for the step-up notice to increase the chance by one step ( It may be longer than the period T2) from t2 to t3 in FIG. 14, about 0.5 seconds), or the period from the start of the game by lever-on to the start of the step-up notice (the above period T1, about 0.5 seconds). 1 second) may be shorter than the period (the period T2, about 1.2 seconds) required for the step-up notice to increase the chance by one step. Note that FIG. 14 schematically shows the latter example.

(Dialogue notice in the first production state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a dialogue announcement, which is an announcement of the second effect type that can be executed in the first effect state, will be described. Although t1 to t8 will be described below along the passage of time, it should be noted that these are t1 to t8 in FIG. 15 and are independent of the same symbols in other drawings.

First, at t1, the start lever is operated. Next, at t2, the dialogue notice starts with the green letters of "It's a chance". From this timing, it is possible for the player to understand that the line notice is in the display form of chance up and the final display form of the line notice. Since it takes some time to actually grasp the display mode of the chance up, in the dialog announcement, the period T2 from t2 to t3 in FIG. 15 is the period required until the final display mode is grasped. I can say.

Thereafter, the first stop button is operated at t4, the second stop button is operated at t5, the third stop button is operated at t6, and the game ends at t7.

Next, when a betting operation for the next game is performed at t8, the display of the advance notice of the dialogue ends.

In this manner, in the speech announcement, which is the second presentation type in the first presentation state, it takes a period T2 from t2 to t3 in FIG. 15 to grasp the final display mode of the speech announcement. Further, when the third stop button is operated and the game ends, there is no point in suggesting an increase in the chance of the game, but the display in the display mode of the increase in chance continues until the betting operation of the next game is performed. is configured as As a result, the chance-up of the previous game can be ended in the betting process in which the process of initializing the effects of the previous game is performed, and the process of erasing the chance-up is not performed in the game end process after the third stop. Therefore, the burden of control processing can be reduced.

In addition, in the dialogue notice, for example, after starting with the white "chance" characters (first display mode) at t2, red "chance!" yo" (second display mode) (the first display mode may be changed to the second display mode in the game). In this case, the period from lever-on to the start of the advance notice of the dialogue (period T3 from t1 to t2 in FIG. 15) is required for changing the advance notice of the dialogue from the first display mode to the second display mode. It is shorter than the period (the period TA from t3 to t4 to t8 in FIG. 15).

(Dialogue notice in a certain second production state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a dialogue announcement, which is an announcement of the second effect type that can be executed in a certain continuous effect (certain second effect state), will be described. Although t1 to t14 will be described below along the passage of time, it should be noted that these are t1 to t14 in FIG. 16 and are independent of the same symbols in other drawings.

First, at t1, the start lever is operated, and the first game of continuous effects is started. Next, at t2, the dialogue notice is started with the characters "Atsui" in green. From this timing, it is possible for the player to understand that the line notice is in the display form of chance up and the final display form of the line notice. Since it takes a certain amount of time to actually grasp the display mode of chance up, the final display mode is grasped during the period T2 from t2 to t3 in FIG. It can be said that it is the period required until

After that, the first stop button is operated at t4, the second stop button is operated at t5, and the third stop button is operated at t6, and the game ends at t7 (that is, the payout process is completed and the next game is started). possible).

Next, when a betting operation for the next game (the second game of the continuous effect) is performed at t8, the display of the advance notice of the words ends.

As described above, in the speech announcement, which is the second presentation type in the second presentation state, it takes a period of time from t2 to t3 to grasp the final display mode of the speech announcement. Further, when the third stop button is operated and the game ends, there is no point in suggesting an increase in the chance of the game, but the display in the display mode of the increase in chance continues until the betting operation of the next game is performed. is configured as As a result, the chance-up of the previous game can be ended in the betting process in which the process of initializing the effects of the previous game is performed, and the process of erasing the chance-up is not performed in the game end process after the third stop. Therefore, the burden of control processing can be reduced.

In the second game of the continuous effect, the dialogue notice is not displayed after the start lever is operated.

Next, the first stop button is operated at t9, the second stop button is operated at t10, and the third stop button is operated at t11.

Next, the game ends at t13. Next, when a betting operation for the next game is performed at t14, the display of the advance notice of the dialogue ends.

In this way, the display timing of the second effect type is made different between the first game and the second game of the continuous effect, but it may be displayed at the same timing.

Next, configurations applicable to this embodiment will be listed. Each configuration listed below is merely an example, and is not limited to the configuration listed below. In addition, it should be added that the configurations listed below can be appropriately combined as long as there is no contradiction in combining them with each other.
(Configuration 1)
In a first performance state, both the first performance type and the second performance type are configured to be executed, and in a certain second performance state, the first performance type is not executed and the second performance type is executed. Configure.

By constructing in this way, during the continuous performance, by generating only the notice that allows the player to instantaneously determine whether the chance is up, the player can concentrate on the continuous performance. can be executed.

Also, the notice that can be executed in a certain second effect state may be of a plurality of types, or may be of only one type.

For example, in a certain continuous effect, it may be configured such that a title notice and a dialogue notice can be executed.

Even if a plurality of types of the second effect type can be executed, the player can grasp the contents of the notice in a short time, so that the player does not feel troublesome. For example, a character name is displayed at the start of a certain continuous effect (battle effect) (there is an indication of the degree of expectation by color), and a dialogue announcement is executed during the certain continuous effect.

In addition, by allowing only a specific notice (for example, one kind of notice) to occur in a certain continuous effect, the continuous effect and the notice to be generated are clarified, and the player can distinguish between the continuous effect and the notice. Even if attention is paid to both sides, it is possible to easily grasp the aspect indicating the bonus or AT winning.

(Composition 1-1)
Furthermore, there are multiple types of second notices that can be executed in a certain second effect state,
It is configured so that a plurality of types of second notices can be executed in one second effect state,
There is only one type of second notice that can be executed in one game round.

Specifically, in one continuous effect, a plurality of types of second notices (eg, dialogue notice, title notice) are configured to be executed. It is configured so that two advance notices (for example, the first game is the title notice and the second game is the dialogue notice) can be executed.

In this way, during a certain continuous performance (certain second performance state), only one type of notice is executed in one game cycle, so that the notice display becomes complicated and the degree of expectation is prevented from being grasped. be able to.

(Composition 1-2)
Furthermore, if there are a plurality of types of advance notices that can be executed in a certain second effect state, the advance notice that does not require the player to operate the sub-buttons and the button advance notice that requires the player to operate the buttons may be provided. good. In addition, since the second effect state is closer to the bonus and AT winning than the first effect state (the state in which it is expected), the player is highly motivated to operate the sub-buttons. Therefore, in the second effect state, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of button announcements requiring operation of the sub-buttons rather than announcements not requiring operation of the sub-buttons.

(Composition 1-3)
The first effect type may not be executed in all the second effect states, and only the second effect type may be executed.

By constructing in this way, only the second performance in which the contents of the notice can be grasped in a short time is executed in all the second performance states, so that the user feels annoyance with the notice executed in the second performance state as a whole. There is no

In the case where a dialogue announcement is provided as the above-described second effect type, the dialogue announcement in the case where the second effect state is a continuous battle effect in which a friend character and an enemy character confront each other can be configured as follows.
1. Only the Lines of the Allied Character Can Be in the Second Display Mode In this case, since it is only necessary to pay attention to the lines of the allied character, it is easy to grasp the chance increase.
2. Only the words of the enemy character can be in the second display mode In this case, since it is only necessary to pay attention to the words of the enemy character, it is easy to grasp the chance increase.
3. The lines of both the ally character and the enemy character can be displayed in the second display mode. In this case, the timing at which the chance-up is displayed increases, so that the player can have a greater sense of anticipation.

(Configuration 2)
The number of characters used in one notice of the first performance type that can be executed in the first performance state and one notice of the second performance type that can be executed in the second performance state is different.

For example, the first notice of the first effect type in the first effect state is the step-up notice, and the one notice of the second effect type that can be executed in the second effect state is the dialogue notice. Configured to have different numbers of characters.

In the step-up notice, which is the first notice of the first effect type in the first effect state shown in FIG. 14, character A (step 1), character B (step 2), character C (step 3), character D (step 4) and five characters (step 5) are used.

Three types of characters, character A, character B, and character F, can be used in the dialogue announcement, which is one announcement of the second effect type in a certain second effect state (eg, continuous battle effect) shown in FIG.

In this way, in the advance notice of the first effect in the first effect state, by increasing the number of characters, the advance notice variations are increased so that the player does not get bored, and the advance notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state is increased. In the advance notice, only characters related to a certain second effect state (eg, continuous battle effect being executed) are used so that the player can easily grasp the flow of the second effect state.

In addition, since the first effect state is a state in which the user stays in the game for a long time, the frequency of occurrence of the step-up notice, which is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state, is the same as that in a certain second effect state. It is higher than the dialogue notice, which is the notice of 1 of 2 productions. Therefore, the number of characters used is increased as the frequency of occurrence of the notice is increased to enrich the notice variations.

The number of characters is
A step-up notice that is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state < a dialogue notice that is the first notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state, and
The step-up notice, which is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state, may be the dialogue notice, which is the first notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state.

(Composition 3)
The number of characters used in one announcement of the second performance type that can be executed in the first performance state and one announcement of the second performance type that can be executed in the second performance state is configured to be different.

For example, when the announcement of the second effect type 1 in the first effect state is a dialogue announcement, and the announcement of the second effect type 1 that can be executed in the second effect state is also a dialogue announcement, the character used for each numbers are configured differently.

As shown in FIG. 15, five types of characters, character A, character B, character C, character D, and character E, are used in the dialogue announcement, which is the first announcement of the second effect type in the first effect state.

Three types of characters, character A, character B, and character F, are used in the speech announcement, which is one announcement of the second production type in a certain second production state (eg, continuous battle production).

In this way, in the advance notice of the second effect 1 in the first effect state, the number of characters is increased so that the number of advance notice variations is increased so that the player does not get bored. In the advance notice, only characters related to a certain second effect state (eg, continuous battle effect being executed) are used so that the player can easily grasp the flow of the second effect state.

In addition, since the first effect state is a state in which the user stays in the game for a long time, the occurrence frequency of the dialogue notice, which is the first notice of the second effect in the first effect state, is the second in a certain second effect state. It is higher than the dialogue notice, which is the first notice of production. Therefore, the number of characters used is increased as the frequency of occurrence of the notice is increased to enrich the notice variations.

The number of characters is
It is also possible that the line notice that is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state < the line notice that is the first notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state,
It is also possible that the dialogue announcement that is the first announcement of the first rendering in the first rendering state=the dialogue announcement that is the first announcement of the second rendering in a certain second rendering state.

In addition, step-up notice that is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state, speech notice that is the first notice of the first effect in the first effect state, and one notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state. The number of characters used in the dialogue announcement may be set as follows.
1. Step-up notice that is 1 notice of the first effect in the first effect state > Dialogue notice that is 1 notice of the first effect in the first effect state > 1 notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state Line notice 2. Dialog notice that is 1 notice of the first effect in the first effect state > Step-up notice that is 1 notice of the first effect in the first effect state > 1 notice of the second effect in a certain second effect state Dialogue notice

In any of the above cases, the number of characters is larger in the one with the higher occurrence frequency of the advance notice.

(Composition 4)
A character used for advance notice of one of the first effect types that can be executed in the first effect state, and a character used for advance notice of one of the second effect types that can be executed in a certain second effect state, This is a configuration in which the same characters are used.

A character used in common for the dialogue announcement, which is the first announcement of the first effect in the first rendering state, and the dialogue announcement, which is the first announcement of the second effect in a certain second rendering state, is the main character.

In this way, the developer designs the game so that many main characters are displayed so that the story can be easily grasped, and the player can easily grasp the main characters and the relationships between the main characters according to the display frequency of the characters.

Therefore, the main character is a character that has a long display time (for example, it is easy to continue the continuous effect), has a high display frequency, and has a high degree of expectation.

However, since a high display frequency and a high expectation are contradictory, for example, in step-up notices and dialogue notices in the first effect state with a high notice frequency, the frequency of the main character is increased. It is appropriate to set it to step 1 or the like, and to use it as a character with a high degree of expectation in the second effect state.

As other characters, it is possible to provide a character that is a main character but is a rare character, has a short display time, has a low display frequency, and has a high degree of expectation. For example, when the character is displayed in the first presentation state and the second presentation state, the expectation of bonuses and AT wins is high.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the chances that the main characters are displayed, and furthermore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the degree of expectation for each character.

A character used for advance notice of one of the first effect types that can be executed in the first effect state and a character that is used for advance notice of one of the second effect types that can be executed in a certain second effect state. A character that is commonly used in a game does not have to be the main character. For example, it may be a rare character (high expectation) that is not a main character.

(Composition 5)
configured to output the voice of the character in one announcement (e.g., step-up announcement) of the first effect types that can be executed in the first effect state,
It is configured such that the voice of the character can be output even in one of the second presentation types that can be executed in the first presentation state (eg, speech announcement).

(Composition 5-1)
on the other hand,
In one of the second presentation types that can be executed in the second presentation state (eg, speech announcement), the voice of the character is not output.

By configuring in this manner, the sound of the character is output in the first effect state, so that it is easy to direct attention to the character's lines, while in the second effect state, BGM such as a continuous effect is output. Since it is desired to give a sense of anticipation to the fact that the continuous performance is being performed, it is possible to make it so that the voice of the character's dialogue is not so noticeable.

(Configuration 5 change example)
configured so that the voice of the character cannot be output in one announcement (eg step-up announcement) of the first effect types that can be executed in the first effect state,
It is configured so that the voice of the character cannot be output even in one of the second presentation types that can be executed in the first presentation state (eg, speech announcement).

In this way, in the first effect state, the sound of the character is configured not to be output. , The step-up notice and dialogue notice do not drown out the sound (sound effect) due to other notices.

(Composition 6)
One of the second presentation types that can be executed in a certain second presentation state is configured so as not to overlap with the volume adjustment display,
In a certain second performance state, the sound volume can be adjusted under any situation during the game stop or during the game, and even when the sound volume adjustment display is displayed, the performance display showing the certain second performance state. This is a configuration in which the brightness of the image does not decrease.

Specifically, when the player is configured to be able to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the sub-buttons, the cross button, etc., when the volume is adjusted or the amount of light is adjusted, the set The display device 32 displays a volume adjustment display indicating the volume status of the user and a light intensity adjustment display indicating the light intensity status.

In other words, it is a configuration in which the volume can be adjusted even in the second effect state, and when the dialog announcement, which is the second effect type, is displayed in a certain second effect state (a certain continuous effect), the volume adjustment display is It is configured to be displayed so as not to overlap.

Therefore, the player can clearly see both the advance notice of the dialogue and the volume adjustment display.

Furthermore, in a certain second effect state (a certain continuous effect), the volume adjustment display is displayed even though the volume can be adjusted both during the game stop (while the reels are stopped) and during the game (while the reels are rotating). Even in such a case, the brightness of the effect display (background image) in a certain second effect state (a certain continuous effect) does not decrease, so the image (movie) of a certain continuous effect remains easy to see. is.

(Configuration 6 change example 1)
One notice of the second effect types that can be executed in a certain second effect state is configured to overlap with the volume adjustment display,
In a certain second effect state, it is possible to adjust the sound volume under any situation during game stop or during the game, and even when the sound volume adjustment display is displayed, the display screen in the certain second effect state is changed. This is a configuration in which the brightness is not lowered.

In other words, the configuration is such that the volume can be adjusted even in the second effect state, and when the dialog announcement, which is the second effect type, is displayed in a certain second effect state (a certain continuous effect), the display overlaps with the volume adjustment display. It is configured to be displayed as

However, in a certain second effect state (a certain continuous effect), the volume adjustment display is displayed even though the volume can be adjusted both during the game stop (while the reels are stopped) and during the game (while the reels are rotating). Even in such a case, the brightness of the display screen (background image) in a certain second production state (a certain continuous production) does not decrease, so an image (movie) in a certain continuous production remains easy to see. is.

In addition, even if the dialogue notice is displayed while the volume adjustment display is displayed, even if the dialogue notice is displayed and the volume adjustment display is displayed, The volume adjustment display is displayed on the front side of the dialogue notice.

(Composition 6-1)
Volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment is possible both while the game is stopped and during the game,
The display position of the volume adjustment display or the light amount adjustment display does not change when the operation for adjusting the volume or the amount of light is performed while the game is stopped and when the operation for adjusting the volume or the amount of light is performed during the game.

In the normal game state, it is possible to adjust the volume or the amount of light regardless of whether the game is stopped or during the game. may be configured to

Also, during the bonus or AT, the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment is possible both during the game stop and during the game as in the normal game state, and the volume adjustment display or the light amount adjustment display may not change.

Furthermore, the volume adjustment display or the light amount adjustment display may differ between the normal game state and the bonus or AT mode.

(Composition 7)
Equipped with a third effect (effect by operating the sub-input button) that allows the player to operate the operation member,
In the third effect that can be executed in the first effect state (for example, the normal effect state), when the operation member is operated, a plurality of executions indicating a predetermined degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a minor role, the degree of expectation of a sign rush) Among the modes, the ratio of performances performed in a predetermined execution mode is configured to be high,
In the third effect that can be executed in the second effect state (for example, continuous effect), when the operation member is operated, the ratio of whether or not the special game (for example, bonus, AT) will be notified is configured to be high. ing.

In other words, in the button effect in the normal effect state, the pattern indicating the expected degree of entry into a winning combination or an omen in the game is likely to be executed, and the pattern indicating the winning of a bonus or AT is difficult to be executed. On the other hand, in the button performance during the continuous performance, the pattern indicating the winning of the bonus or AT is likely to be executed, and the pattern indicating the expected degree of entry into the winning combination or omen in the game is difficult to be executed.

In this way, it is possible to configure the ratio of the content suggested by the button effects to differ depending on the game situation (whether the game is in the first effect state or the second effect state). This makes it possible to make the content suggested by the button presentation suitable for the game situation.

(Configuration 7 change example)
Equipped with a third effect (effect by operating the sub-input button) that allows the player to operate the operation member,
In the third effect that can be executed in the second effect state (for example, continuous effect), when the operation member is operated, a plurality of execution modes indicating a predetermined degree of expectation (for example, degree of expectation for minor role, degree of expectation for portent entry). It is configured such that the ratio of the notification of whether or not a special game (for example, bonus, AT) will be performed is higher than the ratio of the effect performed in a predetermined execution mode.

In other words, in the button operation during the continuous production, the ratio of being informed whether or not the special game (for example, bonus, AT) is high, and the predetermined degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of the small role, the degree of expectation of the omen rush) It may be configured such that the proportion of the production performed in a predetermined execution mode among the plurality of execution modes shown is low.

This makes it possible to make the content suggested by the button presentation suitable for the game situation.

(Composition 8)
Equipped with at least a first game state (non-advantageous state) and a second game state (advantageous state),
It is configured such that the second performance state cannot occur in the second game state.

Specifically, during the AT (second game state), it is notified that a special game (bonus) will be performed instead of continuous performance (second performance state). In addition, the first game state is a non-advantageous state, and may be a normal game state or a non-advantageous section, and the second game state is an advantageous state, which may be an AT state or an advantageous section.

Since it is desired to obtain as many balls as possible in an advantageous state (during AT) in a short period of time, it is possible to execute the bonus immediately by adopting a configuration that does not include continuous effects in the advantageous state (during AT). can.

(Composition 9)
A second display device (e.g., a second liquid crystal display device) different from the first display device (e.g., a first liquid crystal display device),
A volume adjustment display is displayed on the second display device,
In the second effect state (during continuous effect) and while the reels are stopped, the volume can be adjusted,
It is configured such that the sound volume cannot be adjusted during the second effect state (during continuous effect) and while the reels are rotating.

In other words, a display device separate from the display device 32 where most of the production is performed is provided, and by displaying the volume adjustment display on the second display device, the volume adjustment display overlaps with the production displayed on the display device 32. Therefore, the visibility of the effect displayed on the display device 32 by the volume adjustment display is not lowered.

The second display device (a display device different from the display device 32) is a liquid crystal display device having a touch panel, and the volume may be adjusted by operating the touch panel. Moreover, not only volume control but also light amount control may be performed in the same way.

(Configuration 10)
Equipped with a first production state (a state in which continuous production etc. does not occur on a normal stage), a second production state (for example, continuous production) and a third production state (for example, omen),
After the first effect state, the third effect state can be executed over a plurality of variations, and then the second effect state can be obtained,
In the first effect state, the first effect type and the second effect type are configured to be executed,
In the second effect state, only the second effect type is configured to be executed,
moreover,
In the third effect state, both the first effect type and the second effect type are configured to be executed.

In other words, not only the first effect state, but also the third effect state (for example, the precursor state), the first effect type (for example, step-up notice) and the second effect type (for example, dialogue notice) are executed. configured to obtain

The effect contents of the first effect type and the second effect type that can be executed in the first effect state are different from the effect contents of the first effect type and the second effect type that can be executed in the third effect state. good too.

Omens are often not effects that notify whether or not a transition to an advantageous state (bonus or AT) is possible, so by making both the first and second effect types executable as in the normal state , the production variations can be enriched, and the expectation during the omen can be maintained.

(Composition 11)
In the case where the second presentation type is executed in the first presentation state, if the second display mode is not displayed, the rate of the third presentation state within a predetermined period and the predetermined rate when the second display mode is displayed The difference between the ratio of the third production state within the period,
In the case where the second effect type is executed in the second effect state, the ratio of becoming an advantageous state within a specific period when the second display mode is not displayed and the specific period when the second display mode is displayed The difference between the percentage of favorable conditions within
When the second performance type is executed in the second performance state, the rate of becoming an advantageous state within a specific period when the second display mode is not displayed and the specific period when the second display mode is displayed It is configured so that the difference from the ratio of being in an advantageous state within the time period becomes larger.

in short,
Within 32 G (within a predetermined period) without increasing the chance (when the second display mode is not displayed) when the dialogue notice (second effect type) is executed during the normal effect (first effect state) The difference between the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) and the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) within 32 G (within a predetermined period) after the chance is up (when the second display mode is displayed) is ,
Within 4G (within a specific period) without increasing the chance (when the second display mode is not displayed) when the dialogue notice (second effect type) is executed during the continuous effect (second effect state) Rate of bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) and rate of bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) within 4G (within a specific period) after the chance is up (when the second display mode is displayed) than the difference between
designed to be small.

(Composition 11-1)
moreover,
When the first effect type is executed in the first effect state, the ratio of the third effect state to the third effect state within a predetermined period when the second display mode is not displayed and the predetermined ratio when the second display mode is displayed The difference between the ratio of the third production state within the period,
In the case where the second presentation type is executed in the first presentation state, if the second display mode is not displayed, the rate of the third presentation state within a predetermined period and the predetermined rate when the second display mode is displayed Rather than the difference from the ratio of the third production state within the period,
designed to be small.

in short,
When the step-up notice (first effect type) is executed during the normal effect (first effect state), the chance is not increased by one step (when the second display mode is not displayed) within 32G (predetermined period (inside), and the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) within 32 G (within a predetermined period) by increasing the chance by one stage (when the second display mode is displayed). The difference from the ratio is
Within 32 G (within a predetermined period) without increasing the chance (when the second display mode is not displayed) when the dialogue notice (second effect type) is executed during the normal effect (first effect state) From the difference between the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) and the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) within 32 G (within a predetermined period) when the chance is up (when the second display mode is displayed) and,
designed to be small,
Within 32 G (within a predetermined period) without increasing the chance (when the second display mode is not displayed) when the dialogue notice (second effect type) is executed during the normal effect (first effect state) The difference between the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) and the rate of becoming an omen (third effect state) within 32 G (within a predetermined period) after the chance is up (when the second display mode is displayed) is ,
Within 4G (within a specific period) without increasing the chance (when the second display mode is not displayed) when the dialogue notice (second effect type) is executed during the continuous effect (second effect state) Rate of bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) and rate of bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) within 4G (within a specific period) when the chance is up (when the second display mode is displayed) than the difference between
designed to be small.

Expectations for step-up notice are 1 step < 2 steps < 3 steps < 4 steps < 5 steps, and expectations for dialogue notice are white < green < red < rainbow color, more concretely as shown in
<During normal production>
Step-up notice, 1st stage, rate of sign production within 32G: 1%
Step-up notice, 2 stages, rate of sign production within 32G: 2%
⇒ Difference: 1%
Dialogue notice, white, percentage of foreshadowing within 32G: 1%
Dialogue notice, green, percentage of foreshadowing within 32G: 5%
⇒ Difference: 4%
<Continuous production>
Dialogue notice, white, bonus rate within 4G: 5%
Dialogue notice, green, rate of bonus within 4G: 10%
⇒ Difference: 5%
It may be configured to be

In this way, even when the chance is increased by one stage in the display mode of the production, by configuring the ratio of the degree of expectation to be increased depending on the production state, the expectation for the chance to be increased by one level is enhanced. Players can enjoy themselves more.

(Configuration 11 change example)
The level of expectation for the step-up notice is 1 step < 2 steps < 3 steps < 4 steps < 5 steps, and the expectation level for the dialogue notice is white < green < red < rainbow color, If we show the difference between the second expectation from the bottom and the third expectation from the bottom,
<During normal production>
Step-up notice, 1st stage, rate of sign production within 32G: 1%
Step-up notice, 2 stages, rate of sign production within 32G: 2%
Step-up notice, 3 stages, percentage of sign production within 32G: 10%
⇒ Difference between SU2 and SU3: 8%
Dialogue notice, white, percentage of foreshadowing within 32G: 1%
Dialogue notice, green, percentage of foreshadowing within 32G: 5%
Dialogue notice, red, percentage of foreshadowing within 32G: 15%
⇒Difference between green and red: 10%
<Continuous production>
Dialogue notice, white, bonus rate within 4G: 5%
Dialogue notice, green, rate of bonus within 4G: 10%
Dialogue notice, red, bonus rate within 4G: 22%
⇒Difference between green and red: 12%
It may be configured to be

(Composition 12)
In the case where the announcement of one of the second effect types is executed in the second effect state (continuous effect),
It is configured such that once the certain notice becomes the second display mode, the certain notice will not change to the first display mode thereafter.

In other words, when the dialogue notice is displayed in red letters in the continuous effect, the dialogue notice is displayed in red letters without becoming white letters in the continuous effect.

For example, when red characters are displayed in the first game of the continuous effect, but white characters are displayed in the second game of the continuous effect, the player does not know whether the expectation level is high or low. There is a risk that it will be lost. Therefore, by uniformly showing the expectation level of the dialogue announcement during one continuous performance, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the expectation level.

(Configuration 12 change example)
In the case where the announcement of one of the second effect types is executed in the second effect state (continuous effect),
It is configured such that even if the certain notice becomes the second display mode, the certain notice can later become the first display mode.

In other words, even if the dialogue notice is displayed in red letters in the continuous effect, it may be displayed in white letters in the continuous effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the second display mode (eg, chance up: red letters) is displayed for each game.

It should be noted that if the second display mode (eg, chance up: red letters) can be displayed only at a predetermined timing (eg, the first game of the continuous performance) in the continuous performance, the notice The player can concentrate only on the predetermined timing, and can concentrate on the contents of the continuous performance in the other games.

(Composition 13)
One notice of the first effect type (for example, step-up notice) and one notice of the second effect type (for example, dialogue notice) that can be executed in the first production state are
The display is not canceled by operating a predetermined stop button (for example, the second stop button).

In other words, the step-up notice or dialogue notice started to be displayed by operating the start lever or operating the first stop button proceeds without being canceled when the second stop button is operated.

(Composition 14)
The display of the advance notice of the first type of effect or the advance notice of the second type of effect that can be executed in the first effect state is performed when the third stop button is operated, the start lever is operated, or the first stop is displayed. The display started by operating the button is canceled, and the display by operating the third stop button is started,
When it shifts to the game standby state, the standby screen is displayed,
The display caused by the operation of the third stop button is erased when a new bet operation or the start lever is operated (start of the next game) or when the standby screen is displayed.

(Composition 15)
In the second production state (continuous production), when the announcement of the second production type 1 is displayed,
Even when the 3rd stop button is operated, the display of the notice of 1 is not erased,
When it shifts to the game standby state, the standby screen is displayed,
The display of the notice 1 is configured to be erased when a new bet operation or start lever operation (start of the next game) is performed, or when the standby screen is displayed.

In this way, when the speech notice is displayed during the continuous performance, the third stop button is operated, and even if the speech notice is displayed to the end, the display itself is not erased and continues to be displayed. On the other hand, when there is a new bet operation or operation of the start lever, or when the screen shifts to the standby screen, the display of the advance notice of the dialog is erased. Moreover, the display of the continuous effect is also erased.

(Composition 16)
a first notice display start timing when a game is started in the first effect state and the display of the notice of one of the first effect types is started;
The second notice display start timing when the game is started in the first effect state and the display of the notice of one of the second effect types is started,
It is configured to be approximately the same (eg, within 1 second).

In other words, during normal production (first production state), the step-up notice (1st notice of the first production type) starts about 1 second after the start lever is operated, and the dialogue notice (1st production type) 1 notice) is also configured to start in about one second from the operation of the start lever.

Note that the timing for starting the first advance notice display and the timing for starting the second notice display are not substantially the same, and may be different. The display start timing may be configured to be earlier.

Note that both the step-up notice (one notice of the first effect type) and the dialogue notice (one notice of the second effect type) do not necessarily have to be displayed in one game.

(Composition 17)
A first notice display start timing when a game is started in a first effect state and display of an advance notice of one of the first effect types or an advance notice of one of the second effect types is started;
The second notice display start timing when the game is started in the second effect state and the display of the notice of one of the second effect types is started,
It is configured to be approximately the same (eg, within 1 second).

In other words, during normal production (first production state), step-up notice (1 of the 1st production types) and dialogue notice (1 of the 2nd production types) are displayed in about 1 second after the start lever is operated. The advance notice) is started, and even during the continuous production (second production state), the dialogue advance notice (announcement of one of the second production types) is started in about one second from the operation of the start lever. there is

Note that the timing for starting the first advance notice display and the timing for starting the second notice display are not substantially the same, and may be different. The display start timing may be configured to be earlier.

(Composition 18)
It has a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (during AT),
In the second game state,
While the first effect type and the second effect type can occur in the first effect state,
In the second effect state, only the second effect type can occur.

That is, during AT (second game state), in the state where continuous effects etc. do not occur (first effect state), step-up notice etc. (first effect type) and dialogue notice etc. (second effect type) However, during the continuous effect (second effect state), the step-up notice, etc. (first effect type) is not executed, and the dialogue notice, etc. (second effect type) can be executed.

(Composition 18-1)
It has a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (during AT),
In either the first game state or the second game state,
While the first effect type and the second effect type can occur in the first effect state,
In the second effect state, only the second effect type can occur.

That is, in either the normal game state (first game state) or during AT (second game state), in the state where continuous effects etc. do not occur (first effect state), step-up notice etc. (second 1 production type) and dialogue notice etc. (second production type) can be executed, but during continuous production (second production state), step-up notice etc. (first production type) is not executed and dialogue notice etc. ( second effect type) can be executed.

(Composition 19)
Equipped with a third effect (for example, button effect) that allows the player to operate the operation member,
There are cases where the third effect is not executed and the second effect state (for example, continuous effect) is entered, and where the third effect is executed and the second effect state is entered.
When the third effect is executed and the second effect state is entered, the first notice of the second effect type in the second effect state ( It is configured so that the ratio of the dialogue advance notice) to be displayed in the second display mode (for example, green characters, red characters) is high.

In other words, when there is a button effect that allows the player to operate the button, and the player shifts to the continuous effect without the button effect, it is better to switch to the continuous effect with the button effect. It is configured so that the percentage displayed in red serifs is high.

By configuring in this way, attention is paid to whether or not there is a button effect before developing to the second effect state (continuous effect).

(Configuration 20)
When a predetermined error (for example, door open error) occurs, an error display indicating the occurrence of the error is performed on the display device (for example, liquid crystal display device),
The error display is configured so as not to overlap with one notice of the first effect type (for example, step-up notice).

It should be noted that the error display may overlap with one notice of the first effect type (for example, step-up notice).

In addition, the error display may overlap with one announcement (for example, dialogue announcement) of the second effect type that can be executed in the first effect state (state where continuous effects etc. are not occurring in the normal stage). It may be configured so as not to overlap with one announcement (for example, dialogue announcement) of the second effect type that can be executed in the second effect state (during continuous effect).

(Composition 21)
It is configured so that the sound is output in one notice of the second effect type (for example, a dialogue notice),
When a predetermined error (for example, door open error) occurs, an error sound indicating the occurrence of the error is output,
While the error sound is being output, the sound of the second presentation type 1 announcement (for example, speech announcement) is configured not to be output or to be output at a volume of 0. - 特許庁

(Configuration 21 change example)
It is configured such that a sound is output in one announcement of the first effect type (for example, a step-up announcement),
When a predetermined error (for example, door open error) occurs, an error sound indicating the occurrence of the error is output,
While the error sound is being output, the sound of the first presentation type 1 notice (for example, the step-up notice) is configured not to be output or to be output at a volume of 0. - 特許庁

In this way, when the error sound overlaps with the announcement sound, the player or the hall clerk can easily make the error sound.

(Composition 22)
The type of display mode of the notice with the first performance type that can be executed in the first performance state and the type of display mode of the notice with the second performance type that can be executed in the third performance state are configured to be different. .

Specifically, the display mode of the step-up notice (notice with the first effect type) that can be executed in the state where continuous effects etc. are not occurring in the normal stage (first effect state) In order, it can be displayed in four patterns of blue<yellow<green<red, but display of an accessory notice (announcement with a second effect type) that can change the color of the accessory that can be executed during the sign (third effect state) The mode is configured so that it can be displayed in 7 patterns of white<blue<yellow<green<orange<red<purple in order from the least expected.

In addition, in the state where the continuous effect etc. does not occur in the normal stage (first effect state), the small notice etc. (notice with the second effect type) can be executed in the state where the continuous effect etc. Four patterns of blue<yellow<green<red may be provided in the same manner as the display mode of the step-up notice (prediction with the first effect type) that can be executed in the (first effect state).

In this way, by providing different display patterns depending on the presentation state, it is possible to easily keep the player's interest during the chance during the sign.

<Specification 1 of gaming machine in this embodiment>
As specification 1 (hereinafter referred to as specification 1) of the game machine in this embodiment, the reel arrangement is as shown in FIG. The first reel in FIG. 20 corresponds to the left reel 8a, the second reel to the middle reel 8b, and the third reel to the right reel 8c. As shown in FIG. 20, the symbols drawn on the reel of specification 1 are "red seven", "bar", "moon A", "moon B", "replay", "cherry", "camel", " There are 10 types of "Blank A", "Blank B", and "Blank C".

From the display window of specification 1, 9 patterns of 3 vertical × 3 horizontal are visible, and the effective line is the upper row for the left reel 8a, the middle row for the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c. It is in the middle stage and has one line of bending.

Figures 21 to 24 show the combination of symbols. When the specified number is 3, the specified number is when the CB is not operating, and when the specified number is 2, the specified number is when the CB is operating. is a number. 21 to 24, ``2 types of BB'' in the column of ``winning symbols/operating symbols/pattern symbol names'' refers to MB, ``replay'' refers to replay, and ``winning'' means It's about playing a minor role.

FIG. 25 is a condition device list table for bonuses. For example, the bonus condition device number "1" condition device "2 types BB-A condition device" is composed of the component "2 types BB01", and "2 types BB01" is the "winning pattern/operation It corresponds to "two types of BB01 operation patterns" in "symbol/pattern symbol name", more specifically "Moon A-Replay-Red Seven", "Moon A-Replay-Bar", "Moon A-Replay- Six symbol combinations of "Monthly B-Replay-Red Seven", "Monthly B-Replay-Bar", and "Monthly B-Replay-Camel" correspond.

26 to 28 are condition device lists for winning or replaying. The item of "winning replay" describes the conditional device number, the item of "conditional device" describes the name of the conditional device, and the item of "common name" describes the common name of the conditional device. The "component" item describes the symbol combinations that make up the condition device, and the "control-related" item describes the order of stop operations for each game state and the winning symbol combinations.

For example, the condition device "Replay-A condition device" with the condition device number "1" is composed of the constituent elements "Replay 01, 05 to 06", and "Replay 01" is the "winning pattern・It corresponds to "replay 01 operation symbol" in "operation symbol/pattern symbol name", more specifically, two symbol combinations of "month A-replay-replay" and "month B-replay-replay". is supported. In addition, "replay 05" corresponds to "replay 05 operation symbol" in "winning symbol/operation symbol/pattern symbol name" in FIG. ” corresponds to one symbol combination. Further, "replay 06" corresponds to "replay 06 operation symbol" in "winning symbol/operation symbol/pattern symbol name" in FIG. 21, more specifically "replay-bar-red seven". , “Replay-Blank A-Red Seven”, and “Replay-Blank B-Red Seven”. Further, when the stop switch other than the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c is first stopped, the replay 01 is stopped and displayed, and when the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c is first stopped, the stop acceptance position is reached. It is described that any one of replay 01, replay 05, and replay 06 is stop-displayed according to .

Also, for example, the condition device "winning-A9 condition device" with the condition device number "15" is composed of the constituent elements "winning 03-04, 07-08, 11-12, 15-16, 19, 56" , "winning 03" corresponds to "winning 03 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. B-camel-replay' two symbol combinations correspond. Also, "winning 04" corresponds to "winning 04 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month A-bar-Month A". Also, "winning 04" corresponds to "winning 04 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month A-bar-Month A". Also, "winning 07" corresponds to "winning 07 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. 22, more specifically "month A-blank A-month B". , "Month A-Blank B-Month B". Also, "winning 08" corresponds to "winning 08 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month B-Bar-Month A". Also, "winning 11" corresponds to "winning 11 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. 22, more specifically "month B-blank A-month B" , "Month B-Blank B-Month B". Also, "winning 12" corresponds to "winning 12 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Moon A-Bar-Blank C" correspond. Also, "winning 15" corresponds to "winning 15 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month A-Blank B-Blank A". Also, "winning 16" corresponds to "winning 16 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month B-Bar-Blank C" are corresponding. Also, "winning 19" corresponds to "winning 19 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. , "Month B-Blank B-Blank A". Also, "winning 56" corresponds to "winning 56 winning design" in "winning design/operation design/pattern design name" in FIG. The two symbol combinations "Cherry-Replay-Replay" correspond. Furthermore, the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c is first stopped, the left stop switch 13a corresponding to the left reel 8a is stopped second, and the middle stop switch 13b corresponding to the middle reel 8b is third. , the winning 03 is stopped and displayed, the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c is first stopped, the middle stop switch 13b corresponding to the middle reel 8b is secondly stopped, and the left reel When the left stop switch 13a corresponding to 8a is stopped thirdly, the win 56 is stopped and displayed. 08 or 11 is displayed in a stopped state, and it is described that a small winning combination is lost at 1/2. In other words, when the stop receiving position of each reel is set at random (so-called appropriate hitting or free hitting), the stop corresponding to the pressing timing of the third operated stop switch. A combination of symbols corresponding to any of winning 04, 07, 08 or 11 is stopped and displayed according to the reception position with a probability of 1/2, and a small winning combination is won. It is described that the symbol combinations corresponding to any of the constituent elements of the "conditional device" are not stopped and displayed, and that small wins are missed.

29 to 31 are internal lottery data in the non-RT state. "R1" to "R6" in the figure correspond to "set value 1" to "set value 6", respectively. Also, for example, there is a numerical value "3240" at the position corresponding to the second type BB-A in R1 in FIG. Therefore, the winning probability of the two types of BB-A in R1 is 3240/65536. 29 to 31 are the internal lottery data divided for each conditional device, so even if the numbers from "Type 2 BB-A" to "Winning Q" are added, 65536 will not be obtained. This is because "2 types BB-A" to "2 types BB-I" overlap with other condition devices. It should be noted that the sum of "64788", which is the total number of entries from "Replay-A" to "Winning Q", and "748", which is the number of entries of "lost" (not shown), gives "65536". Become.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing RT start conditions and end conditions. For example, after RWM initialization, it shifts to the "non-RT" state, and in the "non-RT" state, shifts to RT1 when "2 types of BB-A condition device" to "2 types of BB-E condition device" are activated It is stated that In other words, if any one of 2 types BB-A, 2 types BB-B, 2 types BB-C, 2 types BB-D, and 2 types BB-E wins during non-RT, it shifts to RT1.

When 2 types of BB-A to F operating symbols are displayed, the 2 types of BB-A to F are completed by paying out more than 11 cards, and the game shifts to the non-RT state. Also, when the operating pattern of the 2nd type BB-G is displayed, the 2nd type BB-G is completed by paying out more than 7 cards, and the state shifts to the non-RT state. In addition, when the 2 types of BB-H and I operating symbols are displayed, the 2 types of BB-H and I are terminated by paying out more than one, and the state shifts to the non-RT state. In addition, two types of BB-A to I have PB=1 hand, and can be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop timing.

In specification 1, as shown in FIG. 29, the number of non-RT wins for 2 types of BB is 36620, and the number of non-RT staying games is about 2 games on average. Among the two types of BBs, the winning number of the two types of BB-A to E that move to RT1 is 17820, and the possibility of staying at RT1 is high.

33 and 32 are internal lottery data in the RT1 state. Description of each item is omitted because it is similar to that of FIGS.

The transition of the main game state of Specification 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

After the RWM is initialized, the main game state number is changed to 0. Main game state = 0 corresponds to the normal section, and when winning the advantageous section transition lottery, main game state number = 1, main game state number = 2, main game state number = 3, or main game state Go to any of number=4.

Main game state number = 1 is, in specification 1, AC, which is an AT state that notifies the player of an advantageous operation mode when the bell is hit in the pressing order, SAC, which is an AT state different from AC, or AC and SAC This is a premonitory state that produces a sense of anticipation as to whether or not to shift to BB (so-called sub-bonus), which is a different AT state. When main game state number = 1, transition to a predetermined transition destination (main game state = 0, main game state number = 2, main game state number = 3, or main game state number = 5) do.

Main game state number=2 is a game state corresponding to AC. In AC, when winning A1-A12, winning B1-B12, winning C1-C12, winning D1-D12, winning E1-E12, and winning F1-F12, which are the pressing order bell group, are won, the player is notified of the pressing order advantageous to the player. It is in a play state to play. AC is managed by the number of games, and 30 is set in the AC gaming counter as the initial number of games. Then, when the value of the AC game counter becomes 0, the main game state = 1, the main game state number = 3, or the main game state number = 5 according to the game state lottery result during AC. to any of the It should be noted that during AC, the value of the AC game counter may be increased according to the result of the internal lottery (so-called addition of the number of games).

Main game state number=3 is a game state corresponding to SAC. In the SAC, similarly to the AC, if the bell groups of the order of pressing the bells (A1 to A12, B1 to B12, C1 to C12, D1 to D12, E1 to E12, and F1 to F12) are won, it is advantageous to the player. It is in a game state in which the pressing order is notified. The SAC is managed by the number of games, and as the initial number of games, the value won in the AC game counter set lottery is set in the AC game counter. Then, when the value of the AC game counter becomes 0, the main game state is 1, the main game state number is 2, or the main game state number is 5 according to the game state lottery result during the SAC. to any of the During the SAC, the value of the AC game counter may be increased according to the result of the internal lottery (so-called addition of the number of games). Also, in the AC gaming counter set lottery, since there is a high possibility that a value of 30 or more will be won as an expected value, SAC can be said to be in a more advantageous state than AC.

Main game state number=4 is a game state corresponding to BB (so-called sub-bonus). In BB, similarly to AC and SAC, when winning A1 to A12, winning B1 to B12, winning C1 to C12, winning D1 to D12, winning E1 to E12, and winning F1 to F12, which are the pressing order bell group, are won, the player It is in a game state in which the pressing order that is advantageous to the player is notified. The BB is managed by the payout number, and 100 is set in the BB number counter as the initial number. As a result of the game, the number of payouts is subtracted for each winning, and when the value of the BB number counter becomes 0, the main game state=0 and the main game state number=2 according to the game state lottery result during the BB. , or main game state number=3. During the BB, the value of the BB number counter may increase according to the result of the internal lottery (so-called number addition).

Main game state number=5 is a game state corresponding to the ending. In the ending, like AC, SAC, and BB, if the winning order of the bell group, winning A1-A12, winning B1-B12, winning C1-C12, winning D1-D12, winning E1-E12, and winning F1-F12 is won. The game state is such that the player is notified of the pressing order that is advantageous to the player. The ending shifts when either the MY counter is 2200 or the advantageous section clear counter is 50, and continues until the MY counter is 2400 or more or the advantageous section clear counter reaches 0. Then, when the MY counter is 2400 or more, or when the advantageous section clear counter is 0, the main game state is changed to 0.

Main game state number=6 is a game state corresponding to the confirmation screen. On the confirmation screen, when winning A1 to A12, winning B1 to B12, winning C1 to C12, winning D1 to D12, winning E1 to E12, and winning F1 to F12, which are the pressing order bell group, are won, the pressing order advantageous to the player is set. It is in a game state in which there is a case where notification is made and a case where notification is not made. This is because when the determination flag is 0 on the confirmation screen, winning A1-A12, winning B1-B12, winning C1-C12, winning D1-D12, winning E1-E12, and winning F1-F12 are advantageous to the player. When the pressing order is notified and the judgment flag is 1 on the confirmation screen, even if winning prizes A1 to A12, winning prizes B1 to B12, winning prizes C1 to C12, winning prizes D1 to D12, winning prizes E1 to E12, and winning prizes F1 to F12 are won. This means that the pressing order that is advantageous to the player is not notified. Further, since BB starts after the confirmation screen ends, 1 is stored in the BB flag on the confirmation screen.

On the confirmation screen, when one of replay-A to F is won, the liquid crystal displays "Aim for the red seven from the right", the instruction monitor displays "7", and the first stop is made on the right reel 8c. Red Seven symbol (No. 4 on the 3rd reel in FIG. 20), Red Seven symbol on the middle reel 8b for the 2nd stop (No. 4 on the 2nd reel in FIG. 20), Red Seven on the left reel 8a for the 3rd stop It is notified that the symbol (number 4 of the first reel in FIG. 20) is aimed at and operated. Replay-When any one of A to F is won, if the operation is performed as instructed, the replay 05 operating symbol (No. 45 in FIG. 21) is displayed on the active line and the red seven symbol is aligned in the middle row. It will be stopped and displayed. Then, when the replay 05 operation symbol is stopped and displayed, 0 is stored in the determination flag, 0 is stored in the BB flag, and 4 is stored in the main game state number. In addition, 0 is stored as the initial value of the judgment flag, and when one of the replay-A to F is won for the first time on the confirmation screen, and the stop operation is performed as instructed, the replay 05 operation symbol is stopped and displayed. However, since 0 is stored in the determination flag, the determination flag will not become 1 when the stop operation is performed as instructed.

In addition, when any one of replay-A to F is won on the confirmation screen, the liquid crystal displays "Aim for the red seven from the right", and when the instruction monitor displays "7", the player If you do not perform the stop operation as instructed (if you do not perform the stop operation as instructed in the push order, or if you do not aim for the red seven symbol even though you performed the stop operation as instructed in the push order), the replay 05 operation symbol does not stop and stores 1 in the determination flag.

When 1 is stored in the judgment flag (when the player does not perform the stop operation as instructed), the main game state number remains at 6 (confirmation screen), and the main game state number = 4 (BB). does not migrate. Therefore, the main game state number=6 (confirmation screen) is maintained until one of the replay-A to F wins again and the replay 05 operation symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, even after the second time on the confirmation screen, when any of the replays A to F wins, the liquid crystal will display "Aim for the red seven from the right" and the instruction monitor will display "7". ing.

By constructing in this way, BB can be started according to the player's eye-pushing skill, so that it is possible to provide the game property of making the player aim at the BB pattern after the BB is won.

Furthermore, while 1 is stored in the determination flag, winnings A1-A12, winnings B1-B12, winnings C1-C12, winnings D1-D12, winnings E1-E12, and winnings F1-F12, which are the pressing order bell group, are won. Since an advantageous operation mode is not notified even if the player wins, the player can obtain a high minor winning combination only with a probability of 1/6. Therefore, when comparing the case where 1 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen and the case where 0 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen, the case where 1 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen This state is disadvantageous to the player. Note that the push order navigation rate when winning the push order bell group may be less than 100%, and the push order navigation rate need not be 0%. For example, the pushing order navigation rate may be set such that the ball output rate is 100% (maintaining the current state).

By configuring in this way, when the replay-A to F is won on the confirmation screen, it is possible to generate an advantage or disadvantage after that according to the skill of the player, and to improve the interest of the game by eye pressing. It becomes possible.

In addition, the game state (main game state number = 4 (BB)) after the replay 05 operation pattern is displayed when any of replay-A to F wins for the first time on the confirmation screen, and replay on the confirmation screen If you compare the game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the re-game 05 operation pattern is not displayed when any of game-A to F is won for the first time, you can re-start on the confirmation screen. The game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the replay 05 operation pattern is not displayed when any of game-A to F is won for the first time is the winning order bell group. Even if winning prizes A1 to A12, prizes B1 to B12, prizes C1 to C12, prizes D1 to D12, prizes E1 to E12, and prizes F1 to F12 are won, an advantageous operation mode is not notified, so it can be said that the player is in a disadvantageous state. . It should be noted that the pushing order navigation rate need not be 0% because the pushing order navigation rate when winning the pushing order bell group should be less than 100%.

By configuring in this way, when the replay-A to F is won on the confirmation screen, it is possible to generate an advantage or disadvantage after that according to the skill of the player, and to improve the interest of the game by eye pressing. It becomes possible.

Also, while 1 is stored in the determination flag, the winning order bell group of winning A1-A12, winning B1-B12, winning C1-C12, winning D1-D12, winning E1-E12, and winning F1-F12 are displayed. If you win, you will be notified of an advantageous operation mode. , set stock lottery, loop rate lottery, or lottery with added number of games, etc.) may be set at the lowest level to give the lowest advantage during the BB. The lottery level differs in the probability that a result favorable to the player will occur when a predetermined lottery is executed. It is low. Also, while 0 is stored in the determination flag at this time, the winning order bell group is winning A1-A12, winning B1-B12, winning C1-C12, winning D1-D12, winning E1-E12, winning F1-F12. When is won, an advantageous operation mode is notified, and the predetermined lottery level of the executable lottery is not disfavored during the BB which starts after the replay-A to F wins and the replay 05 operation pattern is stopped and displayed. (Deliberately not set the lowest level lottery level). Therefore, when comparing the case where 1 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen and the case where 0 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen, the case where 1 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen This state is disadvantageous to the player.

In this case, even if the wins A1 to A12, the wins B1 to B12, the wins C1 to C12, the wins D1 to D12, the wins E1 to E12, and the wins F1 to F12, which are the pressing order bell group, win may not be notified. In addition, when the pressing order bell group is won in a situation where 0 is stored in the determination flag on the confirmation screen, an advantageous operation mode is notified, and then even in a situation where 1 is stored in the determination flag, the pressing order bell group is displayed. If an advantageous operation mode is notified when winning a prize, there is a possibility that the player will intentionally prolong the confirmation screen and obtain the push order bell. An advantageous operation mode is notified when the order bell group wins, but an advantageous operation mode is not reported when the order bell group wins regardless of the determination flag after 11 games from the start of the confirmation screen. good too. As a guideline for these 10 games, the probability that any of the replays A to F wins at least once is set at about 80%, but it can be set arbitrarily as long as it is not too long.

By configuring in this way, when the replay-A to F is won on the confirmation screen, it is possible to generate an advantage or disadvantage after that according to the skill of the player, and to improve the interest of the game by eye pressing. It becomes possible.

In addition, the game state (main game state number = 4 (BB)) after the replay 05 operation pattern is displayed when any of replay-A to F wins for the first time on the confirmation screen, and replay on the confirmation screen If you compare the game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the re-game 05 operation pattern is not displayed when any of game-A to F is won for the first time, you can re-start on the confirmation screen. The game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the replay 05 operation pattern is not displayed when any of game-A to F is won for the first time is replay-A. ~ F wins and replay 05 Predetermined lottery that can be executed during the BB that starts after the operation pattern is stopped and displayed (push order navigation rate lottery, set stock lottery, loop rate lottery, or games such as game number addition lottery It is also possible to set the lottery level of the lottery advantageous to the player to the lowest level so that the advantage in the BB is the lowest. In this case, the game state after the replay 05 operation pattern is not displayed when any of replay-A to F is won for the first time on the confirmation screen is any of regame-A to F on the confirmation screen. It can be said that this state is more disadvantageous to the player than the game state after the replay 05 operation pattern is displayed when Ka wins for the first time. Also in this mode, when the pressing order bell group wins, the player may or may not be notified of an operation mode advantageous to the player. Further, even when an advantageous operation mode is notified, the notification may be terminated after about 10 games.

By configuring in this way, when the replay-A to F is won on the confirmation screen, it is possible to generate an advantage or disadvantage after that according to the skill of the player, and to improve the interest of the game by eye pressing. It becomes possible.

In addition, none of the replay-A to F triggers the shift to RT, and the lottery result (winning result) is a conditional device that cannot be carried over to the next game or later, and the replay 05 operation pattern is stopped and displayed. (In other words, the RT state is maintained even when the replay 05 operation pattern is stopped and displayed, so the operation probability (winning probability) related to the replay also increases. The operation probability related to winning prizes such as A1 to A12 does not change). In addition, the conditional device in which the red sevens are displayed in a straight line is not limited to replaying, but may be a conditional device related to winning. =1 conditional devices are suitable. In addition, the number of payouts in the case of displaying red sevens in a straight line in the condition device related to winning is as small as possible, and one sheet is suitable. This is because if you do not set the conditions for the red sevens to be aligned in a straight line, you will not be able to align the red sevens on the confirmation screen unless the device is set to a number that is realistically easy to win. This is because unnecessary payouts occur even when it is not desired to align the balls in a straight line, and the degree of freedom in putting out balls is restricted.

By configuring in this way, advantages and disadvantages can be generated according to the skill of the player without using a bonus condition device or a condition device for RT transition opportunity, so that the game can be played without changing the game state. It is possible to improve the quality. In particular, in the specifications for playing the game within the bonus, it is not possible to use the bonus condition device or the RT transition trigger condition device, so it is possible to provide a new game property by eye pressing.

In addition, when any of replay-A to F is won, the replay 05 operation pattern that can be stopped and displayed must first stop the right reel (stop operation in the order of right, middle, left, or right, left, middle) The operation mode for stopping the right reel first is the left-center-right operation order, the left-right middle operation order, the middle-left-right operation order, the middle-right-left operation order, the right-left operation order, and the right-left operation order. Among the six types of operation order, the middle operation order and the right, middle, and left operation orders, this is the operation order in which the normal base is the lowest.

Here, the normal base is the expected value of the number of payouts for the prescribed number of 3 (the number of inputs of 3). According to FIGS. 26 to 28 and FIGS. 33 to 35, as the expected value of the number of payouts in the prescribed number 3 of the left, middle, right operation order in RT1 of setting 1, for example, the expected number of 2 types of BB-A (operation pattern Since the number of payouts at the time of display) is 0 and the number of entries is 0, the expected value is 0, and the expected number of replay-A is 3 (replay is the prescribed number of 3, so the number of payouts is calculated as 3). , the number is 864, so the expected value is 0.03955, and the expected number of prize-A1 is 12 (because left, middle, right is the correct order), and the number is 900, so the expected value is 0.03955. 16479, and since the expected number of pieces to be lost is 0 and the set number is 452, the expected value is 0. The expected value of each conditional device is calculated by such a calculation, and the expected value of all the conditional devices is added up to 1.66857. It is derived that the expected value of the number of payouts in the prescribed number 3 of the order is 0.55619 (however, the expected value is calculated by obtaining 2 coins for Winning-G and obtaining 1 coin for Winning-M).

In addition, the expected value of the number of payouts in the specified number 3 of the operation order of left, right, middle, middle, right, left, or the operation order of middle, right, left in RT1 of setting 1 is the regulation of the operation order of left, middle, right in RT1 of setting 1 It is the same as the expected value of the number of payouts in Expression 3, which is 0.55619.

Also, as the expected value of the number of payouts in the prescribed number 3 of the operation order of right, left, and middle in RT1 of setting 1, for example, the expected number of 2 types BB-A (the number of payouts when displaying the operating pattern) is 0, and the number is 0 Therefore, the expected value is 0, the expected number of replay-A is 3 (the number of payouts is calculated as 3 because the replay is the specified number of 3), and the number of entries is 864, so the expected value is 0 03955, and the expected number of prize-A1 is 0.5 (left, middle, right is the order of pushing incorrect answers, and one is obtained in 1/2), and the number is 900, so the expected value is 0.5. 00686, the expected number of prize-A11 is 1 (because one is obtained in the right middle left), the number is 900, the expected value is 0.01373, the expected number of losers is 0, and the number is 452 Therefore, the expected value is 0. The expected value of each conditional device is calculated by such a calculation, and the expected value of all the conditional devices is added up to 1.69375. It is derived that the expected value of the number of payouts in the prescribed number 3 of the order is 0.56458 (however, the expected value is calculated by obtaining 2 coins for Winning-G and obtaining 1 coin for Winning-M).

In addition, the expected value of the number of payouts in the specified number 3 of the operation order of right, middle, left in RT1 of setting 1 is the same as the expected value of the number of payouts in the specified number of 3 of the operation order of right, left, middle in RT1 of setting 1, 0.56458.

In this way, the operation order that stops the right reel first (right-left-center, right-center-left) is usually based on the normal operation order (left-center-right, left-right-center, middle-left, middle-right-left). base is high. Then, in the operation order for stopping the right reel first, the degree of expectation for winning AT is made lower than in the other operation orders, thereby lowering the overall ball payout rate than in the other operation orders. As described above, although the operation order for stopping the right reel first is usually higher than the other operation orders, the result is a disadvantageous operation order, so that the player usually stops the right reel. It is in a situation where it is difficult to operate in the operation order to stop first. In other words, the operation order for stopping the right reel first is the penalty push order, and the player is notified in advance so as not to operate it. With such a configuration, by lowering the possibility that the player operates in the operation order to stop the right reel first, the replay 05 operation pattern is less likely to be displayed even if replay-A to F are won during normal times. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from creating excessive expectations due to the red seven patterns which are not intended in terms of specifications.

<Description of Test Signal Output According to the Present Invention>
The gaming machine of the present invention executes an internal lottery process upon reception of an operation of the start switch 12 for a gaming machine test, and executes a process for outputting a test signal before executing the spinning start process.

The gaming machine sends a first test signal (also referred to as an IF2 test signal) that instructs the player to make the best shot, and a second test signal (IF3) that instructs the player to make the best shot for the normal base. (also called a test signal), and processing for outputting each of them.

As processing for outputting the IF2 test signal, data (operation order, left reel 8a stop reception position, middle reel 8b stop reception position, right Set the reel 8c (stop reception position). For example, if the prize-G condition device shown in FIG. Since 2 payouts cannot be accepted and only 1 payout is given, the content instructed by the IF2 test signal is that the pressing order is random, the left reel 8a is stopped at the 3rd symbol, and the middle reel 8b is the 10th symbol. , and the right reel 8c is stopped at the 2nd pattern. When operated in accordance with this instruction, the symbol combination "replay"-"cherry"-"red seven" (see FIG. 24) of winning prize 63 is stopped and displayed, and it becomes possible to receive a payout in a two-card combination.

The table data stored in the ROM are, for example, "00H" which is the pushing order information stored in the ROM address "2C60H", and the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a stored in the ROM address "2C61H". "03H", "0AH" which is the stop accepting position of the middle reel 8b stored in the ROM address "2C62H", and "02H" which is the stop accepting position of the right reel 8c stored in the ROM address "2C63H" , and each piece of information is acquired from the table data as processing for outputting the IF2 test signal.

Also, for example, if the prize-A1 condition device in FIG. 26 is won in the AT state (when the instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor), the small combination acquisition rate does not change regardless of the position of the stop reception position, but the pressing order is left. If it is not operated in the order of middle and right, 12 payouts cannot be received and 1 payout or no payout will occur. The stop reception position of the reel 8a is random, the stop reception position of the middle reel 8b is random, and the stop reception position of the right reel 8c is random. When operated according to this instruction, the symbol combination "Moon A"-"Camel"-"Replay" or "Month B"-"Camel"-"Replay" (see FIG. 22) of winning prize 03 is stopped and displayed 12. It is possible to receive the payout of the winning combination. In addition, when the win-A1 condition device in the non-AT state is won, the pressing order and the stop acceptance position are random, and the IF2 test signal is output.

The table data stored in the ROM are, for example, "01H" which is the pushing order information stored in the ROM address "2C64H", and the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a stored in the ROM address "2C65H". , "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the middle reel 8b stored in the ROM address "2C66H", and "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the right reel 8c stored in the ROM address "2C67H". , and each piece of information is acquired from the table data as processing for outputting the IF2 test signal. "7FH" is data stored when the stop reception position is irrelevant, and may be any value (14H) that is greater than or equal to the number of symbols.

Subsequently, as processing for outputting the IF3 test signal, data output from the table data stored in the ROM according to the result of the internal lottery processing (operation order, left reel 8a stop acceptance position, middle reel 8b stop acceptance position, right reel 8c stop acceptance position). For example, in the specification 1 described above, since the operation order other than the operation order to stop the right reel 8c first is the lowest base at normal times, the content instructed as the IF3 test signal is the order of pushing left, middle, right, and so on. The stop reception position of the left reel 8a is random, the stop reception position of the middle reel 8b is random, and the stop reception position of the right reel 8c is random. If operated according to this instruction, the normal base will be stopped in the lowest pressing order, and the stop reception position will be random, so it is necessary to press when the device is won. There will be a case of winning, a case of obtaining a small winning combination, and a case of missing a small winning combination.

The table data stored in the ROM are, for example, "01H" which is the push order information stored in the ROM address "2D60H", and the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a stored in the ROM address "2D61H". , "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the middle reel 8b stored in the ROM address "2D62H", and "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the right reel 8c stored in the ROM address "2D63H". , and each piece of information is acquired from the table data as processing for outputting the IF3 test signal.

Also, for example, if the prize-A1 condition device in FIG. 26 is won in the AT state (when the instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor), the small combination acquisition rate does not change regardless of the position of the stop reception position, but the pressing order is left. If it is not operated in the order of middle and right, 12 payouts cannot be received and 1 payout or no payout will occur. The stop reception position of the reel 8a is random, the stop reception position of the middle reel 8b is random, and the stop reception position of the right reel 8c is random. When operated according to this instruction, the symbol combination "Moon A"-"Camel"-"Replay" or "Month B"-"Camel"-"Replay" (see FIG. 22) of winning prize 03 is stopped and displayed 12. It is possible to receive the payout of the winning combination. In addition, when the win-A1 condition device in the non-AT state is won, the pressing order is left, middle, right, and the stop reception position is random, and the IF3 test signal is output.

The table data stored in the ROM are, for example, "01H", which is the push order information stored in the ROM address "2D64H", and the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a stored in the ROM address "2D65H". , "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the middle reel 8b stored in the ROM address "2D66H", and "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the right reel 8c stored in the ROM address "2D67H". , and each piece of information is acquired from the table data as processing for outputting the IF3 test signal. "7FH" is data stored when the stop reception position is irrelevant, and may be any value (14H) that is greater than or equal to the number of symbols.

Also, for example, when the replay-A1 condition device in FIG. 26 is won in the main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen) (when the instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor), the small win acquisition rate is does not change, but if the pressing order is not operated in the order of right, left, middle, and so on, the "red seven" symbol combination will not be aligned in a straight line. The stop reception position of the reel 8a is random, the stop reception position of the middle reel 8b is random, and the stop reception position of the right reel 8c is random. If the operation is performed as instructed, there is a possibility that the symbol combination "replay" - "red seven" - "red seven" (see Fig. 21) of replay 05 will be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination "red seven" will be displayed. It is possible to align in a straight line. When the replay-A1 condition device in the non-AT state is won, the pressing order is left, middle, right, and the stop acceptance position is random, and the IF3 test signal is output.

The table data stored in the ROM are, for example, "06H" which is the push order information stored in the ROM address "2E64H", and the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a stored in the ROM address "2E5H". , "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the middle reel 8b stored in the ROM address "2E66H", and "7FH" which is the stop accepting position of the right reel 8c stored in the ROM address "2E67H". , and each piece of information is acquired from the table data as processing for outputting the IF3 test signal. "7FH" is data stored when the stop reception position is irrelevant, and may be any value as long as it is a value greater than or equal to the number of symbols (a value of 14H or greater for 20 symbols).

After each data is set, the process for outputting the IF2 test signal is executed in the order of the operation order, the left reel 8a stop reception position, the middle reel 8b stop reception position, and the right reel 8c stop reception position. , the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a, the stop acceptance position of the middle reel 8b, and the stop acceptance position of the right reel 8c in this order.

With this configuration, it is possible to accurately transmit the IF2 test signal and the IF3 test signal toward the test IF board.

<Description of Winning Effect, Settlement Effect and Throwing Effect Applicable to the Present Embodiment>
Next, the relationship between the winning effect, the settlement effect and the throwing effect applicable to the present embodiment will be described.

In the effects applicable to the present embodiment described below, a winning effect associated with a game medal payout process based on winning a small winning combination such as a winning combination, a settlement effect associated with a settlement process, and an insertion effect associated with a bet operation. By enabling both outputs at the same time, it prevents erroneous recognition that settlement was not performed normally or insertion was not performed normally, and the player recognizes that the gaming machine is functioning normally. It is intended to

Configurations related to the winning effect, the settlement effect, and the throwing effect applicable to the present embodiment will be described below.

<Main control means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in the present embodiment and the like, but the details of the processing omitted in the description of the present embodiment will be described below.

<Process when game medals are inserted>
If game medals can be inserted, and if the number of bets is not set to the upper limit, a bet setting (also referred to as a bet) is made for the number of inserted game medals, and the upper limit is set. If it is set to , the number of sheets put into the credit is added. In addition, if the number of bets is not set to the upper limit and the number of bets that can be set is stored in the credit, the bet is set according to the operation of the bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). . Here, the insertion of game medals means that the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 17 normally pass through the medal selector 34 .
Before starting a game with game medals set to bet or stored in credits (after setting the required number of bets and before operating the start lever), the settlement switch is operated. After that, the settlement process is possible.
In addition, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control means (sub control board 1000, also referred to as effect control means) when game medals are inserted, and when the bet switch is operated It transmits to the sub-control means a reserve insertion command corresponding to the number of bets set. Based on these commands, the sub-control means is capable of executing a throwing effect such as outputting a game medal throwing sound.

<Winning process (payout process)>
Winning processing (hereinafter also referred to as payout processing) pays out predetermined game medals according to the winning small winning combination (symbol combination displayed stopped) when it is determined by the winning determination processing that a small winning combination has won. processing. To pay out the game medals means to add the credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, and to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting payout based on winning (whether adding credits or paying out from hopper 44), and ends payout based on winning. When doing so, a payout end command is transmitted to the sub-control means. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as outputting game medal payout sounds and executing back lamp effects (also referred to as BL effects). The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and the payout end command are transmitted even when there is no payout (at the time of loss, at the time of replay winning). When the player loses or wins a prize again, the information on the number of game medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, and then a payout end command is transmitted.

<Payment processing>
When the settlement switch is operated while the game is not being played, the game medals corresponding to the number of bets set and the number of accumulated credits are paid out to the player from the hopper 44 (settlement processing). Run. When the settlement process is started, the main control means transmits a settlement start command to the sub-control means, and when the settlement process ends, the main control means transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means can execute settlement performance such as output of settlement sound based on the settlement start command and the settlement end command.

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the result of the lottery for the role (result of the internal lottery), during the AT, the push order navigation effect can be executed, and the input effect can be executed. A winning effect, a settlement effect, etc. are executed.

<Introduction>
This is an effect executed when game medals are inserted or a bet switch is operated, and an insertion sound is output based on a medal insertion command and a stored insertion command transmitted from the main control means. In the main control means, any one of the accumulation insertion command (1 sheet), the accumulation insertion command (2 sheets), and the accumulation insertion command (3 sheets) is set as the accumulation insertion command according to the number of bets set. Then, the command to put in the storage is sent to the sub-control means. When a stored insertion command (one coin) is received, an insertion sound A indicating that one coin has been bet is output once (for example, a sound of da) is output to inform the player that one coin has been bet. . When the stored insertion command (three coins) is received, the insertion sound A is output three times to inform the player that three coins have been bet. When a medal insertion command is received, if the inserted game medals are set for betting, the insertion sound A is output once, and if the inserted game medals are stored, the insertion sound B is output once to indicate that one medal has been stored. (for example, outputting a sound) to notify the player of the bet or reserve.
In addition, when receiving the stock insertion command (three coins), instead of outputting the insertion sound A three times, an insertion sound C indicating that three coins have been bet may be output. , the same sound as when stored (for example, the input sound A may be output in all states). In addition, different sounds (on-on sound D) may be output during normal times (during non-AT) and during AT.

<Prize-winning performance>
This is an effect that is executed when game medals are paid out, and is executed based on a payout start command and a payout end command. executed.

<Output sound>
The game medal payout sounds output during execution of the game medal payout process include a payout sound A and a payout sound B, which are different sounds. The payout sound A is a payout sound output when the winning combination is won in the normal time (during non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout is performed. A payout sound B is a payout sound output when an advantageous payout is made by stopping the combination of correct symbols as a result of winning a winning hand in the pushing order during AT and operating in the correct pushing order. If the operation is not performed in the correct pressing order, the incorrect combination of symbols may be stopped and a disadvantageous payout may be performed, but in that case, the payout sound is not output. The payout sound A starts when the payout start command is received, repeats the output of a specific sound (for example, a sound of duo) until the payout end command is received, and after that, after receiving the payout end command, a first specific time (for example, 1 second) is a payout sound that repeats and ends the output of a specific sound. Payout sound A is played during a predetermined payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time to the actual payout period) longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the payout process is performed) By outputting the sound over time, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the payout is being performed. In addition, by outputting the payout sound over a predetermined payout sound period longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player can feel that the payout is being performed during the period when the payout sound is being output. As a result, it is expected that the start time of the next game can be delayed, and as a result, when the performance according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is likely to be executed without being canceled in the middle.

The payout sound B starts when the payout start command is received, repeats the output of a predetermined sound (for example, a sound of de) until the payout end command is received, and after that, after receiving the payout end command, a second specific time (for example, 2 seconds), and ends with a predetermined sound output. That is, the payout sound B is output for a specific payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the second specific time to the actual payout period) longer than the actual payout period. , and this particular tone-on-play period is longer than the predetermined tone-on-play period of tone-on A. In this way, the payout sound B is output for a longer period than the payout sound A, so that it can be recognized as if more game medals have been awarded. Further, by outputting the payout sound B different from the payout sound A during the AT, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the player is in an advantageous state different from the normal state.
In addition, although the payout sound is output until a predetermined time or a specific time has elapsed after receiving the payout end command, when the payout start command is received, the payout start and payout end are not triggered by the payout end command. The payout sound may be output for a period of time obtained by adding a predetermined time or a specific time to the time (whichever is longer between the addition of credits and the payout of game medals). In addition, although the normal payout sound A and the payout sound B during AT are different, the same payout sound may be output.

<Back lamp effect>
The back lamp performance includes a back lamp performance A and a back lamp performance B which are different from each other. Back lamp production A is a back lamp production that is output when the winning order is won at normal time (during non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct pushing order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is performed. be. The back lamp performance B is a back ramp performance executed when a winning combination is won during the AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout is performed. If the operation is not performed in the correct order, the wrong symbol combination may stop, but in that case, the back lamp effect is not executed. The back lamp effect A starts when the payout start command is received, repeats lighting and extinguishing of the back lamp in a specific pattern until the payout end command is received, and after that, when the payout end command is received, a first specific time (for example 1 second), the backlight is repeatedly turned on and off in a specific pattern. The back lamp effect A is executed over a predetermined back lamp effect period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed. , the player can easily recognize that a payout is being made. Further, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance A for a predetermined performance period longer than the period during which the payout is performed, whether the payout is performed during the period during which the back lamp performance A is performed. It can be expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and furthermore, it will not be canceled in the middle, such as when the effect, etc. according to the result of the internal lottery is being performed for a certain period of time. easier to execute.

The back lamp effect B starts when the payout start command is received, repeats lighting and extinguishing of the back lamp in a predetermined pattern until the payout end command is received, and after that, when the payout end command is received, a second specific time (for example 2 seconds), the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a predetermined pattern. That is, the back lamp effect B is illuminated over a specific back lamp effect period (a period obtained by adding the second specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed, The lights are repeatedly turned off, and this specific back lamp effect period is longer than the predetermined back lamp effect period. In this way, the back lamp effect B is executed for a longer period of time than the back lamp effect A, so that it can be recognized as if more game medals have been awarded. In addition, by executing the back lamp effect B different from the back lamp effect A during the AT, it is possible to easily recognize that it is in an advantageous state different from the normal one.

The back lamp effect was executed until the first specific time or the second specific time elapsed after receiving the payout end command. The back lamp effect may be executed for a period of time obtained by adding the first specific time or the second specific time to the time required for completion (the longer one of the addition of credits and the payout of game medals). Also, although the back lamp effect is different between normal time and AT, the same back lamp effect may be executed. Also, although the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a fixed pattern, a series of turning on and off patterns may be determined and output from the start to the end of the back lamp presentation. In addition, both the "predetermined back lamp effect period" of the back lamp effect A and the "predetermined payout sound period" of the payout sound A are a period obtained by adding the first specific time to the actual payout time. are the same period, but the "predetermined back lamp effect period" and the "predetermined payout sound period" may be different periods. Regarding this, the relationship between the "specific back lamp effect period" of the back lamp effect B and the "specific payout sound period" of the payout sound B is the same. In short, the "predetermined sound-output period" and the "specific sound-output period" of the sound-outputs A and B, and the "predetermined back-lamp effect period" and the "specific back-light effect period" of the back lamp effects A and B are respectively , longer than the actual payout period, and "predetermined payout sound period" < "specific payout sound period", "predetermined back lamp effect period" < "specific back lamp effect period" If there is a relationship, these periods can be set as appropriate.

<Payment performance>
This is an effect that is executed when the game medals are settled. It is executed based on the settlement start command and the settlement end command, and outputs a settlement sound (settlement effect) indicating that the game medals are being paid out and the settlement. A voice is output to the effect that the processing has ended. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received, and until the payment end command is received, a sound different from the payment sound (for example, a sound of do) is repeatedly output, and when the payment end command is received, after that, a third specific period ( For example, in 5 seconds), a voice indicating that the payment has been completed, such as "The payment has been completed," is output, and the process ends. That is, in the settlement effect, a predetermined settlement effect period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the third specific time period).

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described below with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. FIG. FIG. 37 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, FIG. 38 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed, and FIG. FIG. 40 is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch after the completion of the payout process, FIG. 40 is a time chart when no game medals are inserted after the completion of the settlement process, and FIG. 41 is a time chart after the completion of the settlement process. It is a time chart in the case of throwing in. 37 to 41 are described using ON and OFF for convenience of explanation, but the corresponding processing and effects are described in parentheses. Specifically, payout processing / settlement processing / BL effect / settlement effect, ON indicates a state of execution, OFF indicates a state of non-execution, and when it changes from OFF to ON, processing etc. are started and ON to OFF, it means that the process ends. With respect to the payout sound/insertion sound, ON indicates a state of output, and OFF indicates a state of non-output. The MAX bet lamp/medal insertable lamp ON indicates a lighting state, and OFF indicates a lighting state. The MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation indicates that ON has been operated, and OFF indicates that it has not been operated. Regarding medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed the medal selector 34 (the medal selector 34 detects the game medal), and OFF indicates that the game medal has not been inserted.

<When the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 37, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means generates payout sound A (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) based on the received payout start command. Output and back lamp effect A (referred to as BL effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) is started. At the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues the output of payout sound A and the back lamp effect A as the winning effect for the period T1 (first specific time). After the payout process is completed at the timing of time t1, the main control means performs processing such as updating the RT state (game end check processing), and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. . At the timing of time t2, the main control means lights the MAX bet lamp based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. Since the MAX bed switch was not operated, the MAX bed lamp continues to light up. At the timing of time t5, since the period T1 has passed since the timing of time t1, the sub-control means terminates the output of payout sound A and back lamp effect A. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be a predetermined payout sound period and a predetermined performance period. As described above, at the timing after time t1, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A, and turning on the MAX bed lamp. By continuing the output of the sound A, the player can be made to recognize that the payout has been made and can be made to appropriately recognize that the bet can be set by the MAX bet operation, thereby improving the performance of the game machine. be able to.

<When the input operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 38, until the timing of time t2, it is the same as the case where the insertion operation with the MAX bet switch is not performed after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the insertion operation with the MAX bet switch is performed. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends lighting of the MAX bet lamp (turns off), the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect A, and from time t3 to time t4 (During the T2 period) As an effect for throwing-in, a throw-in sound A (referred to as throw-in sound in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) is output three times. At the timing of transition to time t3, smooth control is possible even when various situations such as outputting dispensing sound A and outputting input sound A are combined, thereby enabling smooth control. While making the player aware of this, it is possible to make the player aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and that the bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. At the time t3, the output of the payout sound A continues, but by ending the back lamp effect A, the bet setting is performed visually while the player recognizes that the payout has been made by the sound. can recognize that In addition, in FIG. 38, the insertion operation by the MAX bet switch was explained, but the insertion sound is similarly output even if the insertion operation by the 1-bet switch and medal insertion are performed.

<When the settlement operation is performed with the settlement button after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 39, until the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the adjustment button is operated instead of the operation of the MAX bet switch. be. At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts settlement processing based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends lighting (turns off) the MAX bed lamp. Then, the sub control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the elapse of the T1 period. After that, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is started as settlement effect. At the timing of time t6, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When receiving the settlement end command, the sub-control means changes the output of the settlement sound to output a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed over a T3 period (third specific time). When the settlement process is started, if the payout sound A and the settlement sound are output at the same time, the player will be confused. By ending the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A, the player can be made to accurately recognize that the settlement process different from the payout process is being performed.

<When game medals are not inserted after settlement processing is completed>
As shown in FIG. 40, the main control means starts settlement processing at the timing of time t8, and the sub-control means starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the received settlement start command. Here, the back lamp effect is not executed (output) at the time of settlement, and the payout process and the settlement process can be visually different processes. At the timing of time t9, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When receiving the settlement end command, the sub-control means changes the output of the settlement sound to output a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed over the T3 period. After the settlement process is completed at the timing of time t9, the main control means turns on the blocker so that game medals can be inserted. At the timing of time t10, the main control means lights the medal insertion enable lamp based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. Since no medals were inserted after that, the lighted state is continued. At the time T13, the T3 period has passed since the time t9, so the sub-control means stops outputting the voice indicating that the payment has been completed. As described above, at the timing after time t10, the settlement effect is executed, but the state is such that medals can be inserted.

<When game medals are inserted after settlement processing is completed>
As shown in FIG. 41, until the timing of time t10, the operation is the same as when game medals are not inserted after the end of the settlement process. Setting is performed, and a medal insertion command is transmitted to the sub-control means. The sub-control means outputs a throwing sound A once as a throwing performance based on the reception of the medal throwing command, and the output is performed from the timing of time t11 to the timing of time t12. At the timing after time t11, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting a sound to the effect that the payment has been completed and outputting the input sound A, thereby enabling smooth control. While making the player aware that the game has ended, it is possible to make the player aware that medals have been inserted and bets have been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. 37 to 41, an example has been described in which the payout sound is the payout sound A and the BL effect is the back lamp effect A. In these FIGS. 37 to 41, the payout sound is the payout sound B. , the BL effect may be the back lamp effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the period T1 in FIGS. 37 and 38 should be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

<Change in mode>
While the payout process and the settlement process are being performed, the same sound is repeatedly output during the period until the end. A command indicating that one card has been paid out and a command that can identify the remaining number of cards to be paid out are sent to the sub-control means, and one card is paid out based on the receipt of these commands sent from the main control means. A payout sound or a settlement sound may be output every time.
Also, although the settlement sound is different from the payout sound, it may be the same sound as the payout sound. By using the same sound, the amount of sound data can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data volume. If the same sound is used, the payout process and the settlement process can be distinguished by the presence or absence of the back lamp effect. It can make you aware of what is going on.
Also, the settlement sound may be the same sound as the error sound. In this case also, the amount of sound data can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data capacity.
In addition, while the payout sound B is output during the AT, in addition to the output of the payout sound B from the start of the payout process, a sound indicating the correct pressing order such as "get" or "yes" is output from the start of the payout process. It may be output in a shorter time than the second specific time (2 seconds) after the process is completed. By outputting the sound indicating the correct pressing order, it is possible to recognize that the stop switch has been correctly operated, and by outputting the payout sound for a longer time than the sound indicating the correct pressing order, game medals can be earned. The player can recognize that the payout has been properly made.
In addition, the MAX bed lamp is turned on and off by the main control means. , the light may be turned off.

In addition, although it has been explained that the input sound is output as the input effect, in addition to the output of the input sound, an image indicating the input is displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for effect is used to indicate that the input has been performed. Notification may be made.
In addition, as the winning effect, the output of the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed. You may notify that you have won a prize. At that time, when executing the throwing effect, the display of the display device 32 as the winning effect may be ended, the notification by the LED lamp may be ended, the display of the display device 32 as the throwing effect, the LED lamp may not be performed.
In addition, as the effect of settlement, output of settlement sound and output of voice indicating that the settlement has been completed are performed. Alternatively, an LED lamp for presentation may be used to notify that the payment is being made. At that time, when executing the input effect, the display of the display device 32 as the settlement effect may be ended, or the notification by the LED lamp may be ended, or the display of the display device 32 as the input effect, the LED Notification by the lamp may not be executed.
In addition, although the payout appearance is executed in the pushing order role, the payout appearance may be performed in other small roles (watermelon role, bell role regardless of pushing order, cherry role, etc.). By outputting a payout sound different from that of the winning combination and performing a back lamp performance different from that of the winning combination in the other small combination, it is possible to easily recognize that a winning combination different from that of the winning combination has been won.
Also, the time and the length of the period in this embodiment are examples, and can be changed in various ways.

<Description of Errors and Winning Effect Related to Hopper 44 Applicable to this Embodiment>
Next, the relationship between an error related to the hopper 44 applicable to the present embodiment and a winning effect will be described.

In the effect applicable to the present embodiment described below, even if a hopper empty error occurs when the winning effect accompanying the start of the payout process or the effect after the reel stops, the game is played before the occurrence. The purpose is to make the player recognize the result of the game, the result of the performance, etc.

Errors related to the hopper 44 applicable to the present embodiment and configurations related to the winning effect will be described below.

<Main control means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in the description of the winning effect, the settlement effect, and the input effect applicable to the present embodiment and the present embodiment, but the details of the process are omitted from the description of the present embodiment. is explained below.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The payout process is a process of paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor combination (symbol combination displayed stopped) when it is determined by the winning determination process that the minor combination has won. To pay out the game medals means to add the credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, and to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. In order to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) drives the hopper motor by inputting a drive signal (ON state) to the hopper motor, and rotates the turntable to collect one game medal. When the game medals are discharged one by one and the payout sensor detects the game medals for a predetermined time (the time from the start of passage to the end of passage is between 3 ms and 200 ms), it is determined that one game medal has been paid out. Further, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when starting a payout based on winning (whether credit addition or payout from the hopper 44). Then, when ending, a payout end command is transmitted to the sub-control means. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as display of the number of wins, display of the accumulated number, and the like. The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and the payout end command are transmitted even when there is no payout (at the time of loss, at the time of replay winning). When the player loses or wins a prize in the replay, information on the number of game medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, and then a payout end command is transmitted.

<Error regarding Hopper 44>
As errors related to the hopper 44, a hopper retention error, a hopper empty error, and an abnormality detection error can be detected. The hopper retention error is an error when it is determined that game medals are stuck in the payout port of the hopper 44 when the game medals are paid out, and the hopper empty error is an error when it is determined that the game medals in the hopper are empty. The abnormality detection error is an error when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the dispensing sensor of the hopper 44 .
When the main control means detects an error and notifies the error, the main control means transmits an error notification start command including error type information to the sub control means, and transmits an error recovery command when the error is cleared. The sub control means displays error information (error screen) corresponding to the type of error detected on the display device 32 based on the error notification start command, terminates the error screen display based on the error recovery command, and reports the occurrence of an error. Return to the previous display.
Further, the main control means transmits an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected at the timing of detecting an abnormality detection error, and the sub-control means displays that an abnormality detection has occurred based on the error detection command.

<Hopper Retention Error>
When the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor, and the game medals are paid out by rotating the turntable. It is determined that it is clogged and a hopper retention error is set.
<Hopper empty error>
When the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44, even if a drive signal is input to the hopper motor and the game medals are paid out by rotating the rotating disk, the game medals are not detected by the payout sensor for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds). If not, it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, and a hopper empty error is set.
<Anomaly detection error>
When the game medals are not paid out, if the payout sensor detects for a predetermined time (3 ms) or more, it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the payout sensor, and an abnormality detection error is set. The error display is performed in a state in which no game is being played (waiting for insertion of game medals, waiting for reception of the start lever).

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the lottery result of the role (result of internal lottery), error notification can be executed, and during AT, the push order navigation effect can be performed. Execution, prize-winning effect, result screen display, result notification effect, etc. are executed.

<Prize-winning performance>
These are effects executed when game medals are paid out, including an acquisition display effect indicating that a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, and an indication that the number of game medals acquired by the player accumulates to a predetermined number. and a cumulative display effect. Acquisition display effect and accumulated display effect are executed based on the receipt of the payout start command by the sub control means.

<Acquisition display effect>
Acquisition display performance is a performance performed when a winning combination is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout is performed. As a form of the acquisition display effect, "GET" may be displayed without specifying the game medals to be paid out, or "12 GET" may be displayed so as to specifically specify that 12 game medals are to be paid out. may be displayed. As a result of winning the pushing order role during AT and not operating in the correct pushing order, the incorrect symbol combination is stopped and a disadvantageous payout (payout of fewer game medals than the correct symbol combination, such as one payout) is performed. However, in that case, the acquisition display effect is not executed.
Acquisition display effect is started when a payout start command is received, and is executed for a predetermined acquisition display effect period (1 second) shorter than the period during which actual payout is performed (period during which payout processing is performed). . Therefore, it is executed even if all game medals to be actually paid out to the player have not been paid out. This is to prevent the effect from being canceled by the start of the next game or being confused with the result of the next game if the acquisition display effect is executed after all the coins have been paid out. Also, by executing the acquisition display effect even if all the game medals have not been paid out, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the game (that the payout is obtained) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect>
The cumulative display effect is executed when the cumulative number of game medals (also referred to as the total number of game medals) acquired by the player during AT exceeds the prescribed number (500, 1000, 1500, 2000) for the first time. It is a production that Specifically, during one AT, the accumulated number of acquired sheets is counted from the start of the AT, and when it can be determined that the accumulated number exceeds 500 due to the payout of game medals, the cumulative display effect is executed (started). be. After that, even if the cumulative number falls below 500 and exceeds 500 again, the cumulative display effect is not executed. As a form of the cumulative display effect, a message such as "500 sheets GET" is displayed according to the specified number.
Cumulative display effect is started when a payout start command is received and it can be determined that the cumulative number exceeds the specified number due to the payout, and the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the payout process is performed) is shorter. It is executed for a predetermined cumulative display effect period (1 second). Similar to the acquisition display effect, it is executed even if the number of game medals actually paid out to the player does not exceed the specified number. When the accumulated display effect is actually executed at the timing when the specified number is actually exceeded, the timing of executing the cumulative display effect varies, the effect is canceled when the next game starts, and it prevents confusion with the result of the next game. Because. Also, by executing the cumulative display effect even if the specified number is not exceeded, the player can be made aware of the game result (exceeding the specified number) in advance.
Note that the acquired display effect and the cumulative display effect may be executed in one game, but in the present embodiment, the acquired display effect is basically executed in the game in which the cumulative display effect can be executed. Instead, only the cumulative display effect is executed. However, unlike the principle, the case of executing the acquisition display effect will be described later.

<Display of result screen>
The result screen displayed in this embodiment is a screen displayed when the AT ends, and is a screen that displays the total number of game medals obtained during the AT, the number of games indicating the execution period of the AT, and the like. When the result screen is displayed, a display for calling attention (prevention display for immersion) is also displayed. When the final game of AT ends (all reel stop command is received), the display of the result screen is started, and the display of the result screen is continued until the next game is started. It should be noted that while the result screen is being displayed in the final game, only the acquisition display effect can be executed, and even if any prescribed number is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display effect is not executed. For example, as a result of winning the push order role and operating in the correct push order, the combination of correct symbols is stopped, an advantageous payout is performed, and if the prescribed number of cards exceeds 500, the cumulative display effect is not performed if the final game is not played. However, since the result screen is displayed in the final game, the acquisition display effect is executed without executing the cumulative display effect. This is because the total number of game medals acquired during AT is displayed on the result screen, and if the cumulative display effect is also executed, similar information will be superimposed and the player will be confused.

<Result announcement performance>
The result notification effect is a effect for notifying the player that an advantageous result has been obtained, and is a effect executed in the final game of the continuous effect. Specifically, in order to notify the player whether or not a favorable result for the player has been obtained, such as a bonus win, an additional win such as the number of remaining AT games, or a special zone win that increases the chance of winning. As an example, it is notified whether or not an advantageous result has been obtained in a battle effect or the like. If a favorable result is obtained, an image indicating success or victory is displayed, and if a favorable result is not obtained, an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. In the battle production, a screen is displayed in which allied characters and enemy characters face each other when the lever is operated, and after all reels have stopped (by receiving a command to stop all reels), allied characters and enemy characters compete. An image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed after the production branch timing after a certain period of time has passed. The effect branch timing is the timing 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and the result announcement effect ends at the timing when the image indicating success or victory or the image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. It is 3 seconds after the start. As a result, the result notification presentation ends before the hopper empty error occurs (detects) and the error screen is displayed, and the player can confirm whether or not there is an advantageous result regardless of the occurrence of the error. Since the command to stop all reels and the command to start payout are transmitted at approximately the same timing, the start of the payout process may be replaced with after all the reels have stopped.

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described below with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. FIG. FIG. 42 is a time chart when dispensing is normally performed, FIG. 43 is a time chart when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 44 is a time chart when dispensing is performed normally. 45 is a time chart when dispensing is not performed (at the time of hopper retention error), FIG. 45 is an example of a display screen when dispensing is performed normally, and FIG. 46 is a screen when dispensing is performed normally. FIG. 47 is an example of the display screen when there is no hopper empty error (when the hopper empty error occurs), and FIG.
42 to 44, ON and OFF are used for convenience of description, but the corresponding processing and effects are described in parentheses. Specifically, when the payout process is ON, it means that it is in progress, and when it is OFF, it means that it is not in progress. . ON of payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. ON of the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect indicates that the effect is being executed (displayed), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (not displayed). ON of the result notification effect indicates that it is being executed (effect is progressing), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (the effect is finished and the display is stopped on the screen announcing the result). . ON of error (hopper empty) and error (hopper retention) indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and an error has been set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. ON of the error display indicates a state in which an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates an error code display or an error screen display. is not performed.

45 to 47 show the case where the acquisition display effect is executed, and when the cumulative display effect is executed, the notation "12 cards GET" displayed in the acquisition display effect in the figure is the cumulative display effect. It becomes the notation of "500 sheets GET" displayed.

The winning effect, the settlement effect, and the throwing effect described above can be combined, and the times t0 and t1 in FIGS. 37 to 39 and the times t0 and t1 in FIG. 42 are the same timing. Time t5 in FIGS. 37 and 38 is later than time t1 in FIG. 42 and earlier than time t15.

<If the payment was made normally>
As shown in FIG. 42, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. At the timing of time t14 after one second, the sub-control means terminates the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect. After that, at the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. When the payout process is normally executed (in this example, 12 game medals are normally paid out), it takes about 1.5 seconds. The required time varies slightly depending on whether it is only or includes the payout of game medals from the hopper. Acquisition display effect is started at the timing when the payout process is started, and ends at the timing before the payout process ends. As a result, the player can recognize that game medals have been obtained or that the cumulative number of game medals obtained exceeds a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. Since the result notification effect is executed from the start of the game, it is already being executed at the timing of starting the payout process. At the timing of time t15, the result notification effect becomes the effect branching timing, and the display after this timing differs between the case of displaying an image indicating success or victory and the case of displaying an image indicating failure or defeat. At the timing of time t16, the effect of notifying the result being executed is terminated. Time t15 is the timing 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and time t16 is the timing 3 seconds after the start of the payout process.

<When dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 43, the main control means starts payout processing at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts acquisition display effect or cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t10, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, no game medals are paid out and the turntable continues to rotate. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub control means displays an error screen. At the timings of other times t14, t15, and t16, similarly to FIG. 42, at the timing of time t14, the acquisition display effect or cumulative display effect ends, at the timing of time t15, it becomes the effect branching timing, and at the timing of time t16, The performance announcing the result ends. Hopper Empty Error occurs because the period for execution of Acquisition Display Effect and Cumulative Display Effect and the period until the end of result notification effect are set shorter than the period from the start of payout process to the occurrence of Hopper Empty Error. Then, before the error screen is displayed, it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect.
In addition, FIG. 43 shows a case where a hopper empty error occurs without paying out even one medal after the payout process is started. The timing at which the empty error occurs is a timing later than time t17 by the amount of payout of a plurality of game medals.

<When dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 44, the main control means starts payout processing at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts acquisition display effect or accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but since the discharge port of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals, the payout of the game medals is not executed. At the timing of time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continuously detected for 201 ms or more from the start of payout processing, so the main control means determines that the game medals are jammed, terminates the payout processing, and sets a hopper retention error. . Similarly, at the timing of time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of the hopper retention error, and the sub-control means displays the acquired display effect or cumulative display effect that was being executed. Cancel the result notification effect (end the display) and display the error screen. Since the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is executed from the payout process start timing, it is executed before the payout process starts and the hopper retention error occurs, so the acquisition display is performed before the error screen is displayed It is possible to confirm the contents of the effects and cumulative display effects.
Note that FIG. 44 shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs after the payout process is started and no tokens are paid out. The timing at which the retention error occurs is later than time t18 by the amount of payout of a plurality of game medals, and the period during which the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect are executed becomes longer.

Acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect cancel the execution of the effect itself and do not display it, but while the effect itself is being executed, the effect is displayed by overlapping the error screen with the effect. You may make it invisible. In this case, when the error is canceled during execution of the effect, the effect being executed becomes visible from the timing of the cancellation. However, it is necessary to operate the reset switch to cancel the error, and since the reset switch is inside the housing, it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Normally, it takes more than 3 seconds from the start of payout processing to the end of the result notification effect before canceling the error. Also, it does not return during execution of acquisition display effects, cumulative display effects, and result notification effects, and returns on the screen after all effects are completed.

<Display screen when payout is performed normally>
FIG. 45 shows an example of a display screen when payout is normally performed. FIG. 45 shows a scene in which a game is executed with 11 remaining AT games and 230 total game medals, and a battle effect (result notification effect) is being executed. The number of remaining games is displayed on the upper left of the screen (Since the game was executed with 11 remaining games, 1 is subtracted and 10G (game) is displayed. On the upper right of the screen, the total number of game medals acquired by AT is 230. Allied characters (characters with round heads) are displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and enemy characters (characters with star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

FIG. 45(a) is a screen at the timing when all the reels are stopped during execution of the battle effect (receipt of all reel stop command), and the effect progresses after this timing to announce the result. FIG. 45(b) is the timing of time t0 in FIG. 42, which is a screen showing the timing at which the payout process is started. One game medal is paid out, and the total number of game medals is increased by one from 230 to 231. From the right side of the screen, the player can specify that 12 game medals will be paid out as an acquisition display effect. display is moving toward the center. At the center of the screen, a competition between friendly characters and enemy characters has begun. FIG. 45(c) shows the timing when 3 game medals are paid out, and the display of "12 GET" is displayed in the center of the screen as a large acquisition display effect so that 12 game medals can be specified to be paid out. is being done. The competition between allied characters and enemy characters continues.

(d) of the same figure shows the timing when eight game medals have been paid out, and the large display of "12 medals GET" displayed in the center of the screen moves toward the left side of the screen toward the end of the acquisition display effect. moving. 42(e) is the timing of time t15 in FIG. 42, when the payout of the game medals is completed and the effect branching timing is reached. Since the game medals have been paid out, the total number of game medals is displayed as 242. In the center of the screen, the competition between friendly characters and enemy characters continues. FIG. 4(f) shows the process of displaying an image indicating success at the timing after the effect branching timing. The ally character is enlarged and displayed from the competition between the ally character and the enemy character, and it is in a state where you can recognize that it will be successful. FIG. 4(g) is the timing of time t16 in FIG. 42, which is the timing at which the battle effect ends. "Success" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, clearly indicating that the production was successful. The image displayed in (g) of the figure ends as an effect, but is continuously displayed until the next game starts. FIG. 4(h) shows the process of displaying an image indicating failure at the timing after the effect branching timing. The enemy character is displayed enlarged from the competition between the friendly character and the enemy character, and it is in a state where you can recognize that it will be a failure. 42(i) is the timing of time t16 in FIG. 42, which is the timing at which the battle effect ends. "Failure" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and it is clearly displayed that it was a production indicating failure. The image displayed in (i) of the figure ends as an effect, but is continuously displayed until the next game starts.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when hopper empty error occurs)>
FIG. 46 shows an example of the display screen when the payout is not performed normally (when the hopper empty error occurs). In (a) to (i) of FIG. 45, the flow of acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect is the same as in FIG. However, since the payout of game medals has not been performed after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals on the upper right of the screen remains 230 and has not been updated. 43(j) is the timing of time t17 in FIG. 43. Since game medals were not detected for 3.5 seconds after the start of the payout process, a hopper empty error was set in the main control means and , is the timing at which the error screen indicating the hopper empty error is displayed. The same image is displayed regardless of whether an image indicating success or an image indicating failure is displayed before the hopper empty error occurs.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when hopper retention error occurs)>
FIG. 47 shows an example of the display screen when the payout is not performed normally (when the hopper retention error occurs). In (a) to (c) of FIG. 45, the flow of acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect is the same as in FIG. However, since the payout of game medals has not been performed after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals on the upper right of the screen remains 230 and has not been updated. FIG. 4(k) is the timing of time t18 in FIG. 44, when the hopper retention error is set in the main control means and the screen showing the hopper retention error is displayed in the sub control means. When the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continuously detects for 201 ms or more after the start of payout processing, the main control means determines that game medals are jammed and sets a hopper retention error. When the hopper retention error is set, the main control means transmits a command indicating the occurrence of the hopper retention error to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the command indicating the occurrence of the hopper retention error, it displays a screen indicating the hopper retention error on the display device 32 .

<Change in mode>
The period during which the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect are performed is a period (1 second) shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) required when the payout process is normally executed, but it may be a longer period. Specifically, the period may be longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than the period until the hopper empty error is detected (3.5 seconds). By making the period longer than the period required when the payout process is executed, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the acquisition display effect and the accumulated display effect.
Also, only one of the acquired display effect and the accumulated display effect is executed, but when the conditions for executing both effects are satisfied, the accumulated display effect is executed after the acquired display effect is executed. may Acquisition display performance ends 1 second after the start of payout processing, and cumulative display performance is executed for 1 second thereafter, so that even if a hopper empty error occurs, the player can recognize the contents of the cumulative display performance. .
In addition, the acquisition display effect is performed when the winning order is won during the AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination is stopped and an advantageous payout (12 coins is paid out) is performed. However, it may also be executed when a winning combination other than the winning combination is won. Specifically, winning a winning combination (so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (12 coins is paid out) is executed regardless of the pressing order, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the pressing order regardless of the combination is stopped. It can be executed when

The acquisition display effect may have multiple types of modes when an advantageous payout (12 coins payout) is executed. Specifically, the color and font used when displaying "12 sheets GET" may be changed according to the state. More specifically, the colors and fonts are changed depending on whether or not it is easy to win the AT add-on, or the colors and fonts are changed during the sign that a continuous effect will occur or the move to the add-on special zone. . By making the mode of the acquisition display effect different, the player can be notified of the acquisition of game medals and can be made to expect that an advantageous situation may occur after the next game. Also, the color and font used when displaying "12 cards" may be changed according to the setting values set in the gaming machine. Information for estimating the setting value set in the game machine can be provided each time the acquisition display effect is executed.
Also, the cumulative display effect may be provided in a mode in which it can be displayed only when a specific set value is set, other than for each prescribed number. Specifically, when the set value "2", "4" or "6" is set and the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 246 for the first time, "246 GET" is displayed. When the number of cards exceeds 246, the cards may be displayed without fail, or may be displayed when a lottery is held and a prize is won. By suggesting settings based on the contents displayed in the cumulative display performance, it is possible not only to inform the player of the cumulative number but also to provide information for estimating the set value set in the game machine. When the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 666 for the first time only when the setting value "6" is set, "666 GET" may be displayed. Further, a plurality of types of display modes with different colors, fonts, etc. may be provided for each predetermined number, and the setting values set in the gaming machine and the state may be suggested by the displayed display modes.

Acquisition display effect and accumulation display effect can be executed during AT, and even if the accumulated number of game medals exceeds a prescribed number only during display of the result screen, the acquisition display effect is executed without executing the accumulation display effect. , acquired display effects, and accumulated display effects may not be executed. Specifically, in a so-called pseudo-bonus situation, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. Further, in the situation of the pseudo bonus being executed during AT, the acquisition display effect may not be executed, and only the accumulation display effect may be executed. In addition, during the preparation period before starting the AT, on the AT start screen, in the continuous effects executed during the AT, and during the signs of the continuous effects, the acquired display effects and cumulative display effects must not be executed. good too. In an ending state that can be executed before the end of the advantageous section, it is not necessary to execute the acquisition display effect and the accumulated display effect. To properly notify a player of necessary information by providing a case of execution and a case of non-execution according to a game state managed by a main control means and a performance state managed by a sub-control means. can be done.

Whether or not the accumulation display effect is to be executed is determined based on the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT and the number of game medals paid out by the payout process, but the value of the MY counter is used for judgment. You may Specifically, a command indicating the value of the MY counter is transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means after the end of the game is checked and when the lever is operated. The value of the MY counter after the game end check indicates the value after the payout process, and the value of the MY counter when the lever is operated indicates the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets. Information on the number of game medals included in the payout start command is added to the value of the MY counter at the time of lever operation at the timing of receiving the payout start command as the result of the game, and it is determined whether the added total value exceeds the specified number. If a value based on the value of the MY counter is displayed as the cumulative number during AT, the player can grasp the number of game medals that can be obtained by the end of the advantageous section.
The result notification effect is the battle effect executed in the final game of the continuous effect, but it may be the effect executed in one game instead of the continuous effect. In addition, it is not limited to a battle production where friendly characters and enemy characters compete, but it is possible to associate the results of production such as whether or not to draw the first prize in a lottery, whether or not to win an amidakuji, and the results that are advantageous to the player. Other productions may be used.

As for the result notification effect, the result is displayed after the effect divergence timing occurs due to the passage of time from the stop of all the reels, but the result may be displayed by operating the effect button. Specifically, at the production branch timing (timing of time t15), an image of a switch simulating a production switch (also referred to as an operation promotion image or an operation promotion production) is displayed, and the player operates the production switch to achieve success. Display an image indicating failure or an image indicating failure. By displaying the operation promotion image at the production branch timing, even in a situation where a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed, the operation promotion image is displayed before the error screen is displayed. can recognize that
Also, after all the reels have stopped (after all the reels have stopped), a PUSH button effect may be executed in order to announce a stage change in the effect or an additional number of AT remaining games. Specifically, after all the reels have stopped and before time t17 before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, an image of a switch simulating a production switch is displayed, and the player operates the switch. , Change the stage of production, and announce the number of additions. It can be recognized that an image of a switch simulating an effect switch is displayed (PUSH button effect is executed) before a hopper empty error occurs (an error screen is displayed). In addition, before the image of the switch imitating the production switch is displayed, the image of the switch imitating the production switch may be displayed or stimulated, and before the error screen is displayed, the effect It can be recognized that an image of an image of a switch simulating a switch is displayed.

In addition to the result notification effect and the PUSH button effect, a comment effect, etc., triggered by the operation of the stop switch of the last reel or the stopping of all reels may be executed. By executing these effects before the time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs (for example, the timing of the time t15, the timing of the time t1, etc.), the contents of the effects can be changed before the hopper empty error occurs. can recognize.
Also, as a result of winning the push order role and operating in the correct order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (12 payouts) is performed. It may also be executed when another role is won. Specifically, winning a winning combination (so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (12 coins is paid out) is executed regardless of the pressing order, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the pressing order regardless of the combination is stopped. It can be executed when
Also, the length of time and period described in the above embodiment is an example, and can be changed as appropriate.

Next, various settings for executing timer interrupt processing will be described.
The interrupt mode is set in the initial setting regarding the operation of the game machine shown in FIG. Setting the interrupt mode means making various settings (settings of main control built-in registers) for enabling execution of timer interrupt processing.
Therefore, first of all, a description will be given of main internal control registers for enabling execution of timer interrupt processing.

<PTC prescaler setting register>
The PTC prescaler setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation setting of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, a clock to be supplied to an 8-bit counter PTC, which will be described later, can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set "by what frequency division" the system clock (SCK) is to be supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC. For example, when the system clock is 16 MHz and "143" is set in the PTC prescaler setting register, 16 MHz/143=approximately 111.8881 KHZ becomes the clock source for the 8-bit counter PTC.
The initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "250".

<PTC counter setting register>
The PTC counter setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation setting of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC counter setting register, the count value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set how many times the number of clocks from the PTC prescaler setting register is input to execute timer interrupt processing. For example, when the system clock is 16 MHz, the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143", and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125", the clock is approximately 111.8881 KHz (one cycle is approximately 8.9375 μs). clock) is input 125 times (when the 8-bit counter PTC times out), an interrupt flag is set, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in an interrupt wait monitor register, which will be described later. be. When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, an interrupt request notification signal can be output from the interrupt wait monitor register to the CPU, and the interrupt is enabled. (When the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "1") the timer interrupt can be executed.
In other words, if the system clock is 16 MHz, "143" is set in the PTC prescaler setting register, and "125" is set in the PTC counter setting register, 1/16 MHz x 143 x 125 = about 1.117 ms (millimeters). seconds), timer interrupt processing can be executed.
Also, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC starts to be updated (for example, decremented by 1) based on the clock from the PTC prescaler setting register after setting the value in the PTC counter setting register.
The initial value of the 8-bit counter PTC (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0".

<Interrupt wait monitor register>
The interrupt wait monitor register is one of the main control built-in registers.
The interrupt wait monitor register is a 1-byte (8-bit) storage area. When the 8-bit counter PTC times out and an interrupt request signal output from the timer circuit of the main control chip is received, an interrupt wait monitor register is stored. A predetermined bit (for example, the first bit) of the monitor register becomes "1". Thus, when a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "1", it is referred to as storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register. Setting the bit to "0" is referred to as clearing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated and stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.

When the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it becomes possible to output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. In other words, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it becomes possible to output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU, and when the interrupt is enabled (described later). When the IFF1 register is "1") the timer interrupt is enabled. When executing timer interrupt processing in response to an interrupt request notification signal (before executing timer interrupt processing, at the same time as executing timer interrupt processing, or after executing timer interrupt processing), an interrupt waiting Clear the information stored in the monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

On the other hand, even if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, when the interrupt is disabled (when the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "0"), , outputs an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU, but does not execute timer interrupt processing. In this way, when the timer interrupt process cannot be executed because the interrupt is disabled (the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "0"), the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register has been generated. Information indicating is retained (not cleared). Further, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it continues to output the interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. If the timer interrupt processing could not be executed because the interrupt was disabled (the IFF1 register described later is "0"), the interrupt enabled state (the IFF1 register described later is "1") and responded to the interrupt request notification signal. When executing timer interrupt processing (immediately before executing timer interrupt processing, at the same time as executing timer interrupt processing, or immediately after executing timer interrupt processing), the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register clears the information indicating that a
The initial value of the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register (the value when the power is turned on) is "0" (the interrupt wait monitor register indicates that an interrupt request signal has been generated). is not stored).

Next, the interrupt register for managing the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state will be explained.

<Interrupt register>
The interrupt register is a register that the main control chip (for example, the main control CPU) has.
The interrupt registers manage interrupt-related states (also called interrupt states), namely the interrupt disabled state (interrupt disabled section or interrupt disabled period) and the interrupt enabled state (interrupt enabled section or interrupt enabled period). do. Specifically, it has an IFF1 register and an IFF2 register as interrupt registers, and manages an interrupt disabled state and an interrupt enabled state according to the value of the IFF1 register. Therefore, description of the IFF2 register is omitted. Also, unless otherwise specified, the interrupt register refers to the IFF1 register.

When the IFF1 register is "0", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. It is viable.
When the IFF1 register is "1", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and even if an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, the timer interrupt Take no action.
In other words, the interrupt disabled state means that the IFF1 register is "0", and the interrupt enabled state means that the IFF1 register is "1".

The IFF1 register becomes "0" when an instruction that disables interrupts (for example, a "DI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "1" when an instruction that enables an interrupt (for example, an "EI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "0" when timer interrupt processing is executed (immediately before timer interrupt processing is executed, at the same time as timer interrupt processing is executed, or immediately after timer interrupt processing is executed).
In other words, the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process refers to the state from the execution of the interrupt prohibiting instruction to the execution of the interrupt permitting instruction. to the execution of the instruction that enables interrupts.
Note that the initial value of the IFF1 register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0". Therefore, it can be said that the state from when the power is turned on until the execution of the interrupt permitting instruction is also the interrupt disabled state.
On the other hand, the interrupt enabled state indicates a state other than the interrupt disabled state.

Now, let us return to the setting of the interrupt mode in the initial setting regarding the operation of the game machine in FIG. When setting the interrupt mode, a value is stored (set) in the PTC prescaler setting register. For example, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. Next, the value is stored (set) in the PTC counter setting register. For example, "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

Thus, in setting the interrupt mode, after "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "125"→"124"→...→"2"→"1". ' → '125' → '124' → . After the interrupt mode is set in the initial settings regarding the operation of the gaming machine in FIG. 5, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is kept updated even when another program (processing/command) is being executed. is configured to Also, the timing at which the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "125" is referred to as "timeout" of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC.

After executing the interrupt mode setting, the timer interrupt processing can actually be executed after the instruction to enable the interrupt is given. Here, it is preferable that the interrupt permission instruction is issued after determining whether or not the checksums of all RAMs are normal by RAM check processing (after power-off recovery data normal or recovery possible state in FIG. 5). For example, it is conceivable to execute an instruction to permit an interrupt by "activate interrupt processing" in FIG. .

In this way, if the 8-bit counter is updated before the RAM check process (determining whether or not the RAM before power-off and the RAM after power-on is the same), the 8-bit counter will be updated after the RAM check process. Compared to starting updating the bit counter, the 8-bit counter can time out earlier (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). Timer interrupt processing can be executed without delay when an instruction to permit an interrupt to be executed is executed.

In this embodiment, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register when setting the interrupt mode, but the process of storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register may not be executed. Specifically, it is possible to set the interrupt period by using the fact that the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250" (the initial value is not "0").

For example, when the system clock is set to 16 MHz, the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250". Therefore, by storing an arbitrary value in the PTC counter setting register, the period of timer interrupt processing can be appropriately determined. can be done. The cycle of timer interrupt processing according to the value stored in the PTC counter setting register is illustrated below.
a) When "0" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the period of timer interrupt processing can be set to 4 ms (milliseconds).
b) When "128" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the period of timer interrupt processing can be set to 2 ms (milliseconds).
c) When "64" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the cycle of timer interrupt processing can be set to 1 ms (milliseconds).

In this way, even if the process of storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register is not performed, the updating of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be started by executing the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. can be done. In other words, if it is desired to store a value different from the initial value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is preferable to store the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. For example, if a value different from the initial value is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register after storing a value in the PTC counter setting register, first, the frequency corresponding to the initial value (250) of the PTC prescaler setting register is and then store a value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register, the value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register Based on the obtained frequency, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated. In such a case, the update cycle of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC becomes irregular, leading to failure of the main control chip. Therefore, when executing the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, by storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register, the failure of the main control chip can be prevented. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register will be described using a simple program example.
(A) of FIG. 48 represents a program of the game progress main process. The "DI" instruction is an instruction for disabling maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt disabling instruction). The "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt enabling instruction).
"AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary instructions (programs).

In FIG. 48A, when the "DI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "0" and interrupts are disabled.
After that, the IFF1 register remains "0" when the instructions "AAAA", "BBBB", and ".." are executed.
After that, when the "EI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "1" and the interrupt is enabled.
In other words, the period from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction is in the interrupt disabled state.

However, timer interrupt processing becomes executable not immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "CCCC" instruction, which is one instruction ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed. is configured to
For example, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the "DI" instruction and the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. is configured so that timer interrupt processing can be executed after the "CCCC" instruction is executed. When the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even if the interrupt processing is not started immediately, the counter value of the 8-bit counter is continuously updated.
By configuring in this way, even if an instruction "EI" for enabling an interrupt is executed, interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction ("CCCC" in this example) is executed. It is possible to reliably execute the instruction after the instruction "EI" that enables the interrupt. Specifically, a return instruction (an instruction for executing the program at the return address) such as the "RET" instruction may be used as an instruction after the instruction "EI" that enables an interrupt. Even if there is, by not executing the timer interrupt processing until the next instruction is executed, the instruction after the instruction "EI" for enabling the interrupt can be reliably executed.

In addition, in the game progress main process, as an example of providing an instruction to prohibit interruption and an instruction to permit interruption,
a) When sending a command from the main control means to the sub-control means, after executing a command to disable interrupts, write the command in the storage area of the RAM, etc., and then execute the command to enable interrupts. Case a) When the blocker is turned on (medal acceptance enabled state), after issuing an instruction to prohibit interrupts, the process of writing the information for turning on the blocker to the storage area of the RAM and turning on the token insertion ready lamp. If you execute a command to allow interrupts after executing processing such as writing information to the RAM storage area to prevent interrupts c) A command to prohibit interrupts was issued when turning the blocker OFF (medal acceptance refusal state) Later, after executing the processing of writing the information for turning off the blocker in the storage area of the RAM and the processing of writing the information for turning off the token insertable lamp in the storage area of the RAM, etc., the instruction to permit the interruption is executed. case etc.
Note that when an interrupt prohibiting instruction and an interrupt permitting instruction are provided, they are not limited to the above-described a) to c), and an interrupt inhibiting instruction and an interrupt permitting instruction may be provided as appropriate.

The interruption prohibition state in such a game progress main process is, for example, the execution of the timer interrupt process while executing the process composed of a plurality of instructions (instruction A, instruction B, . . . , instruction Z). This is provided in order to prevent the data in the RAM from being changed, and to prevent the execution of processing that causes problems based on the data in the RAM.
It should be noted that the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is set to an interrupt prohibition state by an interrupt prohibition instruction (for example, a DI instruction) and an interrupt permission state by an interrupt permission instruction (for example, an EI instruction). In addition to the above DI instruction, other instructions may be used to inhibit interrupts, and not only the above EI instructions may be used to enable interrupts.

FIG. 48B shows an interrupt processing program. As in FIG. 48A, the "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt enabling instruction). , “CCCC”, and “..” are arbitrary instructions (programs). The "RETI" instruction is an instruction (return instruction) for terminating timer interrupt processing, and corresponds to, for example, "RETURN" in FIG.

When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the IFF1 register becomes "0". As a result, the next timer interrupt process can be prevented from being executed during the timer interrupt process. Note that the "DI" instruction is unnecessary when starting timer interrupt processing.
When the timer interrupt processing ends, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the interrupt processing, that is, immediately before the "RETI" instruction, in order to switch from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. This "EI" instruction sets the IFF1 register to "1". The "EI" instruction corresponds to "save interrupt enable flag ON" in FIG.
Also in the "RETI" instruction after the "EI" instruction, the IFF1 register is "1".
In other words, the period from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction is in the interrupt disabled state.

However, timer interrupt processing becomes executable not immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "RETI" instruction, which is one instruction ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed. is configured to
For example, the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. In this case, timer interrupt processing can be executed after the "RETI" instruction is executed. The 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even in this case (when interrupt processing is not started immediately), the counter value of the 8-bit counter is continuously updated.
In this way, after the "RETI" instruction, if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, timer interrupt processing becomes executable, and after the "RETI" instruction, When the interrupt waiting monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the game progress main processing can be executed. Therefore, even if the interrupt enable instruction "EI" is executed, interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction "RETI" is executed. It is possible to prevent the process from being executed.

Next, with reference to (1) of FIG. 49, the relationship between the timer interrupt process and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is no interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process will be described.
When "m (m is a numerical value)" is stored in the PTC counter setting register as a value, "m" is stored in the 8-bit counter PTC. , '2', '1', 'm', 'm-1', 'm-2', . . . Thus, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC circulates between "m" and "1".

At the timing of t1, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "m". That is, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t2, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

Further, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the update cycle of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even while timer interrupt processing is being executed. With this configuration, regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated, so timer interrupt processing can be executed at regular intervals.

Next, using (2) in FIG. 49, the relationship between the timer interrupt process and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is an interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process will be described.

At the timing of t1, an instruction to prohibit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt permitted state) to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At the timing of t3, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state).
At the timing of t3, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register, the game progress main processing is started based on the instruction to allow the interruption of the game progress main processing. After one instruction is executed, timer interrupt processing can be executed. When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t4, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

As in FIG. 49(1), the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the update cycle of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even while timer interrupt processing is being executed. there is With this configuration, regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated, so timer interrupt processing can be executed at regular intervals.

Further, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the update period of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even if the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state. With this configuration, even if the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated, so the timer interrupt process can be executed at regular intervals.

Next, the interrupt cycle when the 8-bit counter PTC times out when the interrupt is disabled in the game progress main process will be described using <example (1) showing execution timing of timer interrupt process> in FIG. . A normal period of timer interrupt processing (a period from when the 8-bit counter PTC times out until the next 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T". Note that after the value is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the measurement of "T" (updating the 8-bit counter PTC) is started.

At the timing of t1, an instruction to prohibit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt permitted state) to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At the timing of t3, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state).
At the timing of t3, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register, the game progress main processing is started based on the instruction to allow the interruption of the game progress main processing. After one instruction is executed, timer interrupt processing can be executed. When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t4, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

At timing t5, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t6, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

At timing t7, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t8, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

Here, T is the period from timing t2 to timing t5. Similarly, the period from timing t5 to timing t7 is T. For example, when the timing of t2 is “n×T (“n” is a natural number)”, the timing of t5 can be expressed as “(n+1)×T”. Also, the timing of t7 can be expressed as "(n+2)×T".
Also, the timing of t3 can be expressed as "a specific timing after 'n×T' and before '(n+1)×T'".

First, attention will be paid to the timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t3. Originally, the timer interrupt process executed at timing t3 should have been executed at t2, which is the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process. In other words, the timer interrupt process should have been executed at the timing of t2 if the interruption prohibition state in the main processing of the game progress had not occurred at the timing of t2. That is, since the timing of t2 was the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing was executed at the timing of t3 when the interrupt permission state was entered.

Next, attention will be paid to the timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t5. The timer interrupt process executed at the timing of t5 is executed before "T" elapses from the timing of t3. In other words, the measurement of the interrupt cycle "T" is not started from the timing of t3. The timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t5 is configured to be executed when T has passed from the timing of t2. That is, based on the timeout of the 8-bit counter PTC that continues to update the count even if timer interrupt processing is not executed (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). is configured to run).
In this way, let the timing of t2 be “n×T”, the timing of t3 be “specific timing after “n×T” and before “(n+1)×T”, and the timing of t4 be When "(n+1).times.T" is assumed, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t5. In other words, it is configured such that the timer interrupt process can be executed at the timing of t5.

Similarly, the timer interrupt process executed at the timing of t7 is also executed based on the timeout of the 8-bit counter PTC (the information indicating that the interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). ) is configured to run.
In this way, let the timing of t2 be "n×T", the timing of t3 be "a specific timing after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T"", and the timing of t4 be When "(n+1)×T" is assumed and the timing of t7 is "(n+2)×T", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t7. can be done. In other words, it is configured so that timer interrupt processing can be executed at the timing of t7.

As described above, even if the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed in the original timer interrupt processing cycle (n × T) due to the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing after the timer interrupt processing can be restored to a situation in which timer interrupt processing can be executed when the original timer interrupt processing period arrives (xxT ("x" is a natural number)). As a result, for example, it is possible to reduce the influence (time of timer measurement is long) on timer measurement executed in timer interrupt processing.

Next, the timer interrupt processing when the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out multiple times under the condition that the IFF1 register is 0 will be described using <example (2) showing execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in FIG. .

<Example (2) showing the execution timing of the timer interrupt process> describes the case where the game progress main process runs out of control or the game progress main process takes an unexpected amount of time while interrupts are prohibited in the game progress main process. It is represented. Even in such a case, if the system clock is normal, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated at normal cycles.

At the timing of t1, an instruction to prohibit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt permitted state) to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in the interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At the timing of t3, the 8-bit counter PTC times out again. However, since the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored again in the interrupt wait monitor register. I don't do anything like that. After that, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated.

At the timing of t4, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state).
At the timing of t4, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, the game progress main processing is started based on the instruction to allow the interruption of the game progress main processing. After one instruction is executed, timer interrupt processing can be executed. When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t5, the timer interrupt processing ends and the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

At timing t6, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing is defined as before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately after") ), the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state) while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

At the timing of t7, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing the instruction to enable interrupt in the timer interrupt processing, and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) terminates timer interrupt processing.

Thus, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice (multiple times) between timing t1 and timing t4, the interrupt wait monitor register indicates that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Information is stored once. In FIG. 50, an example in which the 8-bit counter PTC timed out twice during the interrupt disabled state was given. Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the wait monitor register once. After the interrupt disabled state ends, the timer interrupt process is executed once based on the fact that the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times during the interrupt disabled state, the times out are not counted.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out "n"("n" is 2 or more) times during the interrupt disabled state, after the interrupt disabled state changes to the interrupt enabled state, the timer interrupt processing is executed as " It is configured not to be executed (repeatedly) n" times in succession.
By constructing in this manner, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being continuously repeated a plurality of times after the transition from the interrupt permitted state to the interrupt permitted state, and the game progress main processing being unable to be executed during that time. .

In addition, in <example (2) showing execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in FIG. Similarly, the timer interrupt processing may run out of control or take an unexpected amount of time to process the timer interrupt while the interrupt is disabled. Even if the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out "n" ("n" is 2 or more) times during the disabled state, after the interrupt disabled state changes to the interrupt enabled state, the timer interrupt processing will continue to "n". '' times consecutively (repeatedly) (executed only once).

<Processing time for program design>
A program is composed of a plurality of instructions. At this time, the designed processing time from the start of a certain program to the end of a certain program is an instruction (eg, A instruction) related to the start of a certain program to an instruction (eg, Z instruction) related to the end of a certain program. ) can be calculated from the instruction types.

First, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated from the number of states required to execute one instruction and the frequency of the system clock. Specifically, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated by 1/system clock frequency×number of states. Note that the number of states can be read as the number of clocks.
In the following, the time required to execute one instruction will be described using specific instructions when using a 16 MHZ system clock.
(a) DI
Contents of instruction: Instruction to disable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(b) EI
Contents of instruction: Instruction to enable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(c) DEC (HL)
Contents of instruction: 1 is subtracted from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register.
Number of states: 11 states Time required to execute an instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 11 = 0.6875 μS (microseconds)

In this way, even when using the same system clock frequency, the time required to execute one instruction may differ depending on the type of instruction. Moreover, even if the instructions are different, the time required to execute one instruction may be the same. Note that the above instructions are part of a plurality of instructions, and there are many instructions other than the above instructions.
The frequency of the system clock when executing the game progress main process and the number of system clocks when executing the timer interrupt process are the same. Therefore, for example, the time required to execute the "EI" command in the game progress main process and the time required to execute the "EI" command in the timer interrupt process are the same.

In other words, the designed processing time of a certain program can be calculated from the total number of states of a plurality of instructions from the start of a certain program to the end of a certain program. Specifically, it can be calculated by calculating 1/system clock frequency×total number of states. In other words, since the frequency of the system clock is uniform in one gaming machine, a program with a large total number of states has a longer design processing time than a program with a small total number of states. It will happen.

<Designed processing time for timer interrupt processing>
The designed processing time of the timer interrupt process is the time from the start of the timer interrupt process to its end (for example, until the RETI instruction is executed). However, since the instructions to be executed differ depending on the difference in the information stored in the RWM and the difference in the progress of the game, even if the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, the processing time of the timer interrupt processing will be , there is some variation. In other words, since the instructions executed in timer interrupt processing are not necessarily the same for all timer interrupt processing, the total number of states when executing one timer interrupt processing differs. Therefore, when timer interrupt processing is normally executed, the average time from the start to the end of timer interrupt processing is the designed processing time of timer interrupt processing. Note that the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process may also be referred to as the time associated with the timer interrupt process.

<Designed maximum processing time for timer interrupt processing>
The designed maximum time for timer interrupt processing is the same as the designed processing time for timer interrupt processing in that it is the time from the start to the end of timer interrupt processing. Further, as described above, even if the timer interrupt process is executed normally, the processing time of the timer interrupt process varies to some extent. Therefore, the design maximum processing time of timer interrupt processing is defined as the time required for executing an instruction with the largest total number of states from the start to the end of one timer interrupt processing. Note that the designed maximum processing time for timer interrupt processing may also be referred to as the maximum time for timer interrupt processing.

<Designed processing time for interrupt disabled state in game progress main processing>
When there is only one interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process, the designed processing time for the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process is the time from an interrupt disabled instruction (for example, a DI instruction) to an interrupt enabled state. (E.g., EI command) (also referred to as the processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing) (excluding the state from when the power is turned on until the execution of the command to allow interrupt) . However, since the instructions to be executed differ depending on the information stored in the RAM and the progress of the game, the total number of states may differ even if the main game progress process is executed normally. There is Therefore, the processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing varies to some extent. In other words, since the instructions to be executed in the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process are not necessarily the same, the total number of states differs when the interrupt disabled state processing in the main game progress process is executed. Therefore, when the game progress main processing is executed normally, the average processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing is set as the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing. .

In addition, when at least two interrupt prohibition states are provided in the game progress main processing, the design processing time of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the design interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is calculated. The longest processing time is set as the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing. The designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process may also be referred to as the time associated with the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process.

<Designed maximum processing time for interrupt disabled state in game progress main processing>
When there is only one interrupt prohibition state in the main game progress processing, when the instruction with the largest total number of states is executed from the start of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing to the end of the interrupt prohibition state. is the designed maximum processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing.

Further, when at least two interrupt prohibition states are provided in the game progress main processing, the design maximum processing time of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is designed. The longest maximum processing time is set as the design maximum processing time of the interruption prohibited section in the game progress main processing. The designed maximum processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process may also be referred to as the maximum time related to the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress process.

<Relationship between timer interrupt cycle and designed processing time of interrupt disabled state in game progress main processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process is "S'", T>S' is satisfied. It is preferable to configure
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, a plurality of timer interrupt cycles from occurring while the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process is being executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed is reduced) due to the effect of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process. be able to.

<Relationship Between Timer Interrupt Cycle and Design Maximum Processing Time of Interrupt Disabled State in Game Progress Main Processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process is "S", T>S can be established. preferable.
By configuring in this way, compared to the case where T>S'(S' is the designed processing time of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing), the interrupt in the game progress main processing is further improved. It is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the occurrence of multiple timer interrupt cycles while the prohibited state is being executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed is reduced) due to the effect of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process. be able to.

<Relationship between timer interrupt cycle and designed processing time for timer interrupt processing>
It is preferable that T/2>t', where T is the period of timer interrupt processing (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out), and design processing time of timer interrupt processing is t'. In other words, it is preferable to configure the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process to be less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By constructing in this way, the timer interrupt processing is executed when the period of the timer interrupt processing arrives, and then the game progress main processing is performed more than T/2 before the next timer interrupt processing cycle arrives. Can run for long periods of time. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main process can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt process.

<Relationship between timer interrupt cycle and design maximum processing time for timer interrupt processing>
It is preferable that T/2>t, where "T" is the period of timer interrupt processing (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) and "t" is the designed maximum processing time of timer interrupt processing. In other words, it is preferable to set the designed maximum processing time of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By configuring in this way, compared to the case where T/2>t'(t' is the design processing time of the timer interrupt processing), when the cycle of the timer interrupt processing arrives, the After that, the game progress main process can be executed for a period longer than T/2 until the cycle of the next timer interrupt process arrives. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main process can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt process.

<Stage change production>
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a stage change effect (also referred to as a switching effect) for switching the effect stage that can be displayed on the liquid crystal. As a production stage, there are a plurality of types of production stages such as a normal stage and a high-probability stage suggesting a high-probability state in which the probability of winning an AT is higher than that of a normal stage, and a transition from one production stage to a different production stage is provided. It is configured to be able to execute a stage change production at times. With this stage change production, the production stage can be switched smoothly. In addition, there are multiple types of stage change production, and the selection ratio of the production stage to be the transition destination is configured to differ depending on the type of stage change production (for example, a predetermined stage change production is a specific stage change production). For example, the degree of expectation for transitioning to a high-probability stage is set higher than the stage-change effect, or when a specific stage-change effect is executed, the transition is always made to a high-probability stage, etc.). In addition, it is configured to suggest a stay mode depending on the type of stage change effect (details are omitted, but the AT win probability and the number of ceiling games until AT win are different depending on the stay mode) and set values are suggested. You may In addition, production corresponding to the production stage (background image (still image or moving image) display on the liquid crystal, BGM output from the speaker, predetermined lamp lighting pattern, predetermined lamp lighting color, etc.) configured to be executed.

FIG. 51 shows an example of a stage change effect in the present embodiment. UI images (also referred to as UI display, UI, game information image) include UI image A (also referred to as first UI image), UI image B ( UI image C (also referred to as a third UI image) can be displayed. A UI image is an image that can be displayed on a liquid crystal display in the same (or similar) display mode and in the same display area over a plurality of production stages. Is displayed.

Here, UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C will be described in detail.

The UI image A is an image indicating the name of the production stage. In FIG. 51(1), the character "coast stage" is also surrounded by a frame, but it may be composed only of characters without a frame.

UI image B is an image showing the current credit amount. As the display mode of the UI image B, for example, when the MAX bet switch is pressed and the MAX bet process is executed while "50" is displayed as the number of credits, "50→49→48→47" is displayed. It is configured to be updated and displayed one by one at a speed that can be visually recognized by the player. It should be noted that only the number of credits after processing the MAX bet may be displayed, such as "50→47".

The UI image C is an image showing the number of payouts in one game. As for the display mode of the UI image C, for example, when there is a payout of "10" in one game, (1) "0→1→2→...→9→10" can be visually recognized by the player. It is configured to be updated and displayed one by one at a high speed. It should be noted that only the number of payouts such as "0→10" may be displayed. In addition, it may be configured so that "0" is displayed after the number of payouts is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), or when the number of payouts continues to be displayed and a bet operation for the next game is performed (or , and when the operation of the start switch 12 relating to the next game is accepted), "0" may be displayed.

In addition to these, as UI images, the number of games played by one AT, the number of remaining games, and predetermined points used in the game (for example, it is configured so that it can be accumulated according to the execution of the game and the winning combination). , AT lottery is executed when 1000 points are reached), the number of games in normal games, character display, various types of UI images such as an outline for displaying a push order navigation image during AT can be displayed. You may do so.

Further, the liquid crystal is configured to display a background image corresponding to the current production stage, and in FIG. 51(1), the background image corresponding to the coast stage is displayed. In addition, since the UI image is configured to have a higher display priority than the background image (displayed in front), the visibility of the UI image is not lowered by the background image. It is possible to grasp the state of the game at the timing.

In addition, depending on the game state (normal section, advantageous section, RT state, AT, non-AT, chance zone, high probability state, bonus, etc.), the type of UI image that can be displayed on the liquid crystal can be changed, or the display mode of the UI image can be changed. In short, the UI image that can be displayed on the liquid crystal may be appropriately changed according to the game state. By doing so, the current game state can be easily grasped from the UI image.

The flow of the stage change effect in this embodiment will be described.
First, in (1) of FIG. 51, the current production stage is the coast stage, and the start switch 12 is operated (depressed) to start a new game. Next, (2) → (3) → (4), the background image and UI image are blacked out (turned dark) from outside the liquid crystal display area to cover the entire liquid crystal display area. A black image is displayed, making the background image and UI image invisible (it may be made invisible by displaying a black image in front of the background image and UI image, or the background image and UI image may not be visible). It may be made invisible by displaying a black image in the display). After that, the background image is displayed from the inside of the display area of the liquid crystal in order of (5)→(6)→(7), and the background image corresponding to the production stage after transition (after the stage change) is displayed. It should be noted that the UI image A displays "town stage" corresponding to the production stage after transition. In this way, by configuring the background image and the UI image so as not to be visually recognized during at least a part of the period during the stage change performance, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which performance stage the game has shifted to. Also, even if the display mode of the UI image is different before and after the stage change effect, the game can be progressed without discomfort. In addition, when the production stage is switched by executing the stage change production, the name of the production stage after the transition may be output from the speaker. For example, in FIG. 51, a voice saying "Town Stage", which is the production stage after transition, is output.

Note that in the present embodiment, the background image and the UI image may be configured so as not to be visible at least at some timing during the execution period of the stage change effect (the background image and the UI image are always visible during the stage change effect). may be made invisible), and various methods for making the background image and the UI image invisible can be appropriately applied. Also, during a period in which the background image and the UI image are made invisible (for example, the period (4) in FIG. 51), a predetermined image (for example, a predetermined character image, title logo image, etc.) can be displayed. Relatively more advantageous to the player than normal stage change effects It may be configured so that the stage change effect of a chance-up pattern such as a high probability is used. The stage change effect of the chance up pattern and the normal stage change effect may be different types of stage change effect, or may be configured to be similar stage change effect with a part of the effect mode different. .

Regarding the execution period of the stage change effect (time required from start to finish), in the present embodiment, the execution period of the normal stage change effect and the execution period of the chance up pattern stage change effect are the same length. is configured to be By configuring in this manner, the execution end timing of the performance can be made the same between the normal stage change performance and the chance up pattern stage change performance, so that the subsequent game can proceed without any sense of incongruity. It should be noted that the execution period of the stage change effect of the chance up pattern may be longer than the period of execution of the normal stage change effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible not to miss the stage change effect of the chance up pattern. It should be noted that the execution period of the chance-up pattern stage change effect may be shorter than the normal stage change effect execution period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of incompatibility that the end timing of the performance ends relatively quickly when the stage change performance of the chance up pattern is executed, and the sense of incompatibility makes the chance up pattern. The player can perceive that it is a stage change effect.

In addition, the predetermined stage change effect is relatively more advantageous for the player when executed in the second effect mode than when executed in the first effect mode (advantageous effect stage (e.g., there is a high possibility of winning an AT lottery, an AT game number addition lottery, or a bonus). Further, the execution of a predetermined stage change effect is started based on a predetermined stop operation (either of the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop) rather than when the execution is started based on the operation of the start switch 12. It may be configured so that it is relatively advantageous for the player when the game is played. In addition, the production stage and the production mode of the stage change production are made to correspond (in the first production stage, the stage change production is performed in the first production mode, and in the second production stage, the stage change production is performed in the second production mode). , etc.), the player may be more advantageous when the correspondence is different than when the correspondence is not.

Depending on the game situation (game state, effect stage, etc.), the display mode of the UI image (color, shape, size, etc. of the UI image), the display position of the UI image (display area), whether or not the UI image is displayed, It may be configured so that the types of UI images can be different. For example, in game state A, UI image A and UI image B are displayed, but in game state B, only UI image A may be displayed (or the UI image may not be displayed). In state A, UI image A and UI image B are displayed, but in game state B, UI image C and UI image D (not shown) may be displayed. In addition, as the game state A and the game state B, for example, the AT state may be the game state A and the non-AT state (or the state in which the frequency of executing the push order navigation is relatively low) may be the game state B, or the advantageous interval. A certain game state may be game state A, and a game state with a normal section may be game state B. Alternatively, a state where the standby demo screen is displayed may be game state A, and a state where the standby demo screen is not displayed may be game state B. good.

In FIG. 51, UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C are displayed, but the number of UI images to be displayed and the type of UI images to be displayed may be changed as appropriate. For example, the aforementioned UI image D may be newly added, or the UI image displayed before and after the stage change effect may be the same without displaying the UI image A. Further, the UI image A may not be displayed, and an image indicating the name of the current production stage may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the stage change production is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 51, when the stage change effect is executed, all the UI images are configured not to be visible for at least a part of the period. All or part of any UI image may be configured to be invisible.

Next, the execution start and end timings of the stage change effect in this embodiment will be described.
Here, a case will be described in which the operation of the start switch 12 relating to the N+1th game is accepted before the minimum game time elapses from the start of the Nth game, and the stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game. .
(1) All reels start rotating based on the operation of the start switch 12 for the N-th game. It should be noted that the measurement of the minimum playing time starts from the timing when all the reels start rotating.
(2) After that, after all the reels are rotated at a constant speed, the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes valid, and the player stops the left stop switch 13a, the middle stop switch 13b, and the right stop switch 13c. Operation stops all reels. The UI image remains displayed during the N-th game (period from when all reels start rotating to when all reels stop).
(3) Next, the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is operated, but since the minimum game time has not elapsed since the start of reel rotation for the Nth game, the reels do not start rotating. Also, a stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 relating to the N+1th game. In other words, the stage change effect is executed based on the N+1th operation of the start switch 12 even if the minimum game time has not passed. It should be noted that the effect mode of the stage change effect here is the same as the effect mode shown in FIG.
(4) After that, as the stage change effect progresses, the UI image becomes invisible (for example, the mode of (3) in FIG. 51). Note that the UI image continues to be displayed from the N-th game until the UI image becomes invisible due to the stage change effect.
(5) Next, the minimum game time elapses from the start of the reel rotation of the Nth game, and the rotation of the reels associated with the N+1th game starts.
(6) After that, as the stage change effect progresses, the UI image is visibly displayed, and thereafter the state in which the UI image is visibly displayed continues. Note that the UI image may become visible before the minimum time elapses, depending on the time during which the stage change effect is executed.
(7) After that, the execution of the stage change effect ends.
(8) After that, the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the stage change effect is executed based on acceptance of the operation of the start switch 12, and ends after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1-th game is accepted before the minimum game time elapses from the start of rotation of the reels for the N-th game, and the N+1-th game is received. When the stage change effect is executed in , the execution of the stage change effect is completed and the UI image is visually displayed before the operation of the stop switch 13 relating to the N+1th game becomes effective. It is By configuring in this way, the stage change effect is completed at the timing when the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, and the UI image can be visually recognized, so that the player can appropriately grasp the game situation. Then, the game can be progressed without a sense of incongruity.

In addition, before a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) less than the minimum playing time elapses from the start of rotation of the reels related to the N-th game, the operation of the start switch 12 related to the N+1-th game is accepted, and the N+1-th game When the stage change effect is executed in the game, it is assumed that the stage change effect is completed and the UI image is visually displayed before the operation of the stop switch 13 relating to the N+1th game becomes effective. On the other hand, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) less than the minimum playing time has passed from the start of rotation of the reel related to the Nth game and before the minimum playing time has passed, the N+1th game is played. When the operation of the start switch 12 related to is received and the stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game, at the time when the operation of the stop switch 13 related to the N+1th game becomes effective, the stage change effect It may be configured so that the execution is not finished. Even if the operation of the start switch for the (N+1)-th game is received immediately before the minimum game time elapses from the start of the rotation of the N-th reel, the stage change effect is executed before the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective. If the UI image is displayed so that it can be seen after the game ends, the stage change effect execution period becomes extremely short, and the player may miss the stage change effect. , the execution period of the stage change effect can be guaranteed, so that the stage change effect can be appropriately executed so that the player does not miss it.

Further, even when the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum game time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels for the Nth game, the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game is operated. Before it becomes effective, the execution of the stage change effect may be completed and the UI image may be displayed so as to be visible. By configuring in this way, the stage change effect is completed at the timing when the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, and the UI image can be visually recognized, so that the player can appropriately grasp the game situation. Then, the game can be progressed without a sense of incongruity.

Further, when the operation of the start switch 12 related to the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum game time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reel related to the Nth game, the operation of the stop switch 13 related to the N+1th game is valid. It may be configured so that the execution of the stage change effect is not finished at the point in time when it becomes. In this way, when the operation of the start switch 12 relating to the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum game time has elapsed, in other words, when the player is not in a hurry to proceed with the game, When the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, the player can pay more attention to the stage change performance by configuring so that the execution of the stage change performance is not finished.

As for the execution timing of one stage change effect, it is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12, and if it ends with the passage of time, it is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12, and a predetermined stop operation (first stop , 2nd stop, or 3rd stop), it is executed based on a predetermined stop operation (1st stop, 2nd stop, or 3rd stop), and ends with the passage of time If so, it may be configured to have Also, the first stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ends with the lapse of time, while the second stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and stops after a predetermined stop operation. The execution timing may differ depending on the type of stage change effect, such as ending based on (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop).

Further, regarding the UI images, it may be configured such that all the UI images are visible while the demo screen is being displayed, and the UI image A is invisible (not displayed or displayed more than the demo screen). lower priority), and UI image B (image indicating the number of credits) and UI image C (image indicating the number of payouts) may be displayed so as to be visible. With this configuration, the player can appropriately grasp the state of the game regardless of whether the demo screen is being displayed.
In addition, all UI images may be configured to be invisible while the demo screen is displayed, or all UI images may be visible for a predetermined period while the demo screen is being displayed. Although displayed, all UI images may be configured to be invisible during a specific period different from the predetermined period during display of the demo screen. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display of the demonstration screen.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute an effect A in which the background image corresponding to the effect stage cannot be visually recognized (the effect may be finished in one game, or may be a continuous effect executed over a plurality of games), and the effect stage is formed. In the situation where the coast stage is set, if the effect A is executed, the execution of the effect A will be completed at a predetermined timing after the end of the N-th game (timing at which the final stop operation is completed). , the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the processing related to the end of the game is completed, the timing when the bet for the N+1th game is made, the timing when the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted, etc.) The background image corresponding to the coast stage is displayed again without executing the stage change effect, and the background image is displayed again (if the background image is a moving image, the background image is displayed from the beginning and effect A is executed. It is conceivable to display the continuation of the previously displayed background image.), the image indicating the name of the production stage may be displayed. The image indicating the name of the production stage may be displayed as a UI image, or may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) before ending the display. It should be noted that when the same background image is displayed again, the name of the production stage may be configured not to be output by voice from the speaker, or the name of the production stage may be output by voice from the speaker. .

In addition, it may be configured so that the stage change effect can be executed after the execution of the effect A is completed. stage change effect executed at the timing when the process related to the end of the game is completed, the timing when the bet for the next game is made, the timing when the operation of the start switch 12 for the next game is accepted, etc. , the stage change effect executed under other circumstances may be configured to be a stage change effect with a different display mode. With this configuration, for example, when a player starts a new game and a stage change effect that can be executed after the effect A is executed in the first game is executed, the effect A is continued until the previous game. It is possible to accurately grasp the state of the game, such as being able to grasp what was being executed.

In addition, even if the image indicating the name of the current production stage is not set as a UI image but is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the execution of the stage change production, and then disappears, the image may not be displayed. When it is determined that the stage change effect and the above-described effect A are executed in the game (in this case, the effect A is executed after the stage change effect is completed), the current effect stage may be configured not to display the image showing the name of By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately switch the effects.

In addition, a predetermined timing after the end of the final game of the advantageous section (a game that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section and becomes a game of the normal section from the next game) is performed, the timing when the start switch 12 related to the next game is operated (depressed), etc.), the stage change effect may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clarify the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section, and it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the advantageous section continues.

In addition, a predetermined timing after the end of the final game of the normal section (the game that satisfies the transition conditions to the advantageous section and becomes the game of the advantageous section from the next game) is performed, the timing when the start switch 12 related to the next game is operated (depressed), etc.), the stage change effect may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clarify the shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, and it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game despite being in the advantageous section.

In addition, as a production stage, there is a predetermined production stage that is set only in the normal section and a specific production stage that is set only in the advantageous section, and the situation in which the predetermined production stage is set in the normal section Below, when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are satisfied and the transition to the advantageous section is completed (timing when the final stop operation is completed, timing when the final stop operation is performed and processing related to the end of the game is completed, bets related to the next game are A stage change effect may be executed at the timing at which the start switch 12 is operated for the next game, etc., and a transition from a predetermined effect stage to a specific effect stage may be performed. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp whether or not the transition to the advantageous section has occurred if the player is paying attention to the production stage.

A predetermined performance stage is configured to be set even when the power is turned off in a predetermined situation in which the power is off in an advantageous section and in a non-AT state, and the power is restored without changing the setting. A stage change effect may be executed before a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) of games are executed, and a transition from a predetermined effect stage to a specific effect stage may be performed. In this embodiment, when the setting is changed, the game is always started from the normal section. The flow of the game until the stage change performance is executed can be made similar to the game flow, thereby making it possible to prevent the game player from easily finding out whether or not the setting has been changed. In addition, in this embodiment, when a game with an average of less than 2 games is executed in the normal section, the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, so that the timing at which the stage change effect is first executed after turning on the power is It is configured so that the timing is substantially the same when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

In addition, the type of stage change effect (or the mode of stage change effect) is different between the stage change effect executed in the game in the normal section and the stage change effect executed in the game in the advantage zone. may By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily determine whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section by visually recognizing the stage change effect.

Also, in the game in which the stage change effect is executed, it may be configured so that the effect other than the stage change effect is not executed. Also, in the game in which the stage change effect is executed, the effect based on the operation of the stop switch 13 may not be executed (the effect not based on the stop operation may be executed) except for the stage change effect. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the stage change effect.

Further, as the stage change performance, a stage change performance A that can be executed after the end of the predetermined continuous performance and a stage change performance B that can be executed after the end of the predetermined continuous performance may be provided. In this case, whether stage change effect A can be executed or not is determined not based on the internal lottery result, but whether stage change effect B can be executed or not is determined based on the internal lottery result. different ratios). Note that the stage change effect A and the stage change effect B may be configured to have different effect modes, or may be configured to have the same effect mode.

Next, the volume of the effect stage BGM, the stage change effect BGM, the error notification sound, etc. will be described.
In this embodiment, the volume level can be adjusted, and when the volume level is high, the volume output from the speaker is relatively high, and when the volume level is low, the volume output from the speaker is relatively low. is configured to be Although the following description assumes that the volume level is set to the maximum value, the configuration may be the same even if the volume level is set to a value other than the maximum value.
It should be noted that it may be configured to have a sound whose volume output from the speaker depends on the volume level and a sound whose volume output from the speaker does not depend on the volume level. For example, the volume of the error notification sound that reports the first error (recoverable error) depends on the volume level, but the volume of the error notification sound that reports the second error (unrecoverable error) depends on the volume level. It may be configured not to. Note that the distinction between the first error and the second error is not limited to whether it is a recoverable error or an unrecoverable error, and can be set as appropriate.

First, in the "non-AT mode", at least the coastal stage and the town stage can be set as the production stage, and the production stage BGM corresponding to the current production stage is output from the speaker. there is For example, on the coast stage, BGM during the coast stage is output from the speaker, and on the town stage, BGM during the town stage is output from the speaker. The effect stage BGM is a sound that is continuously (repeatedly) output during a period in which sounds such as a predetermined effect sound and a predetermined error notification sound are not output. Note that the effect stage BGM may be configured to end output when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed after the game ends, or when a demo screen is displayed.

In addition, the stage change production A or the stage change production B can be executed on either the coastal stage or the town stage, and when the stage change production is executed, a sound corresponding to the stage change production is output from the speaker. configured to be output. The sound volume of the stage change effect is configured so as not to depend on the effect stage before the stage change effect is executed. It should be noted that the output of the stage change effect sound may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute) has elapsed after the end of the game, or when a demo screen is displayed.

In addition, the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change production (stage change production A or stage change production B) is higher than the maximum volume of the production stage BGM (BGM during the coastal stage or BGM during the town stage) during "non-AT". is configured to be large. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the stage change effect. In addition, when the stage change performance B is relatively more advantageous for the player than the stage change performance A, the stage change performance B is executed rather than the maximum volume of the sound when the stage change performance A is executed. The maximum sound volume of the time sound may be configured to be larger, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the execution of the stage change performance B.例文帳に追加

In addition, during "non-AT", the average volume of the sound of the stage change production (stage change production A or stage change production B) is higher than the average volume of the production stage BGM (BGM during the coastal stage or BGM during the town stage). is configured to be large. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the stage change effect. In addition, when the stage change performance B is relatively more advantageous for the player than the stage change performance A, the stage change performance B is executed rather than the maximum volume of the sound when the stage change performance A is executed. The maximum sound volume of the time sound may be configured to be larger, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the execution of the stage change performance B.例文帳に追加

Next, during "AT", at least the volcano stage can be set as the production stage, and the production stage BGM corresponding to the current production stage is output from the speaker. For example, in the volcano stage, BGM during the volcano stage is output from the speaker as the BGM of the volcano stage. Also, it may be configured to execute the stage change effect even during "AT", and in this case, the maximum volume of the stage change effect sound is larger than the maximum volume of the effect stage BGM. You may By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change effect as in the case of "non-AT".

Of the sounds output during "AT", the sound with the highest volume is the navigation voice output when the push order navigation is executed (for example, the voice for navigating the push order such as "Left!") and the character may be configured to be a conversational voice for conversation.

Next, regarding the "error notification sound", regardless of the production stage or game state, a predetermined error (for example, an error related to the hopper) occurs (the game machine detects the error) and notifies the predetermined error. output when When an error is notified, an image showing the content of the error is displayed on the liquid crystal at the same (or substantially the same) timing as the output of the error notification sound.

In this embodiment, BGM during an error and an error voice are output as sounds during notification of a predetermined error. The error voice is a voice such as "Please call the store clerk."

Also, with respect to a predetermined error, the maximum volume of the error voice is higher than the maximum volume of the BGM during the error. If the maximum sound volume of the BGM during an error is louder, the player may not be able to accurately hear whether it is an error notification or an effect. can be accurately conveyed to the player.

Further, for a predetermined error, the average volume of the error voice is higher than the average volume of the BGM during the error. If the average sound volume of BGM during an error is larger, the player may not be able to accurately hear whether it is an error notification or a performance. can be accurately conveyed to the player.

Although the hopper-related error was exemplified as the predetermined error, it is only an example, and may be applied to other errors such as selector-related errors. It may be applied to errors and is configured to satisfy the above configuration with at least one error.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "non-AT", and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is It is louder than the average sound volume of the production stage BGM of "non-AT". In addition, the maximum sound volume of the production stage BGM for "during AT" is higher than the maximum volume of sound for stage change production "not during AT", and the average volume of BGM for the production stage "during AT" The sound volume is higher than the average sound volume of the sound of the stage change effect "not during AT". By configuring in this way, the game can be played without impairing the exhilarating feeling during the AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM during "AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the BGM during error, and the average volume of the production stage BGM during "AT" is the average volume of the BGM during error. louder than the volume. In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is the average volume of the error voice. is larger than With this configuration, when a predetermined error occurs during AT, the BGM during AT is output at a volume higher than the predetermined error annunciation sound after the predetermined error is cancelled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the background music during AT from becoming inaudible, and to progress the game without impairing the refreshing feeling during AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "not in AT" is lower than the maximum volume of the error BGM, and the average volume of the production stage BGM "not in AT" is the same as that of the error BGM. Lower than average volume. In addition, the maximum volume of the "non-AT" production stage BGM is lower than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the "non-AT" production stage BGM is the average of the error voice. is lower than the volume of In addition, the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change effect "not during AT" is lower than the maximum volume of the BGM during the error, and the average volume of the sound for the stage change effect "not during AT" is It is smaller than the average volume of BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change effect "non-AT" is lower than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the sound for the stage change effect "non-AT" is equal to the error voice. Lower than the average volume of medium voices. With this configuration, when a predetermined error occurs during non-AT, a predetermined error notification sound is output with a louder volume than before the predetermined error notification. It can make it easier to notice that an error has occurred.

Note that in the present embodiment, the display priority of the image related to the stage change effect is set higher than the display priority of the UI image, so that the UI image can be viewed at least part of the period during the stage change effect. However, by configuring the display priority of images related to the stage change effect to be lower than the display priority of the UI image, the UI image can be viewed even during the stage change effect. may
Moreover, it may be configured to execute a full-screen effect in which a predetermined display is performed on the entire surface of the liquid crystal, which is a different effect from the stage change effect. As a full-screen effect, for example, the image of a predetermined character and the famous lines of the predetermined character are displayed on the entire surface of the liquid crystal display, suggesting that the player has won a so-called rare role such as a cherry role or a watermelon role. , or when it is suggested that there is a possibility that advantageous benefits may be given to the player, such as a transfer lottery to AT or an addition of AT. It should be noted that the full-screen effects may be configured to have a plurality of types of full-screen effects. By setting the display priority of the image related to the full-screen effect to be higher than the display priority of the UI image, the UI image may not be visible during at least a part of the full-screen effect. Alternatively, the UI image may be visible even during the full-screen effect by setting the display priority of the image related to the full-screen effect to be lower than the display priority of the UI image.
In addition, the stage change effect execution period (time required from start to end) may be configured to be longer than the full screen effect execution period, or the stage change effect execution period may be longer than the full screen effect execution period. It may be configured to be shorter than the execution period of the screen effect.

Further, the display priority relationship between the image related to the stage change effect and the UI image and the display priority relationship between the image related to the full screen effect and the UI image may be configured as follows.
(1) Display priority of image related to stage change effect>Display priority of UI image and Display priority of image related to full screen effect>Display priority of UI image (that is, at least one during stage change effect) The UI image cannot be seen during both the partial period and at least a part of the full screen effect)
(2) Display priority of image related to stage change effect>Display priority of UI image and Display priority of image related to full screen effect<Display priority of UI image (that is, at least one during stage change effect) The UI image cannot be seen during the part period, but the UI image can be seen during the full screen production)
(3) Display priority of image related to stage change effect <Display priority of UI image and Display priority of image related to full screen effect> Display priority of UI image (that is, UI image during stage change effect) can be seen, but the UI image cannot be seen at least part of the time during full screen production)
(4) Display priority of image related to stage change effect<Display priority of UI image and Display priority of image related to full screen effect<Display priority of UI image (that is, during stage change effect and full screen effect) The UI image can be seen in any of the screen effects)
It should be noted that the relationship may always be one of (1) to (4) regardless of the game situation, the type of stage change effect to be executed, or the type of full screen effect, Depending on the game situation, the type of stage change effect to be executed, and the type of full-screen effect, which of the relationships (1) to (4) should be used may be changed as appropriate.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to each effect.

In addition, if it is possible to play with 2 bets and play with 3 bets (games with 2 bets have a lower ball output rate than games with 3 bets), stage change effects may be executed in a three-bet game, but may not be executed in a two-bet game. With such a configuration, since the game with the two-bet does not give the player a sense of expectation, the player can be made to recognize that the game with the three-bet is more advantageous.

In addition, when it is possible to play a game with two bets and a game with three bets (a game with two bets has a lower ball output rate than a game with three bets), the UI image is , may be displayed in a three-bet game, but may not be displayed in a two-bet game. By configuring in this way, since the game with two bets gives the player a sense of incongruity, the player can be made to recognize that the game with three bets is more advantageous.

In addition, when it is possible to play a game with two bets and a game with three bets (a game with two bets has a lower ball output rate than a game with three bets), the UI image is , may be configured to be displayed in a game with a 3-coin bet and a game with a 2-coin bet. By configuring in this way, the same UI image as that for a three-coin bet is displayed even in a two-coin bet game. In the game, the stage change effect is not executed, etc.), so that the player can not be given a sense of expectation. It can be made to recognize that it is not a failure.

<Display mode of NEXT image>
In the present embodiment, the result of a predetermined lottery (lottery for whether to shift to AT, lottery for whether to shift to chance zone, AT add-on lottery, AT add-on special zone (AT add-on lottery) When executing a continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of games as an effect to notify of whether to shift to a period with a high probability of It is configured to be able to display an image (sometimes referred to as a NEXT image or a continuation image) indicating that the continuation of the effect will be executed. The display mode of the NEXT image will be described below.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of continuous effects in which NEXT images are displayed. In FIG. 52, the game progresses from "1" on the upper left to "7" on the lower right. After "7", "8" is displayed when an advantageous result is reported to the player, and "9" is displayed when an unfavorable result is reported to the player after "7". Also, "S" in the drawing indicates the start switch 12, and "white circle" or "black circle" indicates the stop switch 13. As shown in FIG.

At "1" in FIG. 52, the start switch 12 is operated (depressed), and characters of the continuous effect title "Repel the shark!" has started. At this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle", indicating that the operation of the stop switch 13 is effective. Hereinafter, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle", it means that the stop switch 13 has already been operated and the operation of the stop switch is disabled.

At "2" in FIG. 52, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which the shark swims from right to left is displayed as an effect corresponding to the first stop operation.

At "3" in FIG. 52, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which the shark swims from left to right is displayed as an effect corresponding to the second stop operation.

At "4" in FIG. 52, the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a rippling effect is displayed as an effect corresponding to the third stop operation. Here, since the first game of the continuous effect is completed and the continuation of the continuous effect is executed by operating the start switch 12 relating to the next game, the characters "NEXT" are displayed as the NEXT image at the lower right of the liquid crystal. .

In "4" of FIG. 52, the display of "NEXT" is displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal after receiving the third stop operation. After accepting, the character "NEXT" is displayed on the lower left of the liquid crystal, and the character "NEXT" slides from the lower left of the liquid crystal to the lower right of the liquid crystal, and when it moves to the lower right position of the liquid crystal, "NEXT" may be displayed in such a manner that the characters of . Further, in the case of such a configuration, when the characters "NEXT" are displayed so as to slide and move from the lower left to the lower right of the liquid crystal (while the characters "NEXT" are moving) is less visible than when it is stopped at the bottom right of the liquid crystal (characters are displayed faintly, a different image is displayed instead of the "NEXT" characters, or It may be configured to be displayed in such a manner that it is displayed with an effect image with a high display priority. Generally, the player progresses the game in the order of the start switch 12→left reel 8a→middle reel 8b→right reel 8c. You can make progress feel smoother. In addition, the NEXT image is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds can be exemplified, but a different time may be set depending on the continuous effect) after the effect corresponding to the reception of the third stop operation is executed. is configured as follows.

At "5" in FIG. 52, the start switch 12 is operated and the second game of the continuous effect is started. Here, an effect is displayed in which a character on a boat confronts a shark.

At "6" in FIG. 52, the first stop operation is performed with respect to the stop switch 13, and an effect in which a shark attacks is displayed as an effect corresponding to the first stop operation.

At "7" in FIG. 52, the second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and as an effect corresponding to the second stop operation, the display area of the liquid crystal is divided into two, and the character attacks with a spear and the shark attacks. Comes with a rendition and is displayed.

At "8" and "9" in FIG. 52, the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image regarding the result of the continuous effect (predetermined lottery result) is displayed as the effect corresponding to the third stop operation. It is At "8" in FIG. 52, it is notified that the player has won the predetermined lottery. This is a case of informing that the player has not been selected, and the text "Lose...?" and the image of the shark are displayed.

In FIG. 52, the "NEXT" image is displayed at the bottom right of the liquid crystal as shown at "4" in FIG. 52, and the image "Repel!" is displayed at the bottom left of the liquid crystal as shown at "8" in FIG. , and "9" in FIG. 52, the image of "Defeated...?" is displayed on the upper left of the liquid crystal, and is configured to be displayed in different display areas of the liquid crystal. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the images have different meanings.

In addition, in a plurality of different continuous effects, the images for notifying that the predetermined lottery of the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect have been won have different display modes (different characters, different display positions, etc.). , and the NEXT images of the first continuous effect and the NEXT image of the second continuous effect may be configured to have the same display mode. For example, when notifying that a predetermined lottery has been won as a result of the first continuous effect, "Repel" is displayed on the lower left of the liquid crystal to notify that the predetermined lottery has been won as a result of the second continuous effect. In this case, the display mode is such that "Victory" is displayed on the upper right of the liquid crystal, and it is conceivable that the display modes of the NEXT images of the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect are the same. In the case of such a display mode, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the NEXT image indicates the continuation of the continuous effect between different continuous effects.

In addition, although FIG. 52 shows an example in which the effect is switched for each stop operation of the player, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect is configured to progress as time elapses after the start switch 12 is operated and the game starts. may For example, even if the stop switch 13 is not operated to stop after "1" in FIG. 52, the effect progresses with the lapse of time, and the effect may progress to "4" in FIG.

<BGM during continuous production>
Next, the BGM output during the continuous effect will be described based on the continuous effect explained with reference to FIG. The flow of the continuous effect in FIG. 52 is omitted because it is as described above.

When indicated by "1" in FIG. 52 (when the start switch 12 is operated and the first game of the continuous performance is started), a predetermined continuous performance BGM corresponding to the continuous performance is output. In addition, when "1" in FIG. 52, BGM corresponding to the effect that the continuous effect starts is output, and at the timing of "2" in FIG. BGM corresponding to the performance may be output.

After that, the game progresses with the first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation ("2" to "4" in FIG. 52), but the continuous effect BGM is continuously output. Here, after the third stop operation is performed, the next game start operation (insertion of the first medal, operation of the 1-bet switch, operation of the MAX bet switch, operation of the start switch 12, etc.) is performed. If not, the effect displayed in response to the third stop operation (the effect displayed by the third stop operation is looped in a situation where the effect cannot proceed any more) and the NEXT image remain displayed. Thus, the BGM during continuous production is also continuously output (when the BGM during continuous production is reproduced to the end, it returns to the beginning and is reproduced in a loop). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from leaving the seat during the continuous performance, which may result in an advantageous result for the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent another player from easily taking a seat when the player is away for a restroom break or the like.

In addition, if the demo screen is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed without any bet operation or settlement operation after the third stop operation is performed and all reels are stopped, the demo screen will be displayed. When it is displayed, the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped and the BGM in the demo screen may be output instead, or the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped when the demo screen is displayed. It may be silent. Further, when the sub-switch 20 is operated at a predetermined timing before a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after the third stop operation is performed and the full reel stops, and the menu screen is displayed, the menu screen is displayed. When is displayed, the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped and the BGM in the menu screen may be output instead, or the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped when the menu screen is displayed. may be silenced.

In addition, even if the demo screen is displayed immediately after the third stop operation is performed and the adjustment operation is performed after all reels are stopped, the BGM during continuous production is output when the demo screen is displayed. may be stopped and the BGM in the demonstration screen may be output instead, or when the demonstration screen is displayed, the output of the BGM being continuously produced may be stopped to silence.

In addition, the demo screen may be configured not to be displayed during the continuous effect. In this case, after the third stop operation is performed and all reels are stopped, no bet operation or settlement operation is performed for a predetermined time. When (for example, 60 seconds) has passed, the volume of the BGM during the continuous performance may be lowered, or the volume of the BGM during the continuous performance may be silenced.

Further, the menu screen may be configured not to be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during the continuous effect. In this case, the sub-switch 20 is operated after the third stop operation is performed and all reels are stopped. However, the menu screen is not displayed, and the BGM being continuously produced is continuously output. After that, the demo screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since all reels were stopped, or the demo screen may not be displayed.

Subsequently, at timing "5" in FIG. 52, the start switch 12 is operated and the second game of the continuous effect is started.

After that, the game progresses with the first stop operation, the second stop operation (“6” to “7” in FIG. 52) (the output of the BGM during the continuous effect is continued), and the third stop operation (see FIG. 52). 52 "8" or "9") is performed, and when an image related to the result of the continuous effect (sometimes referred to as a result image) is displayed as the effect corresponding to the third stop operation, the BGM during the continuous effect is displayed. The output is stopped, and BGM or SE (sound effect) relating to the result of the continuous production is output. Note that once the BGM or SE related to the result of the continuous effect is output, it does not loop, and the output ends when the reproduction time elapses. In addition, as BGM or SE related to the result of the continuous effect, when a predetermined lottery is won, BGM or SE indicating winning (for example, SE with an impression of lively, bright, flashy) is output. It is configured to output BGM or SE (for example, an SE with an impression of disappointment, darkness, or somberness) when not winning, and SE indicating winning when set to the same sound volume level. , may be configured to be louder than the volume of SE indicating non-winning.

In this way, during the continuous effect, the BGM during the continuous effect is continuously output while the NEXT image is being displayed, but the BGM is stopped while the image relating to the result of the continuous effect is being displayed. . When the result of the continuous performance is displayed in this way, unlike the middle of the continuous performance, the sound is silenced, so that the final game of the continuous performance can be clearly notified.

<Display Mode of NEXT Image and Images Concerning Results of Continuous Effects>
Next, the display mode of the NEXT image of each continuous effect and the image regarding the result of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the flow of a continuous effect (sometimes referred to as a second continuous effect) different from the continuous effect (sometimes referred to as a first continuous effect) shown in FIG. In FIG. 53, the game progresses from "1" on the upper left to "7" on the lower right. After "7", "8" is displayed when an advantageous result is reported to the player, and "9" is displayed when an unfavorable result is reported to the player after "7". Also, "S" in the drawing indicates the start switch 12, and "white circle" or "black circle" indicates the stop switch 13. As shown in FIG.

At "1" in FIG. 53, the start switch 12 is operated (depressed), and characters of the title of the continuous effect "Let the flowers bloom!" has started. At this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle", indicating that the operation of the stop switch 13 is effective. Hereinafter, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle", it means that the stop switch 13 has already been operated and the operation of the stop switch is disabled.

At "2" in FIG. 53, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image of the ground where nothing is blooming is displayed as an effect in response to the first stop operation.

At "3" in FIG. 53, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which flower buds are appearing is displayed as an effect corresponding to the second stop operation.

At "4" in FIG. 53, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which flowers do not bloom and clouds flow is displayed as an effect in response to the third stop operation. Here, since the first game of the continuous effect is completed and the continuation of the continuous effect is executed by operating the start switch 12 relating to the next game, the characters "NEXT" are displayed as the NEXT image at the lower right of the liquid crystal. .

In "4" of FIG. 53, the display of "NEXT" is displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal after receiving the third stop operation. After accepting, the character "NEXT" is displayed on the lower left of the liquid crystal, and the character "NEXT" slides from the lower left of the liquid crystal to the lower right of the liquid crystal, and when it moves to the lower right position of the liquid crystal, "NEXT" may be displayed in such a manner that the characters of . Further, in the case of such a configuration, when the characters "NEXT" are displayed so as to slide and move from the lower left to the lower right of the liquid crystal (while the characters "NEXT" are moving) is less visible than when it is stopped at the bottom right of the liquid crystal (characters are displayed faintly, a different image is displayed instead of the "NEXT" characters, or It may be configured to be displayed in such a manner that it is displayed with an effect image with a high display priority. Generally, the player progresses the game in the order of the start switch 12→left reel 8a→middle reel 8b→right reel 8c. You can make progress feel smoother. In addition, the NEXT image is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds can be exemplified, but a different time may be set depending on the continuous effect) after the effect corresponding to the reception of the third stop operation is executed. is configured as follows.

At "5" in FIG. 53, the start switch 12 is operated and the second game of the continuous effect is started. Here, an effect is displayed in which flowers do not bloom and rain clouds flow.

At "6" in FIG. 53, the first stop operation is performed with respect to the stop switch 13, and an effect in which flowers are not blooming and it is raining is displayed as an effect corresponding to the first stop operation.

At "7" in FIG. 53, the second stop operation is performed with respect to the stop switch 13, and as an effect in response to the second stop operation, flowers are not blooming and rain accompanied by thunder is displayed.

At "8" and "9" in FIG. 53, the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image regarding the result of the continuous effect (predetermined lottery result) is displayed as the effect corresponding to the third stop operation. It is In "8" of FIG. 53, it is a case of notifying that a predetermined lottery has been won. This is the case of notifying that the lottery has not been won, and the characters "Sorry!?" and the image of the flower bud are displayed.

Here, when comparing the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect, the display mode of the NEXT image is configured to be the same, but the display mode of the image related to the result of the continuous effect ("repel" in the first continuous effect) !” or “Defeated...?” image, and in the second continuous effect, the image “Blossoming!”

Games that notify the results of continuous effects often execute effects that are important for gaming machines (so-called selling points of gaming machines). Interestingness can be improved by changing the display mode of the image regarding the result of the production.

Also, although not shown, in the game following the game in which the result of the continuous effect has been notified, if it is notified that the predetermined lottery has been won, a second game clearly indicating that it has been won 1 After a specific effect (for example, display of "Bonus confirmed" or "Congratulations!", lighting of a predetermined lamp on the gaming machine in rainbow colors, etc.) is performed, and it is announced that the player has not won the predetermined lottery. If so, a second specific effect (for example, darkening the liquid crystal display, performing a stage change effect, etc.) indicating that the continuous effect has ended in failure is performed, and the background image of the normal game state is displayed. Here, the first specific effect is configured to give a brighter impression than the second specific effect.

Further, in FIGS. 52 and 53, the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect are each executed over two games, and the NEXT image is displayed once each. For example, the first continuous effect is configured to be executed over a maximum of three games, and configured so that the NEXT image can be displayed twice in total after the third stop operation in the first game and after the third stop operation in the second game. You may That is, the NEXT image may be displayed twice at maximum in the first continuous effect, and the NEXT image may be displayed once in the second continuous effect.

When configured in this way, the number of times the NEXT image is displayed is greater in the first continuous effect than in the second continuous effect, and the degree of expectation for winning a predetermined lottery is higher.

Further, in the first continuous effect, the expectation of winning the predetermined lottery is higher when the NEXT image is displayed twice than when the NEXT image is displayed once.

In this way, it is configured such that the greater the number of times the NEXT image is displayed, the higher the degree of expectation of winning the predetermined lottery. By configuring in this way, when the NEXT image is displayed, not only can the presentation be continued, but also the expectation of the continuous presentation can be aroused. In the NEXT image when the NEXT image is displayed multiple times, the first NEXT image and the second NEXT image may be the same NEXT image, or the second NEXT image may be the first NEXT image. It may be larger than the image, and the first NEXT image and the second NEXT image may be composed of different colors for the NEXT characters and the surrounding colors.

<Display priority of NEXT image and UI image>
Further, when the above-described UI image is configured to be displayed, the UI image and the NEXT image displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In this case, the display priority of the NEXT image is higher than the display priority of the UI image. In this way, by emphasizing the display relating to the continuous performance that affects the profit of the player, it is possible to concentrate the results of the continuous performance on the player.

Also, the display priority of the NEXT image may be lower than the display priority of the UI image. By configuring in this way, the player can appropriately grasp the state of the game even during the continuous performance.
Also, the display areas of the NEXT image and the UI image may be different display areas so that the images do not overlap each other. By configuring in this way, the player can appropriately grasp both the progress of the continuous effect and the game.

<Display area for telops and NEXT images during continuous production>
Next, the display area of the telop and the NEXT image during the continuous effect will be described.

In the present embodiment, a telop (hereinafter sometimes referred to as telop display, telop effect, subtitles, subtitle effect, or text information) refers to characters' lines and narration according to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display. It refers to performance.

In the continuous effect shown in FIG. 52 or FIG. 53, a telop relating to the continuous effect may be displayed during the continuous effect. The display of the telop is displayed according to the progress of the continuous production that changes in chronological order. In addition, when the progress of the continuous effect changes according to the operation or stop operation of the start switch 12, a telop may be displayed according to the operation or stop operation of the start switch 12.

Also, the telop is displayed in the lower display area in the liquid crystal, and the size of the telop display area varies depending on the number of characters to be displayed. In addition, the display area of the telop is configured so that there is a display area of the NEXT image in a straight line in the left-right direction.

Here, the telop display and the NEXT image are configured so that the display areas do not overlap. Specifically, in a game during continuous performance in which the NEXT image is displayed, a telop is displayed with a relatively shorter number of characters than in a game during continuous performance in which the NEXT image is not displayed, and is configured so as not to overlap the NEXT image. On the other hand, although not shown, in the game in which the result of the continuous effect is notified, the NEXT image is not displayed, so the telop is displayed with a relatively longer number of characters than in the game during the continuous effect in which the NEXT image is displayed. may Also, if the telop has a large number of characters, the telop may be displayed over a plurality of lines so that the NEXT image and the display area of the telop do not overlap. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image and the telop.

In FIG. 54, the telop consists of four characters "What?"

When the NEXT image and the telop are displayed at the same time, the NEXT image may be displayed with an effect at a predetermined period, while the telop may be a fixed image without the effect. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image with the telop.

Further, when displaying a telop in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, the NEXT image may be displayed at a predetermined timing after the telop is displayed.

Also, the display of the NEXT image and the telop may be configured so that the display does not end with the lapse of time. When configured in this way, during the continuous effect, from a predetermined timing after the end of the game (the timing when the third stop operation is received, the timing when all the reels are stopped, the timing when the payout process is finished, etc.) to a predetermined time ( For example, it is configured so that it does not shift to the demo screen even after one minute has passed, and is configured to continue displaying the NEXT image and telop until the next game start operation (bet operation, start switch 12 operation, etc.) is performed. You may In addition, even during the continuous performance, the demo screen is displayed when a predetermined time elapses from a predetermined timing after the end of the game, and the NEXT image and the telop continue to be displayed until the demo screen is displayed. The display of the NEXT image and the telop may be terminated at the timing of transition to . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image and the telop, and it is possible to make it easier to grasp the state of the game.

Further, when the number of telop characters to be displayed in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed is large, the telop may be displayed first, and then the NEXT image may be displayed after the display of the telop is completed. With this configuration, the period during which the NEXT image is displayed and the period during which the telop is displayed can be made different. can be displayed in

The display area of the NEXT image and the display area of the telop may be configured to overlap, but in this case, the display priority of the NEXT image should be higher than that of the telop. preferred. By configuring in this way, the player can appropriately grasp that the continuous effect will continue in the next game.

<Display mode until the NEXT image is displayed>
Next, the flow until the NEXT image is displayed will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 55, when the NEXT image is displayed, an unrecognizable character (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a slide image) displays a trajectory moving from the lower left to the lower right of the liquid crystal, and the slide image is displayed on the right side of the liquid crystal. It shows a case where the NEXT image is displayed when moving downward. The slide images may be images such as "1" to "4" in FIG. 55 that cannot be recognized as characters or objects ("1" to "4" in FIG. 55 are images showing afterimages), Images of specific objects other than characters such as "5" to "8" in FIG. 55 (images of baseballs in "5" to "8" in FIG. 55) may be used.

At "1" or "5" in FIG. 55, in a game in which the NEXT image is displayed, after receiving the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, after time t1 has passed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or when the start switch 12 is After the time t1 has passed since the operation, a slide image is displayed on the lower left of the liquid crystal.

At "2" or "6" in FIG. 55, in a game in which the NEXT image is displayed, the liquid crystal The slide image has moved to near the center of the bottom. Note that t2>t1.

At "3" or "7" in FIG. 55, in a game in which the NEXT image is displayed, after the time t3 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13 or after the time t3 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated, the liquid crystal The slide image has moved to the bottom right of . Note that t3>t2.

At "4" or "8" in FIG. 55, in a game in which the NEXT image is displayed, after the time t4 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13 or after the time t4 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated, the slide The display of the image ends, and the NEXT image is displayed on the lower right of the liquid crystal. Note that t4>t3.

By moving the slide image from the lower left to the lower right of the liquid crystal in this way, the player's attention can be attracted, so that the player can recognize the NEXT image after the slide image is displayed.

Further, the display area of the slide image and the display area of the push order navigation image may be configured so that at least a portion thereof overlaps. Further, the display area of the NEXT image and the display area of the push order navigation may be configured so that at least a part thereof overlaps. However, in this case, the slide image and the NEXT image are displayed after the third stop operation.

With this configuration, the display of the push-order navigation image ends when the third stop operation is performed, so that the push-order navigation image and the slide image or the push-order navigation image and the NEXT image are displayed in an overlapping manner. Therefore, the push order navigation image, the slide image, and the NEXT image can all be displayed without lowering the visibility.

In addition, the display of the slide image and the telop is configured so that at least a part of the display area overlaps, and there are cases where the display overlaps at the same time. The display priority of the slide image may be higher than the display priority of the telop, or conversely, the display priority of the telop may be higher than the display priority of the slide image.

In addition, the NEXT image and the image related to the result of the continuous effect (for example, the image of "Repel!" As for the timing of ending the display, the display is configured not to end depending on the elapsed time after the display of both the NEXT image and the image related to the result of the continuous effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking important information for grasping the progress of the continuous effect.

It should be noted that the NEXT image includes betting operations related to the next game (including betting operations by operating the MAX bet switch 18, betting operations by operating the 1-bet switch 19, and betting operations by manually inserting medals). The display is not ended even if the bet operation is performed, and the display can be ended at the timing when the start switch 12 is operated as the start operation of the next game, and the image regarding the result of the continuous effect is displayed by the bet operation related to the next game. It may be configured to end the display. By not ending the display of the NEXT image by the bet operation in this way, it is possible to emphasize that the continuous effect will be continued even in the next game.

Further, the display areas of the NEXT image and the image regarding the result of the continuous effect are configured to be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 52, the NEXT image is displayed in a predetermined display area at the bottom right of the liquid crystal, and the images regarding the results of the continuous effect are displayed in predetermined display areas at the bottom left and top left of the liquid crystal. ing. In this way, by changing the display position depending on the displayed image, it is possible to appropriately guide the player's viewpoint and make the player gaze at the entire liquid crystal.

Further, as described above, the NEXT image and the image related to the result of the continuous effect may be configured to be displayed according to the elapse of time after the start switch 12 is operated as the game start operation. It may be configured to be displayed according to the elapsed time since the third stop operation (sometimes referred to as the final stop operation) was operated.

Here, the operation of the start switch 12 or the third stop operation of the stop switch 13 is longer than the time (t1) from when the start switch 12 is operated or the third stop operation of the stop switch 13 is performed until the NEXT image is displayed. It is designed so that the time (t2) from when the stop operation is performed until the image regarding the result of the continuous effect is displayed is longer.

Specifically, (1) the time from the operation of the start switch 12 to the display of the NEXT image is longer than the time from the operation of the start switch 12 to the display of the NEXT image. (2) The image related to the result of the continuous effect is displayed after the third stop operation is performed, rather than the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the NEXT image is displayed. (3) The image related to the result of the continuous effect after the third stop operation is performed, rather than the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the NEXT image is displayed. (4) The continuous effect after the start switch 12 is operated is longer than the time from the third stop operation to the display of the NEXT image. It is designed to take longer to display an image of the results of

By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation until an image regarding the result of the continuous effect is displayed.

Also, as described above, the NEXT image is first displayed at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal, then moves to the lower right corner of the liquid crystal, and when it moves to the lower right corner of the liquid crystal, it stops there and is displayed. In other words, the NEXT image is configured such that the display start position (display start display area) and the display end position (display end display area) are different. On the other hand, the image regarding the result of the continuous effect is displayed without moving from the start of the display to the end of the display. In other words, the images relating to the result of the continuous effect are configured such that the display start position and the display end position are the same. In this way, by displaying the NEXT image while moving, it is possible to effectively inform the player that the continuous effect will be continued in the next game. In addition, by displaying the image related to the result of the continuous effect without moving the display position, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the result of the continuous effect.

<Navi image>
Next, the navigation image in this embodiment will be described. Here, the push order navigation image (sometimes referred to as stop operation information) will be described, but it is not limited to the push order navigation image, and may be applied to the above-described eye push navigation image and operation mode navigation image. .

In the present embodiment, for example, in a game in which the pressing order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery during AT, etc., an operation mode in which the stop switch is advantageous (the maximum game media that can be acquired in the game is awarded, etc.) It is configured to be able to display on the liquid crystal as a navigation image of the push order. Specifically, it is possible to notify six types of pressing order using numbers "1", "2", and "3", "1" indicates the stop switch operated as the first stop operation, "2" indicates the stop button operated as the second stop operation, and "3" indicates the stop button operated as the third stop.

In addition, the first stop operation or the third stop operation can be selected from two options (either the stop switch should be operated at positions 1 to 10 on the reel, or the stop switch should be operated at positions 11 to 20 on the reel. For example, either the image of 7 blue symbols or the image of 7 red symbols is notified together with the push order navigation image), and 12 types of operation modes can be notified by multiplying the 6 options of the push order. can be configured to The push order navigation image displayed on the left side of the liquid crystal corresponds to the left reel 8a, and the push order navigation image displayed near the center of the liquid crystal corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and is displayed on the right side of the liquid crystal. The pressing order navigation image displayed corresponds to the right reel 8c. For example, when "123" is displayed as the pressing order navigation image, it indicates the pressing order for operating the corresponding stop switches in the order of the left reel 8a, the middle reel 8b, and the right reel 8c. Note that in this embodiment, a part of the push-order navigation image is referred to as a "push-order navigation image" such as "1", and the entire push-order navigation image is referred to as a "push-order navigation image" such as "123". sometimes referred to as

<Mode of push order navigation image>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the form of the push order navigation image in this embodiment. In FIG. 56, the push order navigation image for the first stop operation will be described as an example, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are similarly configured.

The push order navigation image is composed of a "navigation number image" and a "navigation background image", and the display modes of the push order navigation image are "normal mode", "emphasized mode", "failure mode", and "success mode". is configured to have at least four of

A navigation number image is an image of numbers indicating the order of pressing. The navigation background image is a decorative image around the numbers indicating the pressing order, or an image showing an effect around the numbers indicating the pressing order.

First, <1> in FIG. 56 is the normal mode push order navigation image, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should not be operated at present is displayed in the normal mode. It should be noted that the sound corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in the normal mode is not output. Further, among the push-order navigation images in the normal mode, the push-order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated next and the push-order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated last are displayed separately. good too. In this case, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated next is displayed larger than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated last, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated at present is displayed. A mode in which the image is displayed smaller than the forward navigation image is conceivable.

Next, <2> in FIG. 56 is the push order navigation image in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated at present is displayed in the emphasized mode. It should be noted that the speaker S is configured to output a sound corresponding to the push-order navigation image displayed in an emphasized manner. For example, at the timing when the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated, a voice saying "Left" is output. It should be noted that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is larger in the push-order navigation image in the emphasized mode than in the push-order navigation image in the normal mode. It is configured so that the stop switch to be turned on can be visually notified. Furthermore, not only the size but also the push order navigation image in the emphasized mode can be displayed brighter than the push order navigation image in the normal mode, or the color and font different from those in the normal mode can be displayed. The stop switch may be notified visually in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, <3> in FIG. 56 is the push order navigation image in the successful mode, and when the stop switch to be currently operated is operated (the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image currently displayed in the emphasized mode is activated). is operated), the push order navigation image displayed in the emphasized mode is displayed in the successful mode. That is, when the stop switch is operated in the correct operation mode, the pressing order navigation image displayed in the emphasized mode changes to the successful mode. In addition, when the stop switch to be currently operated is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed in the success mode, a sound corresponding to the next push order is output (for example, the next stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is output. is output from the speaker S), and a push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated next is displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that the success mode push order navigation image is configured to be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the display is terminated.

Also, it may be configured such that when the stop switch is operated in the correct mode, a sound effect or voice (sometimes referred to as a success sound) indicating that the pressing order is correct is output from the speaker S. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the stop switch has been operated in a correct manner not only visually but also aurally.

Further, the push order navigation image in the success mode is configured such that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is larger than the push order navigation image in the normal mode. It should be noted that both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" of the pressing order navigation image in the emphasized mode and the pressing order navigation image in the success mode are configured to have approximately the same size.

Next, <4> in FIG. 56 is the push order navigation image in the failure mode, and when the stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated (the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in the normal mode is When operated), all currently displayed push order nav images are displayed in a failed mode. That is, when the stop switch is operated in an incorrect operation mode, all currently displayed push order navigation images change to a failure mode. In addition, when a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed in a failure mode, a voice indicating that the push order is wrong (for example, a voice such as "What are you doing?" may be called a failure sound) may be output from the speaker S, or it may be configured not to output a sound indicating that the pressing order is incorrect. It should be noted that the push order navigation image of the failure mode is configured to be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) before the display is terminated. Also, when a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated, the push order navigation image of the failure mode is not displayed, and the display of all push order navigation images is terminated immediately (for a time shorter than a predetermined time). may be configured as follows.

Also, when a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated and all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failure mode, the size of the push order navigation image is the same as before the stop operation. It is configured to remain as it is. That is, the push order navigation image displayed in the emphasized mode before the stop operation is displayed in the failure mode in the size of the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image displayed in the normal mode before the stop operation is displayed. The image is configured to display the push order navigation image of the failure mode in the size of the normal mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time from accepting the operation of the stop switch 13 to ending the display of the successful push order navigation image is greater than the time from accepting the operation of the stop switch 13 to the failure push order navigation. It is configured to be longer than the time until the image display ends.

With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority due to success, and at the time of failure, it is difficult for surrounding players to recognize that the pushing order has failed, so that the interest in the game is increased. can be improved.

Further, it may be configured to display the push order navigation images in all modes of the normal mode, the emphasis mode, the success mode, and the failure mode with an effect, or to display an effect for at least one mode of the push order navigation image. It may be configured to be displayed together.

Further, the push order navigation images in all modes of the normal mode, the emphasized mode, the success mode, and the failure mode may be configured to be displayed as moving images accompanied by motion, or the push order navigation images in all modes may be displayed still. It may be configured to display it as an image, or it may be configured to display at least one aspect of the push order navigation image as a moving image and another aspect of the push order navigation image as a still image.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is operated as a game start operation, display of all push order navigation images is started in a normal mode, and then the stop switch to be operated first at the timing when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. The push order navigation image corresponding to the (first stop operation) may be displayed in an emphasized manner. Further, when the start switch is operated as a game start operation, the display of the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first is emphasized, and the display of the other push order navigation images is started in the normal form. However, all push order navigation images are displayed as static images from the start of display until the stop switch operation becomes effective, and all push order navigation images are displayed in some way at the timing when the stop switch operation becomes effective. It may be configured to display as a moving image accompanied by movement.

By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the operation of the stop switch is valid, and it is possible to prevent mistakes in the pressing order. At the timing when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective in this way, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in an emphasized manner, or the push order navigation image is changed from a still image to a moving image. may be referred to as a stop-acceptable effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 12 is operated as a game start operation and the push order navigation image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect (sometimes referred to as a navigation display sound) is output from the speaker S. is configured as follows.

At this time, the timing of outputting the sound corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (for example, "Left") from the speaker S may be immediately after the start switch 12 is operated, or the rotation of the reel has started. It may be the timing, or it may be the timing when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. In other words, it is sufficient that the signal is output from the speaker S at any timing from when the start switch 12 is operated until the operation of the stop switch becomes effective.

By configuring in this way, even if the display of the push order navigation image is delayed due to a defect in the liquid crystal display, the stop switch to be operated first can be audibly recognized, so the progress of the game is not hindered and the push switch can be pushed. Order mistakes can be prevented.

In addition, FIG. 57 shows an example of the case where the push order navigation image is displayed on the liquid crystal in this embodiment. By displaying "123" on the liquid crystal, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a corresponds to the middle reel 8b. This indicates that the correct order of pressing the stop switch is to operate the stop switch in the order of the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c. In FIG. 57, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be the first, "1" is displayed in the pressing order navigation image in the emphasized mode, and "2" and "3" are displayed in the pressing order navigation image in the normal mode. displayed in the image.

<Configuration related to display of push order navigation image and power off>
Next, regarding the display of the push order navigation image when the power is turned off during the display of the push order navigation image, and then the power is restored without changing the settings, winning the prize during AT - A1 condition device, correct answer An example will be described in which the push order navigation image of "123" corresponding to the push order of "left, middle, right" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Regarding the configuration related to the display of the push order navigation image and power off described below, the timing of power off and the form of the push order navigation image are different ("213" corresponding to "middle left and right" of the correct push order) (navigation image, etc.) can also be applied in combination as appropriate. In addition, it can be applied in combination with <configuration related to display of push order navigation image and predetermined error>, which will be described later.

(1) When the power is turned off before the first stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the pressing order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated as the first stop operation, the speaker S outputs a voice saying "Left". A voice such as "Left" corresponding to the stop switch to be operated at present may be simply referred to as a navigation voice.

After that, in a situation where the first stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, timing such as the timing at which the driving voltage is supplied to the sub-control board after the power is restored and the drawing process can be executed, or the timing at which the driving voltage is supplied to the main control board and the command related to the pushing order is transmitted to the sub-control board. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as predetermined navigation timing), the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed again on the liquid crystal. Note that the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, at this time, the navigation voice is not output again. Further, at this time, the navigation display sound may be configured not to be output again, or may be configured to be output.

In this manner, when the power is turned off before the first stop operation after the push order navigation image is displayed, and then the power is restored, the push order navigation image is restored but the navigation voice is not restored. By not outputting the navigation voice when power is restored in this way, the processing of the sub-control board when power is restored can be reduced, and the push order navigation image can be quickly displayed.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the navigation voice is output again when the power is restored. By configuring in this way, the game can be progressed without discomfort before and after the power is turned off and after the power is restored.

In addition, if it is configured to execute the above-described operation acceptance effect at the timing when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, it is configured to display the push order navigation image along with the stop reception possible effect even when the power is restored. You may By configuring in this way, the game can be progressed without discomfort before and after the power is turned off and after the power is restored.

In addition, when the power is restored, the pressing order navigation image may be displayed without the stop reception possible effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing of the sub-control board at the time of power failure recovery and quickly display the push order navigation image.

Also, when the push order navigation image is displayed again when the power is restored, both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are displayed as the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation. The navigation image may be configured to display only the "navigation number image". By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing of the sub-control board at the time of power failure recovery and quickly display the push order navigation image.

In addition, when the push-order navigation images are displayed again when the power is restored, both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed for all the push-order navigation images that are displayed when the power is restored. may By configuring in this way, the game can be progressed without discomfort before and after the power is turned off and after the power is restored.

(2) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then the power is cut off before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the pressing order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal be done. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). Thereafter, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. In other words, the same image display as after the reception of the stop when the first stop pressing order for the stop switch is the correct pressing order is performed.

At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

At this time, similarly to before the power is turned off, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode, so "3" is displayed in the normal mode. At least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the pressing order navigation image. Also, at this time, even if the display of the push-order navigation image of the success mode of "1" has ended after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the power was turned off. , is configured to be displayed again when power is restored. It should be noted that the push-order navigation image of the success mode of "1" is configured so that when it is displayed again after the power has been restored, the display will end after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

In this way, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then the power is interrupted before the second stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the pressing order navigation image of "1" is displayed. is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. With this configuration, even if power is restored during AT, it is possible to accurately display the operation mode of the stop switch before the power is turned off, and prevent the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. In addition, since the success mode of pressing order navigation image is displayed again, the player can be made to recognize that the operation mode of the stop switch was the correct mode before the power was turned off.

Further, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then the power is interrupted before the second stop operation, the pressing order navigation image of "1" is displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. Instead, the push order navigation image of "2" may be displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" may be displayed in a normal manner.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to concentrate the stop operation to be performed on the player at present.

(3) When the first stop operation is performed incorrectly and then the power is turned off before the second stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the pressing order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. be. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), all the push order navigation images are displayed in a failure manner, and then displayed in a failure manner. When a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) elapses, the display of all the push order navigation images ends. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the pressing order is wrong.

After that, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, the push order navigation image is not displayed even at the timing when the drawing process after the power is restored can be executed. Also, at this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order is wrong is not output.

In this way, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner before the power is turned off, the push order navigation image is not displayed again after the power is restored. You can return to the game without raising your senses.

Further, as described above, if the stop switch is operated in the correct manner as the first stop operation, and then the power is interrupted before the second stop operation, the first stop is performed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The push order navigation image corresponding to the operation is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal mode. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation, and then the power is interrupted before the second stop operation, the predetermined navigation timing after power restoration Also referred to as navigation timing), the push order navigation image is configured not to be displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately perform the display after power-off recovery according to the game situation before power-off, so that the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, when the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner before the power is turned off, the player can return to the game without lowering the player's expectations (without carelessly raising the expectations).

It should be noted that if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and then a power failure occurs before the second stop operation, all the push order navigation images will be displayed in a failure mode at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. It may be configured to be displayed again with . Also at this time, after the power is restored, the failure sound and the navigation voice indicating that the key was pressed in the wrong order are not output. Further, if the push order navigation image of the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

With this configuration, when the stop switch is operated in the correct manner as the first stop operation, and then power interruption occurs before the second stop operation, the first stop is performed at a predetermined navigation timing after power interruption and recovery. The push order navigation image corresponding to the operation is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal mode. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation, and then power is interrupted before the second stop operation, all push order navigation is performed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The image will be displayed in failure mode.

With such a configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch is operated incorrectly before the power is turned off, even if it takes several minutes to recover from the power off, the push order navigation image of the failure mode will be displayed after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the gaming machine is out of order due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin even though the AT is in progress.

(4) When the correct mode is performed up to the second stop operation, and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. . Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "3" is displayed. A navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Also, a navigation voice saying "right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the "2" push-order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push-order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode. It will be displayed in size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed. Displayed in an emphasized manner. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, as before the power is turned off, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the emphasized mode. "Navi background image" will be displayed in approximately the same size. Also, at this time, even if the display of the push-order navigation image of the success mode of "2" has ended after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the power was turned off. , is configured to be displayed again when power is restored. In addition, the push order navigation image of the success mode of "2" is configured so that when it is displayed again after the power is restored, the display is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

In this way, when the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then power failure occurs before the third stop operation, "1" is displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after power failure recovery. The push order navigation image of "2" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode.

With this configuration, even if power is restored during AT, it is possible to accurately display the operation mode of the stop switch before the power is turned off, and prevent the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. In particular, since the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the user can concentrate on the third stop.

Further, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then the power is interrupted before the third stop operation, "1" is pressed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The forward navi image may be displayed in the successful mode, the push order navi image of "2" may be displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navi image of "3" may be displayed in the emphasized mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, since the push order navigation images of "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are displayed. are all displayed at approximately the same size. Also, at this time, the display of the push-order navigation images of the successful mode of "1" and "2" ends when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the power was turned off. It is configured so that it will be displayed again when the power is restored. It should be noted that if the push-order navigator images of the success mode of "1" and "2" are displayed again after the power is restored, the display will end after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again. That is, before the power is turned off, the display mode of the push-order navigation image is switched for each stop operation. The display of the push-order navigation images of the success mode of "1" and "2" ends at the same timing.

By configuring in this way, even if power is cut off and restored during AT, the operating mode of the stop switch before the power cut off can be accurately displayed, and the player's pressing order error can be prevented. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation images corresponding to the first stop and the second stop in a successful manner, it is possible to clarify that only the third stop remains and that the operation is performed in the correct push order.

Further, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then the power is interrupted before the third stop operation, "1" is pressed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The forward navigation image may not be displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" may not be displayed, and the push order navigation image of "3" may be displayed in an emphasized manner. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to concentrate the stop operation to be performed on the player at present.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect mode, and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, "123" The push order navigation image is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the pressing order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed in a failed manner, When a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the mode was displayed, the display of the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" ends. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the pressing order is wrong.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, the push order navigation image is not displayed even at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. At this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order is wrong is not output.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was turned off, the push order navigation image is not displayed again when the power is restored. It is possible to return to the game without raising the feeling.

Further, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect mode, and then power failure occurs before the third stop operation, the predetermined navigation after power failure recovery is performed. At the timing, the push order navi image of "1" may be displayed in the success mode, and the push order navi images of "2" and "3" may be displayed in the failure mode. Also at this time, the failure sound indicating that the keys are pressed in the wrong order is not output after the power is restored. It should be noted that if the push order navigation image in the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

With such a configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, by displaying again the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop operation in the correct mode, the player can grasp which stop operation he has made a mistake.

Further, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect mode, and then power failure occurs before the third stop operation, the predetermined navigation after power failure recovery is performed. It may be configured such that all the push order navigation images are displayed in the failure mode at the timing. Also at this time, the failure sound indicating that the keys are pressed in the wrong order is not output after the power is restored. It should be noted that if the push order navigation image in the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if it takes several minutes to restore the power after the power is turned off, the push order navigation image of the failure mode is displayed after the power is restored, so even though the AT is in progress. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the game machine is out of order due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

(6) When the correct mode is performed up to the second stop operation, the power is turned off before the third stop operation, the third stop is performed after the power is restored, and the power is turned off again. First, the start switch 12 is operated. Then, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "3" is displayed. A navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Also, a navigation voice saying "right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the "2" push-order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push-order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode. It will be displayed in size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power failure occurs, and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and "3". The pressing order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Note that the push order navigation image of the success mode of "2" (if the push order navigation of the success mode of "1" is also displayed, the push order navigation images of the success modes of "1" and "2"). is displayed again after the power has been restored, the display may be terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or a predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again. The display may be terminated immediately even before the display is completed.

After that, the display of the push order navigation image of the success mode of "2" is ended (if the push order navigation image of the success mode of "1" is also displayed, the push order navigation image of the success mode of "1" is displayed). is also finished), and in a situation where the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the emphasized mode, if the third stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the successful mode. Is displayed. Also, at this time, a predetermined image (sometimes referred to as a GET image) indicating that all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode is displayed.

After that, in the situation where the stop operation has been performed up to the third stop, the power is cut off again, and all the display of the liquid crystal ends. After that, even after the power is turned off and restored, the push order navigation image and the GET image are not displayed. At this time, none of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation are output.

With such a configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. Especially after the third stop, a new stop operation is not required, so by not reproducing the push order navigation image, it is possible to effectively make the user understand that there is no need to perform a new stop operation.

In addition, when the third stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then the power is turned off again, at the predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, all the navigation images in the pressing order of "1" to "3" are in the successful mode. It may be configured to be displayed again with . At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to clarify that all stop operations have been performed in the correct manner.

It should be noted that if the second power cut is before the execution of the payout process, the push order navigation image of "1" will not be displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, or will be displayed in a successful mode, and the "2" push will be displayed. The forward navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is configured to be displayed in an emphasized mode. For example, the push order navigation image may not be displayed at the navigation timing, so that the display contents after power failure recovery may differ depending on whether the situation before power failure is before or after execution of the payout process.

<Explanation about rare role navigation image>
Further, in the present embodiment, in a game in which a so-called rare role such as a cherry role or a watermelon role is won, a navigation image (sometimes referred to as a rare role navigation image) indicating the possibility of winning a rare role is displayed as "! !!” is displayed. The navigation background image of the rare combination navigation image and the navigation background image of the push-order navigation image have the same or substantially the same display mode. In other words, the pressing order navigation image and the rare combination navigation image are configured to be similar images with different "numbers" and "!". Also, the rare role navigation image may be configured to be displayed only when one of the rare roles is won. etc.) is determined to be granted, as an effect that suggests the possibility of being granted a predetermined privilege, the result of the internal lottery is configured to be displayed even in games that are lost or replayed. You may

In addition, since the rare role navigation image has no advantage or disadvantage depending on the pressing order, it is always displayed in the same size in one game (the size does not differ between the normal mode and the emphasized mode like the pressing order navigation image). It is configured.

Also, in the game in which the rare combination navigation image is displayed, any timing (the timing when the start switch 12 is operated, the timing when the first stop operation is performed, the timing when the second stop operation is performed, the timing until the third stop operation is performed) is performed, timing when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), and the display on the liquid crystal is completely terminated (state in which the power is not turned on). Thereafter, the rare combination navigation image is displayed again at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. It should be noted that no matter what timing the power supply is cut off, the rare combination navi image that is displayed again when the power supply is restored is displayed in the display mode after the start switch 12 is operated, such as "!!!".

With such a configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the player may have won the rare role. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from missing a rare role.

Also, in the game in which the rare combination navigation image is displayed, any timing (the timing when the start switch 12 is operated, the timing when the first stop operation is performed, the timing when the second stop operation is performed, the timing until the third stop operation is performed) is performed, timing when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), the rare combination navigation image may not be displayed again after the power is restored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the pressing order navigation image with the rare combination navigation image.

The display of the rare combination navigation images may be terminated one by one in response to the stop operation, or all rare combination navigation images may be displayed at the timing when the first stop operation is performed. may be configured. Further, when the display of the rare role navigation image is ended one by one for each stop operation, the rare role navigation image on the left and the rare role navigation image in the middle regardless of which stop switch 13 is operated. , the display may be terminated in response to the stop operation in the order of the rare role navigation images on the right side, or the rare role navigation images at the position corresponding to the stop switch 13 where the stop operation was performed may be stopped. The display may be terminated in response to .

<Display of push order navigation image and configuration related to error>
Next, regarding the display of the push order navigation image after a prescribed error (medal retention error, medal backflow error, hopper empty error, etc.) occurs while the push order navigation image is being displayed, and after that prescribed error is cancelled. , Winning during AT - A1 condition device is won, the pressing order navigation image of "123" corresponding to the correct pressing order "left, middle right" is displayed on the liquid crystal, and a hopper empty error occurs as a predetermined error will be described as an example. It should be noted that the configurations relating to the display of the push order navigation image and the predetermined error described below can be appropriately combined and applied even when the timing of occurrence of the predetermined error and the mode of the push order navigation image are different. In addition, it can be applied in appropriate combination with the above-described <configuration related to display of push-order navigation image and power-off>.

(1) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation. First, as shown in FIG. The forward navigation image is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the display of the push order navigation image becomes invisible (it may be made invisible by ending the display, The error image may be displayed on the front of the liquid crystal to make it invisible), and the hopper empty error image is displayed.

After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image regarding the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed. The images are displayed in an enhanced manner and the "3" push order nav image is displayed in a normal manner. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode, so that they are displayed in the normal mode. At least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the pressing order navigation image of "3". Also, at this time, the display of the push order navigation image of the success mode of "1" ends when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. It is configured so that it will be displayed again when the power is restored.

After that, the push order navigation image of the success mode of "1" may be configured so that the display is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed again, or after being displayed again. The display may be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time elapses.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation, then at a predetermined navigation timing after the predetermined error is canceled, "1 ” is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image of “2” is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of “3” is displayed in a normal manner. With this configuration, even if a predetermined error occurs during AT, it is possible to accurately display the operation mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the predetermined error, thereby preventing the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. . In addition, since the success mode pressing order navigation image is displayed again, the player can be made to recognize that the operation mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the predetermined error was the correct mode.

Also, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a hopper empty error occurs before the second stop operation, then at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the hopper empty error The display of the images is ended, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. may be configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, the player can concentrate on the stop operation to be performed at present.

The display mode of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 58, and the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIGS. are configured to have different designs (patterns, number fonts, colors, etc.). In this manner, the design of the push order navigation image may be configured to be appropriately changed according to the game situation. For example, when the degree of expectation for adding AT is normal, the design shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 is used to display the push order navigation image. may be configured to display In addition, it is possible to select an effect mode related to the effect tendency during AT, and when a predetermined effect mode is set, the push order navigation image is displayed with the design shown in FIGS. When the mode is set, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG.

With this configuration, the player can visually grasp the current game situation by designing the push order navigation image.

(2) When the correct mode is performed up to the second stop operation, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation. Is displayed. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "3" is displayed. A navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Also, a navigation voice saying "right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the "2" push-order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push-order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode. It will be displayed in size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the display of the push order navigation image becomes invisible (it may be made invisible by ending the display, The error image may be displayed on the front of the liquid crystal to make it invisible), and the hopper empty error image is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed. It is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push order navi image is displayed in a highlighted mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, as before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the emphasized mode. ” and the “navigation background image” are displayed in approximately the same size. Also, at this time, even if the display of the push-order navigation image of the success mode of "2" has ended after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the power was turned off. , is configured to be displayed again when power is restored.

After that, the push order navigation image of the success mode of "2" may be configured so that the display is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed again, or after being displayed again. The display may be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time elapses.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation, then the predetermined navigation after the predetermined error is cancelled. At the timing, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. there is With this configuration, even if a predetermined error occurs during AT, it is possible to accurately display the operation mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the predetermined error, thereby preventing the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. . In particular, since the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the user can concentrate on the third stop.

Further, when the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled. , the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is ended, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed. may be configured to be displayed in an emphasized manner.

At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

At this time, since the push order navigation images of "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are displayed. are all displayed at approximately the same size. Also, at this time, the push-order navigation images of the success modes of "1" and "2" are displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. is configured to be displayed again when the hopper empty error is cleared. It should be noted that the push-order navigation images of the success modes of "1" and "2" may be configured to be displayed again after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed again, or may be displayed again. The display may be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time elapses after being displayed. That is, before the hopper empty error occurs, the display mode of the push order navigation image is switched for each stop operation. After the error is canceled, the display of the push-order navigation images of the success mode of "1" and "2" ends at the same timing.

By configuring in this way, even if a predetermined error occurs during AT, it is possible to accurately display the operating mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the predetermined error, thereby preventing the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation images corresponding to the first stop and the second stop in a successful mode, it is possible to clarify that only the third stop remains and that the operation is performed in the correct push order.

Further, when the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled. , the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is ended, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is not displayed, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. may be configured to be displayed. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
By configuring in this way, the player can concentrate on the stop operation to be performed at present.

(3) When the correct mode is performed up to the third stop operation, and then a predetermined error occurs First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "3" is displayed. A navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Also, a navigation voice saying "right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the "2" push-order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push-order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode. It will be displayed in size.

After that, when the third stop operation is performed (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c as the final stop operation is operated), the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a successful mode. Further, at this time, since all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode, the GET image is displayed.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs and an image about the hopper empty error is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image regarding the hopper empty error ends, and the navigation image of the pressing order of "1", "2" and "3" is displayed again in a successful mode. be done. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the respective display of the push order navigation images of the success modes of "1", "2", and "3" started before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. Even if the display has ended due to the passage of time, it is configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is cancelled. At this time, the GET image may be configured to be displayed again, or may be configured not to be displayed.

After that, the display of the success modes of "1", "2", and "3" may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed after being displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

With such a configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, by reproducing all the push order navigation images in a successful manner after the predetermined error is cleared, it is possible to clarify that all the stop operations have been performed in a correct manner.

In addition, when the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed in the correct mode and then a hopper empty error occurs, an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled. is terminated, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are not displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a successful mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, the display of the push-order navigation image of the success mode of "3" ends when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. Even in the case of a The display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to clarify that the third stop operation was performed as the stop operation immediately before the predetermined error occurred, and that the third stop operation was performed in a correct manner. .

In addition, when the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed in the correct mode and a hopper empty error occurs thereafter, an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled. , and none of the push order navigation images of "1" to "3" are displayed. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
With this configuration, the player can recognize that the final stop operation has already been completed.

If a predetermined error occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image of "1" to "3" is displayed in a successful mode at a predetermined navigation timing after the predetermined error is canceled. , if a predetermined error occurs after the execution of the payout process, a predetermined navigation image of "1" to "3" is not displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after cancellation of the predetermined error. Depending on whether the situation before the occurrence of the error is before or after the execution of the payout process, the content of the display after the cancellation of the predetermined error may differ.

(4) When the first stop operation is performed incorrectly, and then a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation. to be displayed. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), all the push order navigation images are displayed in a failure manner, and then displayed in a failure manner. When a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) elapses, the display of all the push order navigation images ends. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the pressing order is wrong.

Thereafter, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image relating to the hopper empty error is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is ended, and all the push order navigation images are displayed in the failure mode. At this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order is wrong is not output. It should be noted that if the push order navigation image in the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

In this manner, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed manner after the hopper empty error is released, thereby informing the player of the game situation. It can be understood smoothly. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the release of the hopper empty error, after the hopper empty error is released, the push order navigation image of the failure mode is displayed, so even though the AT is in progress. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the game machine is out of order due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

Further, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image regarding the hopper empty error may be ended so that all the push order navigation images are not displayed. In this way, the player can return to the game without lowering the player's expectations by not displaying the push order navigation image in the failure mode again after the hopper empty error is cancelled.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect mode, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, " 123” is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the success mode, and the push order of "2" is displayed. The navigation image is displayed in the emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the speaker S outputs a navigation voice saying "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in the emphasized mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed in a large size.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the pressing order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed in a failed manner, When a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has passed after the display in the mode, the display of all the push order navigation images ends. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the pressing order is wrong.

Thereafter, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image relating to the hopper empty error is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is ended, and all the push order navigation images are displayed in the failure mode. At this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order is wrong is not output. It should be noted that if the push order navigation image in the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

In this manner, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed manner after the hopper empty error is released, thereby informing the player of the game situation. It can be understood smoothly. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the release of the hopper empty error, after the hopper empty error is released, the push order navigation image of the failure mode is displayed, so even though the AT is in progress. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the game machine is out of order due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

Further, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image regarding the hopper empty error is ended, the navigation image of the pressing order of "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the pressing of "2" and "3" is displayed. The forward navigation image may be configured to be displayed in a failure mode. With such a configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify in which stop operation the pushing order is wrong.

Further, at a predetermined navigation timing after cancellation of the hopper empty error, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failure mode. good. With such a configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify in which stop operation the pushing order is wrong.

Further, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image regarding the hopper empty error may be ended so that all the push order navigation images are not displayed. In this way, the player can return to the game without lowering the player's expectations by not displaying the push order navigation image in the failure mode again after the hopper empty error is cancelled.

(6) When the first stop operation or the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and a predetermined error occurs after the third stop operation. The image is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) to be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed. The image is displayed in normal fashion. Also, a navigation voice saying "Left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed large.

After that, when the first stop operation or the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, the push order navigation image displayed at the timing of the failure in the push order is displayed in a failed manner, and after being displayed in a failed manner, a predetermined When the time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed, the display of the push order navigation image ends. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the pressing order is wrong.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs after the third stop operation is performed, and an image relating to the hopper empty error is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is ended, and all the push order navigation images are displayed in the failure mode. At this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order is wrong is not output. It should be noted that if the push order navigation image in the failure mode is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time elapses after being displayed again.

In this manner, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed manner after the hopper empty error is released, thereby informing the player of the game situation. It can be understood smoothly. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the release of the hopper empty error, after the hopper empty error is released, the push order navigation image of the failure mode is displayed, so even though the AT is in progress. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the game machine is out of order due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

Further, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image regarding the hopper empty error may be ended so that all the push order navigation images are not displayed. In this way, the player can return to the game without lowering the player's expectations by not displaying the push order navigation image in the failure mode again after the hopper empty error is cancelled.

<Configuration related to display of push order navigation image and reel stop warning image>
In addition, in a game in which a push order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery and a push order navigation image is displayed, the stop operation is not performed for a predetermined time from the start of reel rotation (or the first stop operation or the second stop operation). (3 minutes) has elapsed, the reel stop warning image (also referred to as a stop promotion image) is displayed, and then the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation image are displayed at the same time. occurs, and after that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is displayed again, but the reel stop warning image may not be displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if an unexpected situation such as power failure occurs during a game, the player can concentrate on the push order navigation image, so that pushing order mistakes can be prevented. Regarding the display mode of the push-order navigation image at this time, the above-described <configuration related to display of push-order navigation image and power-off> can be appropriately applied.

In the present embodiment, a configuration of a slot machine (rotary type gaming machine) is exemplified as a gaming machine, but the present invention can be applied to various gaming machines such as a pachinko gaming machine, a parrot, or a casino machine.

As described above, each technical content of the present embodiment described to describe the present invention can be appropriately combined.

PS1 : Slot machine PS2 : Front panel PS3 : Cabinet S : Speaker 100 : Main control board 1000 : Sub control board 4 : Display window 5 : Lower panel 6 : Reel unit 7 : Reel base 8a : Left reel 8b : Middle reel 8c : Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Middle stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation instruction lamp 24a: Left operation instruction lamp 24b: Center operation instruction lamp 24c: Right operation instruction lamp 25: Bet number display lamp 25a: 1 bed lamp 25b: 2 bed lamp 25c: 3 Bed lamp 26 : Credit number display 26a : Segment display 26b : Segment display 27 : Winning number display 27a : Segment display 27b : Segment display 28 : Receiving tray 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Seal container 32 : Display Device 34 : Medal selector 37 : Setting key switch 38 : Setting switch 39 : Power supply 40 : Power switch 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal dispensing port 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal plate

Claims (1)

a plurality of reels;
a plurality of stop switches;
a display device;
and an internal lottery means capable of executing an internal lottery,
In a game in which a predetermined result is determined as a result of an internal lottery, when a plurality of stop switches are operated in a predetermined operation mode, a predetermined symbol combination can be stop-displayed,
As a result of the internal lottery, in the game in which the predetermined result is determined, an operation order image suggesting the predetermined operation mode can be displayed on the display device,
As operation order images, a first operation order image corresponding to the first stop operation, a second operation order image corresponding to the second stop operation, and a third stop order image corresponding to the third stop operation can be displayed,
In a game in which the predetermined result is determined as a result of the internal lottery and the operation order image is displayed on the display device, a predetermined error occurs after the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined operation mode is operated as the first stop operation. occurs, and the predetermined error is canceled thereafter, the game machine is configured not to display the first operation sequence image again on the display device.

Images